Agenda packet — Carson City Council, June 17, 2025 (part 2 of 6)

WINDOWS
BID ITEM(s) B3, B13:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the constructing and installation of all windows, skylights, and storefront systems by providing all related materials and equipment to remove the existing windows, skylights, storefronts, reframe, patch, and repair the rough opening per plan to receive the installation of the new windows, skylights, or storefronts. The finished elements of the windows include the metal mullions, glazing, waterproofing, caulking, hardware, metal PROJECT NO. 1795 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TP-33
security screens, anchor bolts, and blocking. See plans for more information. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the window bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

PAINTING
BID ITEM(s) B18, B19:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the paint and stain work of all surfaces, interior and exterior, by providing all related materials, sanding, cleaning, priming, masking off adjacent areas, matching new build with existing elements for a seamless transition, caulking, wood staining, and painting of all elements. The area(s) of finished paint includes interior gyp, interior wood, interior door, interior door frame, exterior stucco, exterior wood stain, exterior doors, and exterior fascia. See plans for more information.

Payment for the Paint bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

TILE
BID ITEM(s) B20, B21:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the preparation, material, and installation of all floor and wall tiles by providing all related materials and equipment, mortar, cement board, thinset, grout, tile, and sealing. Planning for installation, start and stop points with shop drawing submittals and approvals to ensure the finished installation is to the standard of the client.

Prepare all floor surfaces with a 1% minimum to 2% maximum slope for any nearby floor drain and provide a maximum 1/8” grout size. The areas to receive tile include the kitchen floor, meeting room wall alcoves, exterior kitchen walls, interior restroom floors and walls, and exterior restroom floors and walls. See plans for more information. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the tile bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

MISCELLANEOUS INTERIOR FINISHES
BID ITEM(s) B17, B22, B23, B24, B25, B26:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the preparation, material, and installation of all miscellaneous interior finishes by providing all related materials and equipment to sufficiently install on all surfaces with the proper material finish. Planning for installation, start and stop points, trims, adhesives, nails, and underlayment with shop drawing submittals and approvals to ensure the finished installation is to the standard of the client. See plans for more information.

PROJECT NO. 1795 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TP-34
Fiberglass Reinforce Panel (FRP): Prepare all surfaces to receive finish according to manufacturer standards, including required outside corners, top caps, adhesive, base trims, and color matched caulking. See interior elevations for more information.

Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT): Prepare all surfaces to receive finish according to manufacturer standards, including proper underlayment and waterproofing, adhesives, and baseboards. See interior elevations for more information.

Wall Mirrors: Prepare all surfaces to receive mirrors according to manufacturer’s standards, including blocking at all mounting locations, hanging hardware, and adhesives. See interior elevations for more information
Rubber Base: Prepare all surfaces to receive finish according to manufacturer standards, including required adhesives. See interior elevations for more information.

Gyp Board: Prepare all framing to receive finish according to standard construction practices.

Maintain a level 4 and level 5 finish at all interior gyp boards scheduled to receive a paint finish.

See interior elevations for more information and section 3.4 of the technical specification 092900.

Cement Board: Prepare all framing to receive finish according to standard construction practices. Tape and cement over any seams and prepare the surface for all finished tiles. See elevations for more information
Polished Concrete: Prepare all exposed interior concrete to receive finish according to manufacturer standards, include an approved densifier, dye, stains, sealer, and polisher. Provide slip resistant finish at required areas and sample to architect/owner for approval. See plans for more information.

Payment for the miscellaneous interior finishes bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule.

This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

MISCELLANEOUS EXTERIOR FINISHES
BID ITEM(s) B70, B73:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the preparation, material, and installation of all the exterior building finishes by providing all related materials and equipment to sufficiently install on all surfaces with the proper finish. Planning for installation, start and stop points, trims, and control joints by submitting shop drawing submittals and approvals to ensure the finished installation is to the standard of the client. See plans for more information.

Stucco: Prepare selected existing walls and all new exterior walls to receive stucco finish according to manufacturer standards including fasteners, sheathing, weather barrier, lathe, mesh prep coat, base primer, and finish coat with a sand level finish. See exterior elevations for more details.

Toung and Groove (T&G): Prepare the underside of the new roof overhang to receive finish and provide all backing, nails, and metal trims to install according to manufacturer standards.

Prepare material to receive stain finish and sealer. See plans for more information.

Payment for the miscellaneous exterior finishes bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule.

This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and PROJECT NO. 1795 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TP-35
incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

PLUMBING ACCESSORIES
BID ITEM(s) B27, B28, B29, B30, B31, B32, B33, B34, B35, B36, B37, B38, B39, B40, B47:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the preparation, material, and installation of all plumbing accessories by providing all related materials and equipment to sufficiently install all items whether recessed, surface mounted, or partition mounted. Provide all required blocking and attachments for the proper number of accessories and verify all quantities and locations.

The areas to receive such accessories are the kitchen, interior restrooms, janitor closet, and exterior restrooms. See plans for more information. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the plumbing accessories bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

KITCHEN EQUIPMENT
BID ITEM(s) B41, B42, B43, B44, B45:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the preparation and installation of all kitchen equipment by providing all related materials and equipment to sufficiently install and connect all items to required power and utilities so that they are fully functioning. Provide all required blocking and attachments for the proper mounting and services lines. See drawings for exact locations and requirements. The equipment includes the stove, microwave, refrigerator, ice maker, garbage disposal, and exhaust hood. See plans for more information.

Payment for the kitchen equipment bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

PLUMBING
BID ITEM(s) B48, B49, B50, B51, B52, B53, B54, B55, B56, B57:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the constructing of the plumbing scope by providing all related material, fasteners, blocking, piping, connections too new and too existing elements and utilities, plumbing fixtures, insulation, power, and equipment. Plumbing includes a new water heater, mixing valve, back supports, flushometer, venting pipes, supply pipes, sewer connections, water closets, urinals, lavatories, floor drains, floor sinks, P-traps, mop sink, faucets, and drinking fountain. See plans for more information. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the plumbing bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

PROJECT NO. 1795 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TP-36
M

ECHANICAL
BID ITEM(s) B58, B59, B60, B61:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the constructing of the mechanical scope by providing all related material, fasteners, blocking, ducting, exhausts, air balancing and connections new and to existing elements and utilities, insulation, power, and equipment. The mechanical includes an HVAC system, duct work, supply and return registers, air balancing, heat pump unit, exhaust fans, exhaust hood ducting, insulation, service risers, thermostat, sensors. See plans for more information. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the mechanical bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

ELECTRICAL
BID ITEM(s) B62, B63, B66:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the constructing of the electrical scope by providing all required and related material, removal of existing elements per plan, repair, and preparation to receive new work, connection to utilities and “existing to remain” features such as panels/breakers, modify switchgear circuiting, new circuiting to receptacles, lighting, and switching. Electrical includes distribution, sensors, data, and communication conduits, switching, circuiting, exit signage, receptacles, wiring for interior/exterior light fixtures. See plans for more information. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the electrical bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

LIGHTING
BID ITEM(s) B64, B65, B67:

PROJECT NO. 1795 TECHNICAL PROVISIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- TP-37

FIRE SYSTEMS
BID ITEM(s) B68, B69:

This bid item includes, but is not limited to, the retention and reinstallation of existing or new fire suppression features associated with the building, by providing all related materials and equipment to sufficiently install and connect all items to be fully functioning. Provide all required blocking and attachments for the proper mounting and required lines to connect to all necessary utilities. Coordinate new fire alarm system, sensors, strobes, pull stations to comply with all applicable codes and building safety requirements. Materials and installation shall meet the City of Carson standards and manufacturers’ specifications and shall be to the satisfaction of the Inspector.

Payment for the fire system bid items shall be as defined in the bid schedule. This shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals necessary to complete all the work in place and no additional compensation shall be given.

SPECIFICATIONS FOR

MILLS PARK BLDG RENOVATIONS

CARSON, CALIFORNIA
PREPARED FOR:

THE CITY O

F CARSON, CALFORNIA
April 2025
PREPARED BY:

BOA Architecture
1511 Cota Avenue
Long
Beach, CA 90813
(562) 912-7900

DOCUMENT 000101

PROJECT TITLE PAGE
MILLS PARK 000101

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Title : Mills Park Bldg Renovations
Client Agency : CITY OF CARSON
701 CARSON ST B24, CARSON, CA 90745
CONTACT: RAYMOND VELASCO
Tel: (310) 952-1700X1840
Location : 1340 E. Dimondale Dr.,
Carson, CA 90745
Project Manager : Raymond Velasco
Public Works Ops Manager
Consultant : Edward Lok Ng, Architect
BOA Architecture
1511 Cota Avenue
Long Beach, CA 90813
Tel: 562-912-7900
Tel: 310-832-2681
DOCUMENT 000102R1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MILLS PARK 000102R1 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS

INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION

Document 000100 Cover Page
Document 000101 Project Title Page
Document 000102R1 Table of Contents

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 1000 Summary of Work
Section 01 2976 Progress Payment Procedures
Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures
Section 01 3543 Environmental Procedures
Section 01 4000 Quality Requirements
Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls
Section 01 6000 Product Requirements
Section 01 7300 Execution
Section 01 7419 Construction and Demolition Waste M anagement Section 01 7704 Closeout Procedures and Training
Appendix A Geotechnical Report
Appendix B Collection Tank Manufacturer Installatio n Standards

DIVISION 2 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section 02 4100 Roof Removal and Substrate
Section 02 4119 Selective Structure Demolition

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE
Section 03 1000 Concrete Forming Accessories
Section 03 2000 Concrete Reinforcement
Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete
Section 03 3053 Miscellaneous Concrete
Section 03 3543 Bonded Abrasive Polished Concrete Floors

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY – NOT USED

DIVISION 5 – METALS
Section 05 5000R1 Metal Fabrication

DIVISION 6 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry
Section 06 1516 Wood Roof Deck Repair and Replaceme nt
Section 06 4023 Architectural Woodwork
Section 06 6116 Solid Surfacing Fabrication

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
DOCUMENT 000102R1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MILLS PARK 000102R1 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

Section 07 0150 Preparation For Re-Roofing
Section 07 2100 Building Insulation
Section 07 2719 Plastic Sheet Air Barriers
Section 07 5419 Polyvinyl-Chloride PVC-TPA Roofing
Section 07 6000 Flashing and Sheet Metal
Section 07 6207 Sheet Metal for PVC Roofing
Section 07 7100 Roof Specialties
Section 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping
Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants
Section 07 9201 Sealants for Roof Replacement

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS
Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors & Frames
Section 08 1613 Fiberglass Doors and Frames
Section 08 3100 Access Doors & Panels
Section 08 4113 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts
Section 08 7100 Door Hardware
Section 08 6000 Skylights
Section 08 8000 Glazing

DIVISION 9 – FINISHES
Section 09 0565 Moisture Testing for Flooring Insta llation Section 09 2400 Portland Cement Plaster and Metal L ath Section 09 2800 Cement Board
Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board
Section 09 3000 Tile
Section 09 3016 Quarry Tiling
Section 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceiling
Section 09 6513 Rubber Base
Section 09 6519 Luxury Vinyl Composite Tile
Section 09 9113 Exterior Painting
Section 09 9123 Interior Painting
Section 09 9623 Non-sacrificial Anti-graffiti Coati ng

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
Section 10 1400 Signage
Section 10 2115 Toilet Compartments
Section 10 2600 Palladium Rigid Vinyl Sheet
Section 10 2813 Toilet Accessories
Section 10 4413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinet

DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
Section 11 4000 Food Service Equipment and Fixtures

DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12 9300 Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials DOCUMENT 000102R1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MILLS PARK 000102R1 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Section 13 1400 Splash Pad Spray Elements
Section 13 1401 Splash Pad Water Treatment System
Section 13 2123 Pre-engineered Fabric Shade Struct ures

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – NOT USED
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION – NOT USED

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
Section 22 0500 Plumbing
Section 22 0522 Common Work Results for Plumbing
Section 22 1116 Domestic Water Piping
Section 22 1319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties
Section 22 4000 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment

DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 23 0500 Common Work Results for HVAC
Section 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Section 23 0713 Duct Insulation
Section 23 3110 HVAC Ducts and Casings
Section 23 3200 Air Duct Cleaning
Section 23 3713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles
Section 23 5732 HVAC Equipment
Section 23 5900 HVAC Instrumentation and Controls

DIVISION 25 – INTEGRATED AUTOMATION – NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
Section 26 0000 Electrical
Section 26 0010 Basic Electrical Requirements
Section 26 0500 Common Work Results Electrical
Section 26 0513 Basic Electrical Materials and Met hods Section 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Condu ctors and Cables Section 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electric al Systems Section 26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrica l Systems Section 26 0533.13 Conduit for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0533.16 Boxes for Electrical Systems
Section 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Syst ems Section 26 0583 Wiring Connections
Section 26 0802 Installation & Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems Section 26 2726 Wiring Devices
Section 26 5010 Solid State (LED) Lighting
Section 26 5600 Exterior Lighting

DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS – NOT USED
DOCUMENT 000102R1

TABLE OF CONTENTS
MILLS PARK 000102R1 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY – NOT USED DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK – NOT USED

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 1313 Concrete Paving
Section 32 1373 Joint Sealants
Section 32 1413 Concrete Pavers
Section 32 3119 Metal Fencing
Section 32 8400 Irrigation
Section 32 9000 Landscaping
Section 32 9223 Sod

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES – NOT USED

END OF DOCUMENT
SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope
A. The work covered by this section consists of furnishing all labor, material, and equipment and performing all work required for compliance with environmental regulations and preventing pollution during, and because of, construction operations under this contract, in addition to those measures set forth in other technical provisions of these specifications.

B. The Contractor and subcontractors must comply with all applicable environmental federal, state, local environmental, health and safety laws and regulations.

1.2 Notification
A. The Contractor must, after receiving a notice of noncompliance with the foregoing provisions, immediately take corrective action. The notice, when delivered to its Contractor or its authorized representative at the site of the work, is deemed sufficient for this purpose. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Engineer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost because of any such stop orders may be made the subject of a claim for extension of time or for excess costs or damages by the Contractor unless it is subsequently determined that the Contractor was in compliance.

1.3 Environmental Regulatory Compliance
A. Within 30 days after receiving the notice to proceed or not less than 15 days prior to commencing on-site work, the Contractor must submit any environmental documents that are required by federal, state, or local environmental regulations.

The Engineer must approve the Plans prior to commencing on-site work and must describe and include, but is not limited to, the following

1. Waste Minimization and Management Plan must describe how natural resources potentially impacted by construction will be protected or managed; construction wastes will be stored and disposed of or recycled; and pollutants associated with building materials will be controlled. The waste minimization and management section of the plan must also list materials and construction debris to be recycled and address the disposal of solid and hazardous wastes and materials, including asbestos and lead- based paint. It must also include tables applicable to the reclamation of chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs) and hydrochlorofluorocarbons (HCFCs) in accordance with the City recycling code and 1.4 (B) below.

SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Environmental Compliance Plan must document NEPA compliance by describing mitigation measures to address environmental concerns/sensitive receptors identified in the National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) document(s) in Section B. 1500, Attachments, and as set out in the mitigation measures in the General Requirements.

1.4 Environmental Site Controls
A. Location of Hazardous Materials: The location of the Contractor’s temporary storage of any hazardous materials and/or wastes must be appropriately marked and included in the health and Safety Plan (see Section 1.5 below).

B. Post Construction Cleanup or Obliteration: The Contractor must remove and properly dispose of all signs of temporary construction facilities such as haul roads, work area, structures, foundations of temporary structures, excess or waste materials, or any other vestiges of construction as directed by the Engineer. No separate or direct payment may be made for post construction cleanup and all associated costs must be considered included in the contract price.

C. Dust Control: The Contractor must keep the site free from dust in accordance with applicable regulations.

D. Noise Minimization: The Contractor must perform demolition and construction operations to minimize noise, including conducting work during less sensitive hours of the day in accordance with the City’s Noise Ordinance.

1.5 Health and Safety
A. Prior to commencing on-site work, the Contractor must submit an Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Emergency Action Plan (EAP) to the Engineer to demonstrate compliance by the Contractor and subcontractors with applicable OSHA regulations. If the Contractor is not required by OSHA to develop a written EAP, i.e., if 10 or fewer are employed for the construction project or any other specific regulations identified by OSHA, then the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a signed letter stating the Contractor shall meet OSHA's EAP requirements in a verbal communication to all employees.

B. Copies of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for any hazardous material(s), as defined by OSHA's Hazard Communications Standard, must be included whenever such materials arrive on-site. MSDSs must be kept together and maintained centrally on-site through to project completion. Provide a copy of each MSDS in the Operating and Maintenance Manual. The use of asbestos containing materials, more than one percent as defined by US Environmental Protection Agency regulations, is prohibited in the construction of this project.

SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Provide an executed copy of the “Certificate of Asbestos and Lead-Based Paint (New Work)” in the Operating and Maintenance Manual.

C. The use of lead-based paint is prohibited in the construction of this project.

D. The use of lead-containing solder for plumbing and plumbing fixtures is prohibited in the construction of this project.

E. The Contractor must sign and submit to the Engineer a “Certification of Asbestos and Lead-Based Paint” for this project.

F. See following exhibits for additional information.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Safety and Health and Related Environmental Requirements The Contractor is required to meet all applicable OSHA, federal, state, and local safety, health, and related environmental requirements in addition to the City requirement listed in this table.

Issue City Requirements
Asbestos Review of Facility Asbestos Survey: Before any building maintenance, equipment installation, renovation, alteration, demolition, or other project begins, determine whether ACBM will be disturbed.

Proper Work Practices: If ACBM is present, follow proper control procedures and work practices.

Consultation With Facility Asbestos Coordinator: Consult with the facility manager or his or her designee before the start of any work likely to disturb ACBM. Disturbance means activities that crumble or pulverize ACBM or presumed asbestos-containing material (PACM) or generate visible debris. Operations may include drilling, abrading, cutting a hole, pulling cable, and crawling through tunnels or attics and spaces above the ceiling where asbestos is actively disturbed or asbestos-containing debris is actively disturbed.

Asbestos Work Authorization: You must have an approved Form 8210, Work Authorization - Asbestos, before work begins within any building containing asbestos.

Barricades, Barriers,
and Warnings
Your barricades must meet the OSHA requirements. In addition, you assume control of your work area during your activities unless otherwise specified in writing by the City Engineer (CE) or City Engineer's representative (CER).

Confined Spaces Confined space work must meet the OSHA requirements. You must have a comprehensive confined space program that includes a written program, employee training, entry and testing equipment, and rescue capabilities.

If you require access to confined space requiring a permit, then the trained, designated City representative must review and approve the project and permit. Entry into other confined spaces must be in accordance with OSHA regulations.

Electrical Work Lock or rope off work areas involving exposed energized equipment or have an attendant present to prevent accidental contact by unqualified people. Refer to the Barricade section of this guideline for additional information.

Elevated Work and Fall
Protection
Follow strictly the applicable OSHA fall protection requirements.

Excavation All excavations 4 feet or more in depth must be properly shored or sloped and meet all OSHA requirements.

Before any digging or drilling commences, inform the City COR and call Dig Safe or its local equivalent to determine whether any underground utilities are in the work area. Submit documentation that these notifications have been performed. You must not begin digging or drilling until you have verified that underground utilities have been identified and are properly marked so that work may be accomplished in a safe manner.

Fire Protection Do not block, remove, or otherwise prevent City fire extinguishers from being immediately accessible and usable.

If a system must be impaired by a scheduled shutdown, notify the Engineer, and do not proceed without the Engineer’s authorization.

Hazard Communication Inform the Engineer before any chemicals are used. Before materials are brought on site, provide material safety data sheets (MSDSs) and an inventory of materials. For projects that are anticipated to use substantial SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
quantities of hazardous materials, you may be required to provide a routing, storage, and waste disposal plan.

Hazardous Materials Follow all OSHA requirements regarding hazardous materials. Hazardous materials include, but are not limited to, flammable and combustible liquids, gasoline, diesel fuel, motor oil, lubricating oil, hydraulic oil, corrosive cleaners, and battery acid.

Provide secondary containment for all containers of liquids that are over 5 gallons in capacity.

Immediately report all hazardous material releases ("spills"), regardless of how small or where they occur, to the designated Engineer. Releases include solids, liquids, and gases.

Hot Work Do not begin any hot work until the Engineer has completed and signed a City Hot Work Permit. The permit will be valid for only a single work shift.

You must display the permit at the work site.

You are prohibited from performing hot work (a) when the City has not authorized it, (b) in locations in which fire protection systems have been impaired, (c) in the presence of explosive or flammable atmospheres, or (d) in locations were large quantities of flammable and combustible materials are unprotected.

Powered Industrial
Trucks
Powered industrial trucks and other mobile equipment must follow all traffic rules of the City facility. The maximum speed limit for in-plant powered vehicles is 5 miles per hour. Many work areas have posted speed limits that you must strictly follow. Perform refueling only in authorized locations following safe procedures.

As a rule, the City does not allow gas- or diesel-powered industrial equipment inside City facilities. Coordinate exceptions to the rule through the City safety office.

Ladders Strictly follow all OSHA requirements regarding ladders. Barricade the ladder use area to prevent contact with mobile equipment and employees.

Lead-Based Paint Review of Facility Lead Survey: Before any construction, alterations, and/or repair activities begin, determine whether LBP will be disturbed. If the painted surface has not been tested, you must have it tested before beginning any activities that could potentially disturb LBP.

Proper Work Practices: If LBP is present, follow proper control procedures and work practices.

Consultation With Engineer: Consult with the Engineer before the start of any work likely to disturb LBP. Examples of activities that may affect LBP include paint removal by scraping, sanding, power tools, or heat guns; alterations that include removing drywall, structural steel, or other building materials coated with LBP; welding, cutting, or other hot work on coated metal surfaces; abrasive blasting of mailboxes and other equipment; and moving or cleaning of abrasive blasting enclosures.

Lockout/Tagout Provide a copy of your lockout/tagout procedures, which must meet or exceed the OSHA Lockout/Tagout standard. You will be given access to and must review the City lockout/tagout program.

If you encounter a City lockout/tagout device that prevents the continuation of work, do not make any attempts to remove, tamper with, or bypass the devices. Contact the Engineer and make arrangements to have the lockout device removed in accordance with City lockout removal policies.

Personal Protective
Equipment
Before beginning work, evaluate the work area for hazards, determine whether contract employees will be required to use personal protective equipment (PPE) to protect themselves from these hazards, and SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
document the hazard assessment.

Wear the PPE required regardless of your perception of hazard potential.

Regulated And
Prohibited Materials
Pesticides. The City has restricted the use of pesticides. Obtain prior approval of the City environmental compliance coordinator for special cases that may require the use of pesticide treatments.

Seventeen Chemical Prohibition. Adhere to chemical prohibition policies.

Do not use on City property any of the 17 chemicals prohibited by EPA unless the Engineer authorizes its use (each of these chemicals must be authorized separately). The district environmental compliance coordinator can supply the list.

Asbestos-Free Products. Install no asbestos-containing products or materials in City facilities.

Lead. Apply no lead-based paint in City facilities.

Scaffolding Follow strictly the applicable OSHA scaffolding requirements.

Provide adequate barrier protection around the scaffolding to prevent hazards to City staff.

Walking and Working
Surfaces
If the project requires temporary modifications to the means of egress, inform the Engineer before performing such actions, provide appropriate alternative means of egress, and communicate these to all employees.

SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Emergency Procedures
Preparations for
Emergency
Be prepared for emergency situations.

Ensure that emergency telephone numbers are site specific, readily available, easily read, and communicated to all employees.

Train and authorize employees to implement emergency procedures.

Medical Emergencies Have procedures and medical supplies to provide emergency medical services for your own personnel.

Determine how to contact emergency medical services before work begins and have on-site capabilities to contact such services immediately.

Fires See Fire Protection above.

In the event of a fire, you must:
- Immediately remove personnel from the area or building following City evacuation procedures.
- Immediately contact the nearest City employee and inform him or her of the fire. You may also activate an emergency alarm in the area. If no City employees are on-site, immediately contact the local fire department.

Personnel trained in the use and limitations of fire extinguishers may attempt to extinguish the fire if it is safe to do so.

Chemical Releases See Hazardous Materials above.

If the event of a hazardous material release, you must:
- Immediately remove personnel from the area or building following City evacuation procedures.
- Immediately contact the designated City representative and inform him or her of the release. You may also activate an emergency alarm in the area. If no City employees are on-site, immediately contact the local fire department.

Contractor personnel should not respond to the release unless specifically trained and protected to perform hazardous material response.

Power Outages In the event of a power outage, you must:
- Immediately stop work and assemble for a head count and possible facility egress.
- Inform all contract employees that equipment may automatically restart when power resumes.
- Immediately contact the designated City representative and inform him or her of the status of contract work and personnel head count. Relay at this time all hazards created due to the power outage.

When power resumes evaluate the status of operations that were being performed relative to hazard potential. For example, the interruption of ventilation in confined spaces may generate atmospheric hazards.

Accident Investigation
and Reporting
As soon as is practical after an accident, investigate and document an accident investigation. The documentation must describe the incident and identify the causes and the corrective actions that will prevent future incidents.

Report all accidents, whether or not they result in injury. Give the written report to the Engineer within 24 hours of the accident or incident.

CERTIFICATE OF ASBESTOS AND LEAD-BASED PAINT
(New Work)
SECTION 01 3543

ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3543 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
To: City Engineer
Subject: Certification for new construction
City facility name:

City facility address:

Certification for new construction:

This Contractor/Owner hereby certifies that no asbestos-containing material more than 1 percent as defined by applicable US Environmental Protection Agency regulations, and no lead-based paint has been furnished or installed at the referenced project.

Contractor/Owner name:

Signature:

Address:

Telephone: Date executed:

SECTION 01 1000

SUMMARY OF WORK
MILLS PARK 01 1000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS

GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE
A. The Contractor shall provide all materials, labor, tools, plant, supplies, equipment, transportation, superintendence, temporary construction of every nature, and all other services and facilities necessary to complete the construction of the restroom facilities, including all incidental work described in the contract documents.

B. The scope of work is contained in the contract documents.

C. The scope of work includes, but is not limited to the following and for the building to provide ADA compliance throughout:

1. INTERIOR SCOPE OF WORK
a. Provide new building addition and renovation as noted on the plans. b. Typical of all rooms: provide new flooring, new suspended ceiling, hard ceiling, repair of existing ceiling, new insulation at ceiling/roof areas, new LED lighting, new outlets, new extensions of HVAC ducts as needed, clean inside, outside of HVAC ducts and paint for a smooth finish. Clean all existing walls and paint all walls. Provide new doors, door frames, and door hardware per door schedule, provide new windows, and provide new glazing.
c. Meeting Room 100: provide new entry doors, new windows, new flooring, sand and stain existing exposed structure, & new LED lighting.
d. Kitchen Room101: renovate with new sink, cabinets, countertops, ice machine, microwave oven, refrigerator, LED lighting, roll up counter service door, and hard lid ceiling system.
e. Storage Room 102, 105, & 106: renovation of room to provide new electrical power, refinished concrete, LED lighting, crash wall FRP, and paint.
f. Office Room 103: provide new entry doors, new windows, new flooring, LED lights, and hard lid ceiling.
g. Meeting Room 104: provide new entry doors, new windows, new flooring, provide new t-grid drop ceiling, & new LED lighting. h. Janitor Room 107: renovate to provide new mop sink and faucet, water heater, refinished concrete, crash wall FRP, electrical power, and LED lighting.
i. Interior & Exterior Restrooms 108, 109, 112, & 113: provide ADA compliance. Provide new plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, toilet accessories, floor tile, wall tile, exhaust fans, LED lighting, paint, ceiling gyp board, and finishes.

SECTION 01 1000

SUMMARY OF WORK
MILLS PARK 01 1000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
j. Storage Room 110, 111, 114, & 115: renovate room to provide new electrical power, refinished concrete, led lighting, floor drains where needed for exterior storage and equipment.
k. Chase/Storage Room 116: New concrete slab, door, door frame, and door hardware, & new LED light fixtures.
l. New fire alarm system to be provided throughout the building.

2. EXTERIOR SCOPE OF WORK
a. Provide new replacement of existing exterior lighting with LED type. b. Remove the roofing material and HVAC rooftop equipment as noted. c. Provide new built-up roofing system and extend roof overhang at selected areas with new scuppers and new overflow scuppers. d. Provide new HVAC & exhaust equipment with new curb and flashing. e. Restore existing windows with new paint, replace all broken or damaged glass with new type, install anti-graffiti film at all windows, and provide Wireshield for fire-rated windows.
f. Pressure wash and paint the entire exterior of the building. g. Pressure wash and paint the existing metal seam pyramid roof material
h. Coordinate with city’s vendor to install security camera system. i. Coordinate with city to install new signage and a new “bulletin board” on the exterior of the building.

D. All work shall be in accordance with applicable codes and local regulations that may apply. In case of conflict in or between the Contract Documents and a governing code or ordinance, the more stringent standard as determined by the Engineer shall apply.

1.2 MISCELLANEOUS CONTRACT EXPENSES
A. The Contractor must include in its bid the cost fees or charges payable to State, local, or special community development agencies unless otherwise stated in the General Requirements. Contractor will be required to obtain building permits from the City’s Building Department as this is a City Public Works Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTIONI (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 2976

PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 2976 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for a certified Application for Payment.

1. Coordinate the certified Schedule of Values and certified Application for Payment with, but not limited to, the Construction Schedule, submittal log, and list of Subcontractors.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Section 01 7704 – Closeout Procedures and Training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Each certified Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as reviewed by Engineer, paid for by City, and:

1. The initial Application for Payment and Final Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The period of Work covered by each Application for Payment is payment date for each progress payment as specified in the General Conditions. The period covered by each Application for Payment is previous month.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use City provided forms for the Application for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form. Include execution by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of General Contractor.

Engineer will return incomplete applications without action.

E. Transmittal: Submit a minimum of one signed and original copies of each certified Application for Payment to Engineer. All copies shall be complete, including releases and similar attachments.

SECTION 01 2976

PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 2976 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application, in a manner acceptable to Engineer.

F. Initial Application for Payment within 60 days of issuance of Notice to Proceed:

Administrative actions and submittals, which must precede or coincide with submittal for first certified Application for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Certified Schedule of Values.

2. Performance and payment bonds.

3. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.

4. Worker Compensation certificates, if applicable.

5. Auto Insurance, if applicable.

6. Hazardous Material Insurance Certificates, if applicable.

7. Construction Schedule.

8. Submittal Schedule.

9. Emergency Contact List.

10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of Work.

11. Certified Payroll (Submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by City including hard copy).

G. Applications for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of Progress Applications for Payment include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Certified Payroll (submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by City including hard copy).

2. Updated and current Project Record Drawings (as-built).

3. Monthly Construction Schedule (updated, submitted, and approved).

4. Approved Schedule of Values.

5. List of Subcontractors (Payments Summary).

H. Final Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: Following Engineer issuance of certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment:

1. Administrative actions, submittals and/or Work that shall precede or coincide with this application include:
a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals by authorities having legal jurisdiction over Work.
b. Removal of temporary facilities and services.
c. Testing, adjusting and balance records.
d. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. e. Meter readings.
f. Start-up performance reports.
g. City personnel training and orientations.
h. Operating and maintenance instruction manuals.
i. Preliminary Warranties, guarantees and maintenance agreements. j. Delivery of extra materials, products and or stock.

SECTION 01 2976

PROGRESS PAYMENT PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 2976 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
k. Change over information related to City occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.
l. Final cleaning.
m. Ensure that Work is completed.
n. Advise on shifting insurance coverage.
o. List of defective Work, recognized as exceptions to certificate of Substantial Completion.
p. Change of door locks, including keys, to City system. q. Certified Payroll (submitted directly to Labor Compliance in electronic format as specified by the City including hard copy).
r. Certification that all benefit contributions due and owing to appropriate union trusts has been paid by General Contractor and Subcontractors, as specified by the Project Stabilization Agreement (PSA) and Article

6.49 of the General Conditions.
s. Waivers and releases for General Contractor.

Payment amount to be based on actual quantities of work completed and unit bid prices. Total bid item quantities completed x unit bid price.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3300 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Schedule of Submittals
A. Within 30 days after receiving a Notice to Proceed, the Contractor must submit a Schedule of Submittals, in the format indicated below, in duplicate, listing all items that must be furnished for review and approval by the Engineer. The schedule must indicate the type of items (such as sample, shop drawings, catalog cut, and so forth) and include the scheduled dates of submittal. In preparing the schedule, adequate time (10 days or more exclusive of time in the mail) must be allowed for review, approval, and resubmittal. Also, the schedule must be coordinated with the approved construction progress chart. The Contractor must revise and/or update the schedule monthly. Such revised schedules must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.

B. During bidding and within 30 days after receiving a Notice to Proceed, the Contractor must complete and submit to the Engineer a listing of all subcontractors, including subcontractor name, address, telephone number, fax number and email address. Include an updated list with each progress payment request.

C. Schedule of Submittals Format
Project
Contract No.

Project Description
Spec.

Section
Spec.

Description
Paragraph
Number
*Submittal
Type
Date Action
Taken
Assigned
Number
Submittal Returned
*Submittal Type:

C – Certificate CD – Catalog Data
S – Sample PL – Spare Parts List
SD – Shop Drawing MM – Maintenance Manual

1.2 Shop Drawings and Related Data
A. Prior to submittal, the Contractor must stamp and sign the submittal to indicate that it is in accordance with the contract documents without deviation and has been reviewed and approved by the Contractor. The Contractor must make any SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3300 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
corrections required by the Engineer. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the drawings to constitute a change to the contract drawings or specifications, notice must be given to the Engineer. Four prints of all approved shop drawings must be given to the Engineer. The approval of the drawings by the Engineer must not be construed as a complete check but indicates only that the submittal appears to comply with the contract documents. Approval of the shop drawings does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any error that may exist because the Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and for satisfactory construction of all work. The submission by the Contractor must be accompanied by a transmittal letter in a format approved by the Engineer.

1.3 Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists
A. When required by the technical provisions, lists of materials, equipment, and fixtures must be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the requirements specified for shop drawings. The lists must be supported by sufficient descriptive material, such as catalogs, cuts, diagrams, and other data published by the manufacturer, as well as by evidence of compliance with safety and performance standards, to demonstrate conformance to the specification requirements.

Catalog numbers alone are not acceptable. The data must include the name and address of the nearest service and maintenance organization that regularly stocks repair parts. No consideration will be given to partial lists submitted from time to time. Approval of materials and equipment is tentative, subject to submission of complete shop drawings indicating compliance with the contract documents.

1.4 Certificates of Compliance
A. Any certificates required for demonstrating proof of compliance of materials with specification requirements, including statements of application, and extended guarantees, must be signed and submitted in quadruplicate to the Engineer at least 10 days before delivery. The Contractor must review all certificates before submissions are made to the Engineer, to ensure compliance with the contract specification requirements and to ensure that the affidavit is properly signed.

Each certificate must be signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturing company and must contain the name and address of the Contractor, the project name and location, and the quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which the certificates apply. Copies of laboratory test reports submitted with certificates must contain the name and address of the testing laboratory and the dates of tests to which the report applies. Certification must not be construed as relieving the Contractor from furnishing satisfactory material if, after tests are performed on selected samples, the material is found not to meet the specific requirements.

1.5 Review of Submittals
SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3300 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. The Engineer’s review of your submittals covers only general conformity to the Contract Documents. The Engineer’s acceptance of drawings returned marked NO EXCEPTION TAKEN or RESUBMITTAL NOT REQUIRED (CORRECTIONS ARE NOTED) does not constitute a blanket approval of dimensions, qualities and details of the materials, equipment, device or item shown and does not relieve you of any responsibility for errors, omission or deviations from conforming to the Contract Documents. The City reserves the right to reject any previously accepted equipment, material and construction method that deviates from the Contract Documents. When the City returns drawings and data marked CORRECT AND RESUBMIT, make the corrections noted as the Engineer instructs then resubmit in the same manner as the original submittal.

B. If the Engineer rejects the submittal, you are responsible for any subsequent time delays at no additional compensation from the City. Subject to these requirements, drawings and data, after final processing by the Engineer, become part of the Contract Documents and the work they show or describe is performed in conformity with them unless the Engineer requires otherwise. In the event of conflict between accepted submittals and other Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements apply unless the City has agreed in writing to less stringent requirements in response to a deviation listed on a submittal letter of transmittal.

C. Do not begin any part of the Work requiring a submittal until the Engineer has reviewed it and returned it to you with a notation indicating that resubmittal is not required.

D. The Engineer’s review is only of general conformance with the design of the project and general compliance with the Contract Documents. It does not relieve you of full responsibility for providing Contract-required materials, equipment and work, properly fitting and constructing the Work, providing accurate and complete submittals, selecting construction fabricating processes and techniques and performing the Work safely.

1.6 Spare Parts Data
A. Spare parts data must be submitted in quadruplicate.

1.7 Schedule of Values
A. The Contractor must submit a construction cost breakdown using the City provided Schedule of Values. When applicable, a separate cost breakdown form must be submitted for each separate building. However, the total cost of site work SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3300 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
for each facility must be included in the cost estimate breakdown for each restroom building and exterior work. The number of items provided on the Systems Construction Cost Estimate Breakdown form are the minimum required.

The Contractor may use additional subdivision of these items if needed.

B. Submit the construction cost breakdown after contract award to the Engineer.

C. Do not delete items from the Schedule of Values form. However, expand the schedule “Description of Work” as necessary to allow evaluation of work or to make progress payments.

D. If the contract price changes, the Schedule of Values must be revised to reflect the change(s) and forwarded to the Engineer.

E. A current Schedule of Values must accompany all Contractor Requests for Payment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 3300

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
MILLS PARK 01 3300 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 4000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Contractor Quality Control
A. Contractor Quality Control: The Contractor is responsible for the overall quality of all its own work and the work performed by their subcontractors working under this contract. The quality of any part of the work installed must not be less than that required by the technical divisions of this specification. If the Engineer determines that the quality of work does not conform to the applicable specifications and drawings, the Contractor will be advised in writing of the areas of nonconformance, and within 7 days the Contractor must correct the deficiencies and advise the Engineer in writing of the corrective action taken.

B. Noncompliance with Quality Control Requirements: Failure of the Contractor to comply with the above requirements may be cause for termination for default as defined in the contract documents.

1.2 Submittals
A. Prior to the start of on-site work, the Contractor must submit to the Engineer a Contractor Quality Control Plan that includes the following information:

1. Procedures for reviewing coordination drawings, shop drawings, certificates, certifications, or other submittals.

2. Testing and inspection schedule, keyed to Construction Schedule, indicating tests and inspections to be performed, names of persons responsible for inspection and testing for each segment of work including preparatory, initial, and follow-up.

3. Proposed forms to be used include Contractor's Daily Report, Contractor Test and Inspection Report and Non-Compliance Check-Off List.

1.3 Quality Control Procedures
A. Monitor quality control over Contractor staff, subcontractors, suppliers, manufacturer's, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship.

B. Comply fully with manufacturer's published instructions, including each step-in sequence of installation.

C. Should manufacturer's published instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from the Engineer before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for work, except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 4000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Perform work by persons who are thoroughly qualified and trained in their respective trade, to produce workmanship of specified quality.

F. Perform tests required by governing authorities having jurisdiction and utilities having jurisdiction.

1.4 Testing and Inspection Laboratory Services
A. Selection and Payment:

1. The City shall select and pay for services of an Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory to perform specified testing and inspection.

2. Employment of Independent Testing and Inspection Laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

B. Laboratory Responsibilities. Contractor shall ensure the Laboratory has the following responsibilities and limits on authority:

1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor.

2. Provide qualified personnel at Project site. Cooperate with the Engineer and Contractor in performance of services.

3. Perform specified sampling, testing, and inspection of Products in accordance with specified standards.

4. Determine compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.

5. Promptly notify the Engineer of observed irregularities or non-conformance of work or Products.

6. Submit one copy of all test results directly to the Engineer.

7. Perform additional tests as required by the Engineer.

8. Attend appropriate preconstruction meetings and progress meetings.

C. Limits on Authority. Contractor shall ensure the Laboratory has the following limits on authority:

1. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or expand on requirements of Contract Documents.

2. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of work.

3. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractors.

4. Laboratory has no authority to stop work.

1.5 Quality Assurance:

1. Comply with requirements of all applicable ASTM standards.

2. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in State in which Project is located.

3. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full-time registered engineer on staff to review services.

4. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards or accepted values of natural physical constraints.

SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 4000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:
a) Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect or Construction Manager. b) Notify Architect and Construction Manager seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. c) Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at the Project.
d) Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
e) Obtain Architect's and Construction Manager approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. i. Allow seven (7) days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.
f) Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.
g) Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.6 Contractor Field Inspection and Testing
A. Contractor: Test and Inspect work provided under this Contract to ensure work is in compliance with Contract requirements. Required tests and inspections are indicated in each individual Specification Section and shall be performed as required by the City inspector.

B. Preparatory Inspection: Performed prior to beginning work and prior to beginning each segment of work and includes:

1. Review of Contract requirements.

2. Review of shop drawings and other submittal data after return and approval.

3. Examination to assure materials and equipment conform to Contract requirements.

4. Examination to assure required preliminary or preparatory work is complete.

C. Initial Inspection: Performed when representative portion of each segment of work is completed and includes:

1. Performance of required tests.

2. Quality of workmanship.

3. Review for omissions or dimensional errors.

4. Examination of products used, connections and supports.

5. Approval or rejection of inspected segment of work.

D. Follow-Up Inspections: Performed daily, and more frequently as necessary, to assure non-complying work has been corrected.

SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 4000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Testing and Inspection: Perform testing and inspection in accordance with requirements in individual Specification Sections.

1.7 Contractor’s Daily Report
A. The Contractor shall maintain daily reports, and provide copies to the Engineer if requested, for days that work was performed. Include the following information:

1. Date, weather, minimum, and maximum temperatures, rainfall, and other pertinent weather occurrences.

2. Daily workforce of Contractor and subcontractors, by trades.

3. Description of work started, ongoing work, and work completed by each subcontractor.

4. Coordination implemented between various trades.

5. Approval of substrates received from various trades.

6. Nonconforming and unsatisfactory items to be corrected.

7. Remarks

1.8 Contractor’s Test and Inspection Reports
A. Prepare and submit to the Engineer a written report of each test or inspection signed by Contractor Quality Control Representative performing inspection within 2 days following day inspection was made.

B. Include the following on written reports of inspection:

1. Cover sheet prominently identifying that inspection "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to Contract Documents.

2. Date of inspection and date of report.

3. Project name, location, solicitation number, and Contractor.

4. Names and titles of individuals making inspection, if not Contractor's Project Field Superintendent.

5. Description of Contract requirements for inspection by referencing Specification Section.

6. Description of inspection made, interpretation of inspection results, and notification of significant conditions at time of inspection.

7. Requirements for follow-up inspections.

1.9 Non-Compliance Check-Off List
A. Maintain check-off list of work that does not comply with Contract Documents, stating specifically what is non-complying, date faulty work was originally discovered, and date work was corrected. No requirement to report deficiencies corrected same day it was discovered. Submit copy of Non-Compliance Check- Off List of non-complying work items to the Engineer on a weekly basis.

1.10 Completion and Inspection of Work
SECTION 01 4000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 4000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Prior to final acceptance by the Engineer and issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion and/or Notice of Completion, submit a certification signed by Contractor to the Engineer stating that all work has been inspected and all work, except as specifically noted, is complete and in compliance with Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 5000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MILLS PARK 01 5000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General
A. The Contractor must provide all temporary facilities and services required to complete the work and to comply with OSHA and other applicable regulations.

B. The Contractor must maintain temporary facilities in a proper, safe, operating, and sanitary condition for the duration of this Contract. Upon completion of this Contract, all such temporary work and facilities shall be removed in their entirety.

1.2 Project Sign
A. The Contractor must construct and erect a minimum of two hard hat signs at locations designated by the Engineer. The signs must be erected prior to the commencement of on-site work.

1.3 Temporary Water
A. The City will provide and maintain a temporary water supply system from the existing services required for construction under this project and will pay all costs in connection with them.

1.4 Temporary Electricity
A. Service Required: The City will provide temporary electric power throughout the construction period from the existing service. Contractor shall be responsible for connection. Contractor to provide power centers for miscellaneous tools and equipment used in the construction work, lighting for safe and adequate working conditions throughout site (at least 1/4 watts of incandescent lighting per square foot, with a socket voltage of at least 110 volts and using 100-watt lamps minimum); power for construction building.

B. Safety: The Contractor must provide and maintain lights and signs to prevent damage or injury and must illuminate all hazardous areas. Safety lights must be operational from dusk to dawn.

C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: The Contractor must obtain permits as required by local government authorities, comply with the National Electrical Code, applicable local codes, and utility regulations.

D. Use of Permanent System: The Contractor must regulate any part of the permanent electrical system that is used for construction purposes to prevent interference with safety and with the orderly progress of the work. The Contractor must leave permanent electrical services in a condition new.

E. Materials: The materials may be new or used in the temporary works but must be adequate in capacity for the purposes intended and must not create unsafe SECTION 01 5000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
MILLS PARK 01 5000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
conditions or violate the requirements of applicable codes. At the Contractor's option, patented specialty materials may be used if UL-approved.

F. Conductors: The Contractor must use wire, cable, or busses of appropriate type, sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code for the applied loads. Use only UL-approved wire.

G. Equipment: In compliance with NEMA standards, the Contractor must provide an appropriate enclosure for the environment in which the equipment is used.

H. Installation: The Contractor must provide all required facilities, including transformers, conductors, poles, conduits, raceways, fuses, switches, fixtures, and lamps, located to avoid interference with cranes and materials-handling equipment, storage areas, traffic areas, and work under other contracts. The Contractor must install all work to have a neat and orderly appearance and to make it structurally sound throughout. The Contractor must maintain it to give continuous service and to provide safe working conditions. The Contractor must modify the service as required by the progress of the job.

I. Removal: The Contractor must remove all temporary equipment and materials upon completion of construction, repair all damage caused by the installation. and restore the area to satisfactory condition.

1.5 Sanitary Provisions
A. The Contractor must provide and keep in neat and sanitary condition conveniences and accommodations for the use of the construction personnel necessary to comply with the requirements and regulations of the local department of health and of other authorities having jurisdiction.

1.6 Approaches and Exits
A. The Contractor must provide all necessary approaches and exits required to properly execute the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 6000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 6000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Product Options and Substitutions
A. Provide Products that comply with Contract Documents, which are undamaged and new at time of installation.

B. Provide Products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and intended use and effect.

1.2 Product Delivery Requirements
A. Transport and handle Products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

B. Schedule Product delivery to minimize long-term storage at the Project sites and prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

C. Coordinate Product delivery with installation schedule to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

D. Deliver Products to Project site in undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

E. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that Products comply with project requirements, quantities are correct, Products are undamaged, and properly protected.

F. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

1.3 Product Storage and Handling Requirements
A. Store and protect Products in accordance with manufacturers' published instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible.

B. Store Products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's published instructions.

SECTION 01 6000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
MILLS PARK 01 6000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. For exterior storage of fabricated Products, place on sloped supports, above ground.

D. Provide off-site storage and protection when Project site does not permit on-site storage or protection.

E. Cover Products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Product.

F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area.

Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

G. Provide equipment and personnel to store Products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

H. Arrange storage of Products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify Products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 7300

EXECUTION
MILLS PARK 01 7300 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Meetings
A. Prior to issuing the Notice to Proceed, the Engineer will schedule a Pre- Construction Meeting with the Contractor to review the proposed construction schedule and delivery dates, arrange utility coordination and clarify inspection procedures.

B. Notwithstanding any other provisions of the contract, the Contractor shall not be obligated to perform any work, and the City shall not be obligated to accept or pay for any work performed by the Contractor prior to delivery of the Notice to Proceed. The City’s knowledge of work performed prior to the delivery of the Notice to Proceed shall not obligate the City to accept or pay for such work. The Contractor shall provide the required contract bonds and evidences of insurance prior to commencing work at the site.

1.2 Layout of Work
A. The Contractor must lay out its work to match existing or as indicated on the drawings. The Contractor must furnish, at its own expense, all stakes, templates, platforms, equipment, tools, materials, and labor as may be required in laying out any part of the work as indicated on the drawings.

1.3 Contractor's Temporary Use of Facilities and Equipment A. No new facilities or equipment intended for the permanent installation, including materials-handling vehicles, may be used for temporary purposes unless specified in the contract or unless the Contractor has the written permission of the Engineer.

1.4 Cleaning
A. Cleaning During Construction:

1. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

2. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

3. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

4. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site as specified in the Environmental Compliance and Management Plan as required in Section 01 3543 - Environmental Procedures.

SECTION 01 7300

EXECUTION
MILLS PARK 01 7300 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Final Cleaning:

1. Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property, or that might damage finished surfaces.

2. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.

Clean each surface or unit of Work to condition expected from a commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions.

3. Complete following cleaning operations before requesting the Engineer’s inspection for Substantial Completion.
a. Clean Project Site, yard, and grounds if applicable, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste materials, litter and foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove Petro-chemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth even-textured surface.
b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project Site.
c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surface finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.
d. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
e. Broom clean all concrete floors in unoccupied spaces. f. Provide final cleaning, waxing, and buffing of resilient tile, in accordance with manufacturer's requirements.
g. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other substances that are noticeable vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
h. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.
i. Touch-up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored, or that show evidence of repair or restoration. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical name plates.
j. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, and other similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings and other foreign substances.
k. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

SECTION 01 7300

EXECUTION
MILLS PARK 01 7300 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
l. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.
m. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned out bulbs, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures.
n. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

4. Remove temporary protection and facilities installed during construction to protect previously completed installations during remainder of construction.

5. Comply with governing regulations and safety standards for cleaning operations. Remove waste materials from Project Site and dispose of in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. a. Where extra materials of value remain after completion of construction have become City property, store these materials as directed by the Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
MILLS PARK 01 7419 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Preparation and implementation, including reporting and documentation, of a Waste Management Plan for reusing, recycling, salvage or disposal of non-hazardous waste materials generated during demolition and new construction (Construction and Demolition (C&D) Waste), to foster material recovery and re-use and to minimize disposal in land fills.

B. Related Requirements

1. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures.

2. Section 01 5000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls.

3. Section 01 7700 - Contract Closeout.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Integrated Waste Management Act of 1989 (AB 939).

B. California Code of Regulations Title 14, Section 18700 et seq.

C. California Green Building Standards Code.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Collection and separation of all C&D waste materials generated on-site, reuse or recycling on-site, transportation to approved recyclers or reuse organizations, or transportation to legally designated landfills, for the purpose of recycling salvaging and reusing a minimum of 75 percent of the C&D waste generated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. C&D Waste Management Plan (Exhibit 1): Within 10 calendar days after the Notice to Proceed and prior to any waste removal, submit the following to the Owner for review and approval. Update quarterly. Include:

1. Materials to be recycled, reused, or salvaged, either onsite or offsite.

2. Estimates of C&D waste quantity (in tons) by type of material. (If waste is measured by volume, give factors for conversion to weight in tons.)

3. Procedures for recycling and reuse program.

4. Permit or license and location of Project waste-disposal areas.

5. Site plan for placement of waste containers.

SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
MILLS PARK 01 7419 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. C&D Waste Management Monthly Progress Report (Exhibit 2): Summary of waste generated by Project, monthly with Application for Payment.

Include:

1. Firms accepting the recovered or waste materials.

2. Type and location of accepting facilities (landfill, recovery facility, used materials yard, etcetera). If materials are reused or recycled on the Project site, location should be designated as “on-site reuse and recycling”.

3. Type of materials and net weight (tons) of each.

4. Value of the materials or disposal fee paid.

5. Attach weigh bills and other documentation confirming amount and disposal location of waste materials.

C. C&D Waste Management Final Compliance Report: Final update of Waste Management Plan to provide summary of total waste generated by Project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 IMPLEMENTATION
A. Implement approved Waste Management Plan including collecting, segregating, storing, transporting and documenting each type of waste material generated, recycled or reused, or disposed in landfills.

B. Designate an on-site person to be responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the sorting and recording of waste/ recyclable materials.

C. Include waste management and recycling in worker orientation and as an agenda item for regular Project meetings.

D. Recyclable and waste bin areas shall be limited to areas approved on the Waste Management Plan. Keep recycling and waste bins neat and clearly marked to avoid contamination of materials.

3.2 ATTACHMENTS
A. Exhibit 1: Waste Management Plan
B. Exhibit 2: Waste Management Monthly Progress Report.

SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
MILLS PARK 01 7419 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
EXHIBIT 1

WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

CONSTRUCTION/ MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION & DEMOLITION PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: «PROJECTTITLE» «CONTRACTTITLE»
PROJECT NO: «Project Number»
NAME OF COMPANY:

CONTACT PERSON:

TELEPHONE:

PROJECT SITE
LOCATION:

PROJECT TYPE: NEW CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION

MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION PROJECTS
PROJECT SIZE (SQ. FT.):

DATE & ESTIMATED
PERIOD
(1)
Material
Type
(2)
Tons
Estimated
Recycle
(3)
Tons
Estimated
Reuse
(4)
Tons
Estimated
Salvage
(5)
Tons
Estimated
Landfill
(6)
Proposed
Disposal or
Recycling Facility
(e.g., Onsite,
Name of Facility)
Total
Diversion Rate: Columns [(2)+(3)+(4)] / [(2)+(3)+(4)+(5)] = Signature Title Date
SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
MILLS PARK 01 7419 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Column 1 "Material Types" – Enter type of materials targeted for recycling, reuse, and/or salvage, either on- or off-site, and include a category for waste materials requiring disposal.

Columns
2 thru 4
"Estimated Generation" - Enter estimated quantities (tons) of recyclable, reusable, or salvageable waste materials anticipated to be generated and state number of salvageable items.

Column 5 "Estimated Landfill" - Enter quantities (tons) of materials to be disposed in landfill.

Column 4 "Disposal Location" - Enter end-destination of recycled, salvaged, and disposed materials.

General : (1) Attach proposed Recycling and Waste Bin Location Plan. (2) Attach name and contact data for each recycling or disposal destination to be used.

SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
MILLS PARK 01 7419 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
EXHIBIT 2

WASTE MANAGEMENT PROGRESS REPORT

CONSTRUCTION/ MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION & DEMOLITION PROJECTS PROJECT NAME: «PROJECTTITLE» «CONTRACTTITLE»
PROJECT NO: «Project Number»
NAME OF COMPANY:

CONTACT PERSON:

TELEPHONE:

PROJECT SITE
LOCATION:

PROJECT TYPE: NEW CONSTRUCTION DEMOLITION

MAINTENANCE/ALTERATION PROJECTS
PROJECT SIZE (SQ. FT.):

PERIOD to
(1)
Material Type
(2)
Tons
Actual
Recycle
(3)
Tons
Actual
Reuse
(4)
Tons
Actual
Salvage
(5)
Tons
Actual
Landfill
(6)
Disposal or
Recycling Facility
(e.g., Onsite, Name
of Facility)
Total
Diversion Rate: Columns [(2)+(3)+(4)] / [(2)+(3)+(4)+(5)] = Signature Title Date
Column 1 "Material Types" – Enter type of materials targeted for recycling, reuse, and/or salvage, either on- or off-site, and include a category for waste materials requiring disposal.

SECTION 01 7419

CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT
MILLS PARK 01 7419 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Columns
2 thru 4
"Estimated Generation" - Enter estimated quantities (tons) of recyclable, reusable, or salvageable waste materials anticipated to be generated and state number of salvageable items.

Column 5 "Estimated Landfill" - Enter quantities (tons) of materials disposed.

Column 4 "Disposal Location" - Enter end-destination of recycled, salvaged, and disposed materials.

General : (1) Attach proposed Recycling and Waste Bin Location Plan. (2) Attach name and contact data for each recycling or disposal destination to be used.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 01 7704

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND TRAINING
MILLS PARK 01 7704 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Manuals
A. Purpose: Operation and maintenance manuals are for the training of and use by City employees in the operation and maintenance of the systems and related equipment as specified below. The manuals must consist of instruction on systems and equipment. A separate manual or chapter must be prepared for each of the following classes of equipment or system:

1. Doors & Windows.

2. Plumbing systems.

3. Mechanical systems

4. Electrical systems.

5. Miscellaneous building equipment and systems.

B. Submittal, In both “hard” and electronic flash drive format:

1. Preliminary Submittal: Two draft copies of the completed manuscript for items in this outline must be submitted to the City Engineer for review within 30 days after approval of equipment to be provided.

One copy will be returned to the Contractor within 15 days after submittal and, if required, must be revised, and resubmitted within 15 days.

2. Final Submittal: four complete sets of manuals must be furnished to the Engineer not later than 30 days before completion of the project.

3. Final Submittal must be accepted by the Engineer before training can begin.

1.2 Other Closeout Submittals
A. Additional requirements for Systems Manuals, Operating Instructions, Warranties, Training, and other deliverables are contained in individual Specification Sections. All closeout requirements must be provided to and accepted by the Engineer prior to requesting final payment. Examples of additional closeout requirements include, but are not limited to, the following

1. Final Punch-List with all items certified as complete.

2. Record “As Built” Drawings, the Contractor shall submit certified As- Built Record Drawings and Specifications in the quantities and media specified.

3. Warranty, the Contractor shall submit all transferable guarantees and warranties for equipment, materials and installations furnished by any manufacturer, supplier, or installer.

4. Signed Asbestos and Lead-Based Paint Certificate.

5. Survey Report.

6. Material Safety Data Sheets

7. Signed and sealed Contractor Release of Claims.

8. Payment for items of work covered in the plans specifications Division 1 will be based on the lump sum unit bid price for mobilization. No additional compensation will be allowed.

SECTION 01 7704

CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES AND TRAINING
MILLS PARK 01 7704 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.3 MAINTENANCE
A.

Extra Materials – Paint, Rubber Base, Porcelain Tile, Luxury Vinyl Composite Tile, or similar finishes: Full-size units equal to five (5%) percent of amount installed for each type, and color, pattern, and dyes. Provide extra material not noted here but reference in other specifications for this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not used)

END OF SECTION

3 Corporate Park, Suite 270, Irvine, California 92606
Office (949) 221-0900
Email: [email protected]

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

DMS Consultants, Inc.
12377 Lewis Street, Suite 203
Garden Grove, California 92840

Attention: Mr. Surender Dewan, P. E.

President

Subject: Geotechnical Investigation
Proposed Improvements
Mills Park
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Carson, California

References: See Appendix A

Dear Mr. Dewan:

1. INTRODUCTION

a) In accordance with your request, we have conducted a geotechnical investigation for the proposed improvements located within Mills Park in the city of Carson, California.

b) We understand that the proposed improvements will include:

i) Installation of a two-stall prefabricated restroom building on a new concrete pad;

ii) Construction of fabric shade structures/sails;

iii) Construction of steel shade structures;

iv) Construction of picnic shelters;

v) Construction of new concrete walkways and slabs.

c) Grading and structural plans are not available at present. We are assuming that the existing grades will remain unchanged. We anticipate the loads from the proposed structures will not exceed 3 kip/ft for the continuous footings and 50 kips for the column footings.

GLOBAL GEO-ENGINEERING, INC.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 2 ends

d) We reviewed the in -house geologic hazard map for the subject site. The project site is not located within a State of California delineated Earthquake Fault Zone (EFZ). The site is , however, located in a State of California delineated Seismic Hazard Zone for potential liquefaction. The California Geological Survey Special Publication 117A states a liquefaction analysis is required for:

Structures for human occupancy, with the exception of either of the following: (A) Single-family wood-frame or steel -frame dwellings to be built on parcels of land for which geologic reports have been approved pursuant to paragraph (1). (B) A single-family wood-frame or steel-frame dwelling not exceeding two stories when that dwelling is not part of a development of four or more dwellings.

e) Since the proposed structure s are not considered to be habitable and will not exceed two stories, a detailed liquefaction analysis is not required for this project.

However, we provided recommendations for the structure to be designed to reduce the effects of liquefaction.

2. SCOPE

The scope of services we provided was as follows:

a) Preliminary planning and evaluations, and review of geotechnical reports related to the project site and nearby surrounding area (See References – Appendix A);

b) Excavation of t hree (3) borings utilizing hand labor to a maximum depth of 14 feet below ground surface.

c) Sampling and logging of subsurface materials encountered in the borings;

d) Laboratory testing of samples representative of those obtained in the field, in order to evaluate relevant engineering properties;

e) Engineering and geologic analyses of the field and laboratory data;

f) Preparation of a report presenting our findings, conclusions and recommendations.

3. FIELD EXPLORATION AND LABORATORY TESTING

The field exploration program is given in Appendix B, which includes the Logs of Borings.

The results of the laboratory testing are included in Appendix C.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 3 ends

4. SITE DESCRIPTION

4.1 Location

a) The project site is situated within Mills Park, which is located southeast of the intersection of South Central Avenue and East Dimondale Drive in the city of Carson, California.

b) The approximate site location is shown on the Location Map, Figure 1.

4.2 Existing Surface Conditions

a) A community center building is present within the central area of the park.

Other current improvements include two, kid’s play areas , several picnic tables, and an outdoor basketball court.

b) The ground surface throughout the park area is raised approximately 4+ feet above the adjacent street grades. The natural topography of the site area descends to the west at less than a one percent gradient.

c) Surface drainage consists of sheet flow runoff of incident rainfall water derived primarily within the property boundaries and adjacent properties.

4.3 Geology

4.3.1 Regional Geologic Setting

The subject property is located within the Peninsular Ranges Geomorphic Province of California. The Peninsular Ranges consist of a series of mountain ranges separated by longitudinal valleys. The ranges trend northwest-southeast and are sub parallel to faults branching from the San Andreas Fault. The Peninsular Ranges extend from the southern side of the Santa Monica and San Gabriel Mountains into Baja California, Mexico (CDMG, 1997).

4.3.2 Local Geologic Setting

The project site area is underlain by Holocene-aged alluvial deposits.

4.4 Subsurface Conditions

a) The subsurface conditions, as encountered in our explorations, are described in the following sections.

LOCATION MAP
Date: January 2024
P
roject No.: 9864-04
Figure No:

GLOBAL GEO-ENGINEERING, INC.

GEOLOGIC AND SOILS ENGINEERING IRVINE, CALIFORNIA
1 2000 0 2000 4000

SCALE FEET
BASE MAP: USGS 7.5-Minute Topographic Map,
Long Beach, Quadrangle, 1981 N
O
R
T
H
SITE
Mills Park
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Carson, California
DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 4 ends

b) More detailed descriptions of the subsurface conditions are presented in our Logs of Borings, which are enclosed as Figures B -2 through B-4 in Appendix B . The locations of the borings are shown on our Boring Location Plan, Figure B-5.

4.4.1 Fill

a) Fill material, ranging from depths of 3.5 to 4 feet below ground surface, was encountered in all of our boring excavations.

b) The fill was observed to consist of slightly moist to very moist and soft to medium stiff Silty CLAY.

4.4.2 Alluvium

a) Alluvial deposits were encountered to the maximum depths explored in all of our borings excavated on-site.

b) The alluvium was found to generally consist of Clayey to Sandy SILT and Silty CLAY.

c) The alluvial deposits were observed to be slightly moist to moist and soft to medium stiff.

4.4.3 Groundwater

a) Perched groundwater was encountered at a depth of 13 feet below ground surface in our deepest boring (HA-1).

b) Historical groundwater monitoring well data within the site area was researched on the California Department of Water Resources online water data library. The closest groundwater monitoring well with the most recent data is shown to be located
approximately 2.6 miles east of the project site. Several measurements have been obtained and recorded from the well during the period from 2000 to 2023. Groundwater level data collected from this well indicates that the groundwater levels have ranged from as deep as 146.76 feet below ground surface (September 2014) to as shallow as 50.37 feet below ground surface (March 2017).

c) The historically highest groundwater level at the site location is approximately 20 feet below natural ground surface, per the Seismic Hazard Zone Report for the Long Beach 7.5- Minute Quadrangle, published by the California Geological Survey
DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 5 ends

5. SEISMICITY

5.1 General

a) The property is located in the general proximity of several active and potentially active faults, which are typical for sites in the Southern California region. Earthquakes occurring on active faults within a 70- mile radius are capable of generating ground shaking of engineering significance to the proposed construction.

b) In Southern California, most of the seismic damage to manmade structures results from ground shaking and, to a lesser degree, from liquefaction and ground rupture caused by earthquakes along active fault zones. In general, the greater the magnitude of the earthquake, greater is the potential damage.

5.2 Ground Surface Rupture

a) The closest known active fault is the Newport -Inglewood Fault, located at a distance of about 1.63 miles north of the project site. Other nearby known active faults include the Whittier Fault and the Santa Monica Fault, located at distances of about 16.7 miles and 18 miles, respectively, from the subject property.

b) Due to the distance of the closest active fault to the site, ground rupture is not considered a significant hazard at the site.

5.3 Ground Shaking

a) We utilized the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) Seismic Design Maps internet program to calculate the peak ground acceleration (PGA) at the project site location.

Using the ASCE 7- 16 standard and Site Class D, t he PGA at the subject property resulted to be 0.821g.

b) Figure 2 shows the geographical relationships among the site locations, nearby faults and the epicenters of significant occurrences. The project site is not located within any State of California delineated Earthquake Fault Zone; however, during historic times, a number of major earthquakes have occurred along the active faults in Southern California.

c) F rom the seismic history of the region and proximity, the Newport - Inglewood Fault has the greatest potential for causing earthquake damage related to ground shaking at this site.

Mills Park
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Carson, California
Date: January 2024
Project No: 9864-04
Figure No:
2 GLOBAL GEO-ENGINEERING, INC.

GEOLOGIC AND SOILS ENGINEERING

IRVINE, CALIFORNIA

MAJOR EARTHQUAKES AND RECENTLY ACTIVE FAULTS IN THE

SOUTHERN CALIFORNIA REGION

EXPLANATION

EARTHQUAKE LOCATIONS
Approximate epicentral area of earthquakes that
occurred 1769 -1933. magnitudes not recorded by
instruments prior to 1906 were estimated from
damage reports assigned on Intensity VII (Modified
Mercali scale) or greater; this is roughly equivalent
to Richter M 6.0. 31 moderate**earthquakes, 7 major
and one great earthquake (1857) were reported in the
164-year period 1769-1933.

Earthquake epicenters since 1933, plotted from
instruments. 33 moderate** and five major
earthquakes were in the 66-year period 1933 to 1999.

ACTIVE FAULTS

Total length of fault zone that breaks
Halocene deposits or that has had
seismic activity.

Fault segment with surface rupture
during an historic earthquake, or with
aseismic fault creep.

Halocene volcanic activity
(Amboy, Pisgah, Cerro Prieto and Salton
Buttes
1899
M7+
1952
M7.7
**Code recommendations by the Structural Engineers Association of California define a great earthquake as one that has a Richter Magnitude of 7 ¾ or greater; a major earthquake 7 to 7 ¾; a moderate earthquake 6 to 7.

Compiled by Richard J. Proctor mainly from publish ed and unpublished data of the California Division of Mines and Geology; California Department of Water Resources Bulletin 116-2 (1964); selections from bulletins of the Geological and Seismological Societies of America; from C.F. Richter, Elementary Seismology (1958); and the National Atlas, p. 66, and from Working Group on California Earthquake Probabilities - SSA Bulletin V 85.

SITE
DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 6 ends

5.4 Liquefaction

Perched ground water was encountered at a depth of 13 feet below ground surface in our deepest boring (HA-1). The depth to free groundwater is anticipated to range from 20 to 50 feet below ground surface. T he subsurface soils predominantly consist of c ohesive soils. A potential for liquefaction present but low. The recommendations to reduce the effects of the liquefaction are provided in the following paragraphs.

6. CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

6.1 General

a) It is our opinion that the site will be suitable for the proposed development, from a geotechnical aspect, assuming that our recommendations are implemented.

b) We are of the opinion that the proposed structures can be supported on shallow mat footings founded in the compacted fill soils.

c) We consider that the anticipated grading will not adversely affect, nor be adversely affected by adjoining property, with due precautions being taken.

d) The final grading plans and foundation plans/design loads should be reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

e) The design recommendations in the report should be reviewed during the construction phase.

6.2 Grading

6.2.1 Processing of On- Site Soils

a) To provide uniform support conditions to lightly loaded proposed structures, to reduce the effects of the liquefaction and of the expansive soils, the subgrade soils should be overexcavated to a depth of one foot below the mat foundation, subject to review during construction. The overexcavation should laterally extend for a distance of one foot.

b) There should be at least one foot of reworked soils or compacted fill below the exterior hardscape.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 7 ends

c) The bottom of the overexcavation should exhibit at least 85 percent relative compaction. If not, the overexcavation may be required to be deepened.

d) Wherever structural fills are to be placed, the upper 6 to 8 inches of the subgrade should, after stripping or overexcavation, first be scarified, reworked and wetted down thoroughly.

e) Any loosening of reworked or native material, consequent to the passage of construction traffic, weathering, etc., should be made good prior to further construction.

f) The depths of overexcavation should be reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer during the actual construction. Any surface or subsurface obstructions, or questionable material encountered during grading should be brought immediately to the attention of the Geotechnical Engineer for proper exposure, removal or processing as directed. No underground obstructions or facilities should remain in any structural areas. Depressions and/or cavities created as a result of the removal of obstructions should be backfilled properly with suitable material, and compacted.

6.2.2 Material Selection

After the site has been stripped of any debris, vegetation and organic soils, excavated on -site soils are considered satisfactory for reuse in the construction of on-site fills, with the following provisions:

a) Significant water will be required to be added to the existing soils;

b) The organic content does not exceed 3 percent by volume;

c) Large size rocks greater than 8 inches in diameter should not be incorporated in compacted fill;

d) Rocks greater than 4 inches in diameter should not be incorporated in compacted fill to within one foot of the underside of the footings and slabs.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 8 ends

6.2.3 Compaction Requirements

a) Reworking/compaction shall include drying as needed to bring the soils to slightly above the optimum moisture content. All reworked soils and structural fills should be densified to achieve at least 90 percent relative compaction with reference to laboratory compaction standard. The optimum moisture content and
maximum dry density should be determined in the laboratory in accordance with ASTM Test Designation D1557.

b) Fill should be compacted in lifts not exceeding 8 inches (loose).

6.2.4 Excavating Conditions

a) Excavation of on- site materials may be accomplished with standard earthmoving or trenching equipment. No hard rock was encountered which will require blasting.

b) Perched groundwater was encountered at a depth of 13 feet in our deepest boring. Dewatering is anticipated in excavations extending deeper than 13 feet below existing ground surface.

6.2.5 Shrinkage

For preliminary earthwork calculation, an average shrinkage factor of approximately 10 percent is recommended for the soils (this does not include handling losses).

6.2.6 Expansion Potential

a) Based upon the laboratory testing, the expansion potential for the on-site soils is considered to be medium.

b) Any imported material, or doubtful material exposed during grading, should be evaluated for its expansive properties.

c) In any event, the subgrade soils should be tested for their expansion potential or during the final stages of grading.

6.2.7 Sulphate Content

a) The sulphate contents of representative samples of the soil are greater than 0.1%. The sulphate exposure is considered to be severe.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 9 ends

b) Use of 4,500 psi strength concrete is suggested, however, the final recommendations should be provided by the structural engineer.

6.2.8 Utility Trenching

a) The walls of temporary construction trenches in fill should stand nearly vertical, with only minor sloughing, provided the total depth does not exceed 3 feet (approximately). Shoring of excavation walls or flattening of slopes may be required, if greater depths are necessary.

b) Trenches should be located so as not to impair the bearing capacity or to cause settlement under foundations. As a guide, trenches should be clear of a 45- degree plane, extending outward and downward from the edge of foundations. Shoring should comply with Cal-OSHA regulations.

c) Existing soils may be utilized for trenching backfill, provided they are free of organic materials.

d) All work associated with trench shoring must conform to the state and federal safety codes.

6.2.9 Surface Drainage Provisions

Positive surface gradients should be provided adjacent to the buildings to direct surface water run -off away from structural foundations and to suitable discharge facilities.

6.2.10 Grading Control

All grading and earthwork should be performed under the observation of a Geotechnical Engineer in order to achieve proper subgrade preparation, selection of satisfactory materials, placement and compaction of all structural fill. Sufficient notification prior to stripping and earthwork construction is essential to make certain that the work will be adequately observed and tested.

6.3 Mat Foundation

a) The proposed equipment pad may be supported on mat footings founded in the competent soils.

b) The mat should be at least 12 inches thick and should be embedded 6 inches below the lowest finished surface.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 10 ends

c) The following parameters should be utilized for the design of the building.

The allowable values are provided below:

Bearing Capacity (lb/ft2) Modulus of Subgrade
Reaction (lb/in3)
Fill Soils 1,000 100

d) Footing excavations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer.

e) Total static settlement under mat footings are expected to be within tolerable limits and are not expected to exceed ¾ inch. Due to the lighter uniform loads from the mat footing, the differential settlement will not exceed ¼ inch.

6.4 Exterior Slab-on-Grade

a) The exterior concrete slab may be founded on the reworked existing soils or compacted fill.

b) The slab should be underlain by six inches of granular mat erial. A plastic vapor barrier is recommended to be placed at the mid -height of the base layer.

c) It is recommended that #4 bars on 12-inch center, both ways, or equivalent be provided as minimum reinforcement in slabs-on-grade. Joints should be provided and slabs supporting no vehicular traffic should be at least 6 inches thick.

d) The FFL should be at least 6 inches above highest adjacent grade.

e) The subgrade soils should be kept moist prior to the concrete pour.

f) To further reduce the effects of the expansive soils, it is suggested that the upper 12 inches of the subgrade soils are replaced with imported soils with low expansion potential and compacted to 90 percent relative compaction.

6.5 Seismic Coefficients

For seismic analysis of the proposed project in accordance wit h the seismic provisions of ASCE 7-16, we recommend the following:

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 11 ends

ITEM VALUE
Site Latitude (Decimal-degrees) 33.84847
Site Longitude (Decimal-degrees) -118.24729
Site Class D-Default
Risk Category II
Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration-Short Period (0.2 Sec) - SS 1.717 Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration-1 Second Period – S1 0.617 Short Period Site Coefficient-Fa 1.2
Long Period Site Coefficient Fv 1.

Adjusted Spectral Response Acceleration @ 0.2 Sec. Period (Sms) 2.060 Adjusted Spectral Response Acceleration @ 1Sec.Period (Sm1) 1.049 Design Spectral Response Acceleration @ 0.2 Sec. Period (SDs) 1.374 Design Spectral Response Acceleration @ 1-Sec. Period (SD1) 0.700

6.6 Corrosion Potential

a) Soil Corrosion potential for metal and concrete was estimated by performing water -soluble sulfate, chloride, pH, and electrical resistivity tests during this investigation.

b) Electrical resistivity is a measure of soil resistance to the flow of corrosion currents. Corrosion currents are generally high in low resistivity soils.

The electrical resistivity of a soil decreases primarily with an increase in its chemical and moisture contents.

c) A commonly accepted correlation between electrical resistivity and corrosivity for buried ferrous metals is presented below:

Electrical Resistivity, Ohm-cm Corrosion Potential
Less than 1,000 Severe
1,000-2,000 Corrosive
2,000-10,000 Moderate
Greater than 10,000 Mild

d) Results of electrical resistivity test indicate a value of 1,256 ohm- cm for the near-surface soils. Based on this data, it is our opinion that, in general, on-site near-surface soils are considered sever ely corrosive in nature. This potential should be considered in design of underground metal pipes.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 12 ends

7. LIMITATIONS

a) Soils and bedrock over an area show variations in geological structure, type, strength and other properties from what can be observed, sampled and tested from specimens extracted from necessarily limited exploratory borings. Therefore, there are natural limitations inherent in making geologic and soil engineering studies and analyses.

Our findings, interpretations, analyses and recommendations are based on observation, laboratory data and our professional experience; and the projections we make are professional judgments conforming to the usual standards of the profession. No other warranty is herein expressed or implied.

b) In the event that during construction, conditions are exposed which are significantly different from those described in this report, they should be brought to the attention of the Geotechnical Engineer.

c) T he recommendations included in this report are intended to minimize the potential of distress caused by the underlying soils. However, it should be noted that certain amount of cracking, uplifting and tilting of may be unavoidable and should be anticipated during the lifetime of the proposed structures.

d) Other factors that should be considered with respect to the stability of temporary excavation sidewalls include construction traffic and storage of materials on or near the tops of the slopes, construction scheduling, and weather conditions at the time of construction. All applicable requirements of the California Construction and General Industry Safety Orders, the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and the Construction Safety Act should also be followed. No temporary excavations should be left open without proper protections to mitigate safety hazards.

e) The contractor is solely responsible for ensuring the safety of construction personnel and the general public, and for appointing a designated Competent Person to observe and classify temporary excavation sidewalls pursuant to OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction.

DMS Consultants, Inc.

January 2, 2024
Project 9864-04

Page 13 ends

The opportunity to be of service is sincerely appreciated. If you have any questions or if we can be o
f further assistance, please call.

V
ery truly yours,
GL
OBAL GEO-ENGINEERING, INC.

M
ohan B. Upasani Kevin B. Young
Principal Geotechnical Engineer Principal Engineering Geologist RGE 2301 CEG 2253
(Exp. March 31, 2025) (Exp. October 31, 2025)
M
BU/KBY: fdg
E
nclosures:

L
ocation Map - Figure 1
Seismicity Map - Figure 2
References - Appendix A
Field Exploration - Appendix B
Unified Soils Classification System Figure B-1
Logs of Borings Figures B-2 through B-4
Boring Location Plan Figure B-5
Laboratory Testing - Appendix C

Project 9864-04

APPENDIX A

References

1. California Department of Water Resources, Data Retrieved October 3, 2023, Water Data Library Station Map.

2. California Geological Survey, Earthquake Fault Zones of Required Investigation, (Internet).

3. California Geological Survey, 1998 (Revised 2001, 2005 and 2006), Seismic Hazard Zone Report for the Long Beach 7.5- Minute Quadrangle, Los Angeles County, California, Seismic Hazard Zone Report 028.

4. California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development, Seismic Design Maps Web Tool, ASCE 7-16 Standard (Internet).

5. United States Geological Survey, 1964 photorevised 1981, Long Beach Quadrangle, 7.5- Minute Topographic Series.

Project 9864-04

APPENDIX B

Field Exploration

a) The site was explored on September 22, 2023, utilizing hand labor to excavate three borings, excavated to depths ranging from 8.5 to 14 feet below the existing ground surface. The borings were subsequently backfilled.
b) The soils encountered in the excavations were logged and sampled by our Engineering Geologist. The soils were classified in accordance with the Unified Soil Classification System described in Figure B-1. The Logs of Borings are presented in Figures B-2 through B-4. The approximate locations of the borings are shown on the Boring Location Plan, Figure B-5. The logs, as presented, are based on the field logs, modified as required from the results of the laboratory tests. Driven ring and bulk samples were obtained from the excavations for laboratory inspection and testing. The depths at which the samples were obtained are indicated on the logs.
c) Perched groundwater was encountered at a depth of 13 feet below ground surface in our deepest boring (HA-1).
d) Caving occurred below a depth of 13 feet below ground surface in Boring HA-1.

UNIFIED SOILS CLASSIFICATION (ASTM D-2487)

PRIMARY DIVISION GROUP SYMBOL SECONDARY DIVISIONS

COARSE GRAINED SOILS
More than half of materials is
larger than #200 sieve size

GRAVELS
More than half
of coarse
fraction is larger
than #4 sieve Clean
Gravels
(<5% fines)
GW Well graded gravels, gravel-sand mixture, little or no fines GP Poorly graded gravels or gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines Gravel with
Fines
GM Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixture. Non-plastic fines.

GC Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures. Plastic fines SANDS
More than half
of coarse
fraction is
smaller than
#4 sieve
Clean Sands
(<5% fines)
SW Well-graded gravels, gravel-sand mixtures, little or no fines.

SP Poorly graded sands or gravelly sands, little or no fines.

Sands with
Fines
SM Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures. Non-Plastic fines.

SC Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures. Plastic fines.

FINE GRAINED SOILS
More than half of material is
smaller than #200 sieve size

SILTS AND
CLAYS

LIQUID LIMIT

IS LESS THAN
50 ML Inorganic silts and very fine sands, rock flour, silty or clayey fine sands or clayey silts, with slight plasticity
CL Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, gravelly clays, sandy clays, silty clays, lean clays.

OL Organic silts and organic silty clays of low plasticity.

SILTS AND
CLAYS

LIQUID LIMIT

IS GREATER
THAN 50 MH Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandy or silty soils, elastic silts.

CH Inorganic clays of high plasticity, fat clays
OH Organic clays of medium to high plasticity, organic silts.

Highly Organic Soils PT Peat and other highly organic soils.

CLASSIFICATION BASED ON FIELD TESTS

CLASSIFICATION CRITERIA BASED ON LAB TESTS

PENETRATION RESISTANCE (PR)
Sands and Gravels
Relative Density Blows/foot
Very loose 0-4
Loose 4-10
Medium Dense 10-30
Dense 30-50
Very Dense Over 50
Clays and Silts
Consistency Blows/foot* Strength**
Very Soft 0-2 0-½
Soft 2-4 ¼-½
Firm 4-8 ½-1
Stiff 8-15 1-2
Very Stiff 15-30 2-4
Hard Over 30 Over 4
*Numbers of blows of 140 lb hammer
falling 30 inches to drive a 2-inch O.D.
(1 3/8 in. I.D.) Split Barrel sampler
(ASTM-1568 Standard Penetration Test)
**Unconfined Compressive strength in
tons/sq. ft. Read from pocket
penetrometer
Liquid Limit
P
lasticity chart for laboratory
Classification of Fine-grained soils

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 60 50
40 30

20 10

0 Plasticity Index
Comparing soils at equal liquid limit
Toughness and dry strength increase with
increasing plasticity index
Fines (Silty or Clay) Fine Sand Medium Sand Coarse Sand Fine Gravel Coarse Gravel Cobbles Boulders Sieve Sizes 200 40 10 4 ¾” 3” 10” GW and SW – Cu= D60/D10 greater than 4 for GW and 6 for SW; Cc = (D30) 2/D10x D60 between 1 and 3
GP and SP – Clean gravel or sand not meeting requirement for GW and SW GM and SM – Atterberg limit below “A” line or P.I. less than 4 GC and SC – Atterberg limit above “A” line P.I. greater than 7

CLASSIFICATION OF EARTH MATERIAL IS BASED ON FIELD INSPECTION

AND SHOULD NOT BE CONSTRUED TO IMPLY LABORATORY ANALYSIS UNLESS SO STATED.

C
L
CL
CL-ML
OH
Or
MH
OL
or
MLML
CH
GLOBAL GEO-ENGINEERING, INC.

GEOLOGIC AND SOILS ENGINEERING, IRVINE, CALIFORNIA
Mills Park
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Carson, California
Date: January 2024
Project No.: 9864-04
Figure No.:

B-1
01-03-2024 C:\Program Files (x86)\mtech2022\temp\temp\Boring Logs 2002 Editon\9864-04 - Mills Park - HA-1.bor Global Geo-Engineering, Inc.Irvine, CA
Geologists and Geotechnical Engineers
Project: 9864-04
Carson, California
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Mills Park

Figure B-2
LOG OF BORING HA-1
Date : September 22, 2023
Logged By : KBY
Diameter of Boring : 4''
Drilling Company : Mike's Excavating Service
Equipment : Hand Equipment
Depth in Feet
0 5
10 15
20 Sample
Field Moisture% Dry Weight

17.1 34.0

34.6 32.5
Dry Densitylb./cubic ft.
106.8

83.8 84.1

90.1 Blow CountWater LevelUSCS
CL
ML
CL
ML

GRAPHIC

DESCRIPTION
Sample Type
Ring
Bulk
Water Levels
Groundwater Encountered
Seepage Encountered
Silty CLAY: dark olive gray, moist to very moist, soft to medium stiff with rootlets
@2.5' dark olive gray to light reddish brown
FILL
Sandy Clayey SILT: olive gray, moist to very moist, soft to medium stiff with CLAY interbeds
@8.5' very moist, slightly porous with caliche stringers Silty CLAY: olive brown, moist to very moist, soft to medum stiff @10' olive gray, very moist
@11' with caliche stringers
Sandy SILT: olive gray, wet, soft to medium stiff, water encountered

ALLUVIUM
Bottom of Boring at 14 feet

1. Caving to 13 feet

2. Groundwater encountered at 13 feet

3. Boring Backfilled
01-03-2024 C:\Program Files (x86)\mtech2022\temp\temp\Boring Logs 2002 Editon\9864-04 - Mills Park - HA-2.bor Global Geo-Engineering, Inc.Irvine, CA
Geologists and Geotechnical Engineers
Project: 9864-04
Carson, California
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Mills Park

Figure B-3
LOG OF BORING HA-2
Date : September 22, 2023
Logged By : KBY
Diameter of Boring : 4''
Drilling Company : Mike's Excavating Service
Equipment : Hand Equipment
Depth in Feet
0 5
10 15
20 SampleField Moisture% Dry Weight

20.2 27.9

33.3 34.0
Dry Densitylb./cubic ft.

97.2 91.0

83.3 88.2
Blow CountWater LevelUSCS
ML
ML
CL

GRAPHIC

DESCRIPTION
Sample Type
Ring
Bulk
Water Levels
Groundwater Encountered
Seepage Encountered
Sandy Clayey SILT: olive gray, slightly moist, medium stiff with roots FILL
Clayey Sandy SILT: olive gray, moist, soft to medium stiff @8' olive brown
Sandy Silty CLAY: olive brown to olive gray, moist to very moist, soft to medum stiff
@11' more Sandy, very moist ALLUVIUM Bottom of Boring at 11.5 feet

1. No significant caving

2. No groundwater or seepage encountered

3. Boring Backfilled
01-03-2024 C:\Program Files (x86)\mtech2022\temp\temp\Boring Logs 2002 Editon\9864-04 - Mills Park - HA-3.bor Global Geo-Engineering, Inc.Irvine, CA
Geologists and Geotechnical Engineers
Project: 9864-04
Carson, California
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Mills Park

Figure B-4
LOG OF BORING HA-3
Date : September 22, 2023
Logged By : KBY
Diameter of Boring : 4''
Drilling Company : Mike's Excavating Service
Equipment : Hand Equipment
Depth in Feet
0 5
10 15
20 SampleField Moisture% Dry Weight

18.9 28.2

32.1 Dry Densitylb./cubic ft.

98.6 90.6

91.2 Blow CountWater LevelUSCS
ML
ML
CL

GRAPHIC

DESCRIPTION
Sample Type
Ring
Bulk
Water Levels
Groundwater Encountered
Seepage Encountered
Sandy Clayey SILT: dark olive gray, slightly moist to moist, medium stiff
FILL
Sandy Clayey SILT: olive brown, moist, soft to medium stiff Silty CLAY: olive brown, moist, soft to medum stiff

ALLUVIUM
Bottom of Boring at 8.5 feet

1. No significant caving

2. No groundwater or seepage encountered

3. Boring Backfilled

BORING LOCATION PLAN
Mills Park
1340 East Dimondale Drive
Carson, California
Date: January 2024
P
roject No.: 9864-04
Figure No:

GLOBAL GEO-ENGINEERING, INC.

GEOLOGIC AND SOILS ENGINEERING, IRVINE, CALIFORNIA
Approximate Location of Boring,
Showing Total Depth
B-5
KEY HA-3

8.5’
80 0 80 160

APPROXIMATE SCALE FEET
N
HA
-
2 11.5
’
HA
-
1 14
’
HA
-
3 8.5
’

Project 9864-04

APPENDIX C

Laboratory Testing Program

The laboratory-testing program was directed towards providing quantitative data relating to the relevant engineering properties of the soils. Samples considered representative of site conditions were tested as described below.
a) Moisture and Density
Moisture-density information usually provides a gross indication of soil consistency.

Local variations at the time of the investigation can be delineated, and a correlation obtained between soils found on this site and nearby sites. The dry unit weights and field moisture contents were determined for selected samples. The results are shown on the Logs of Borings.
b) Compaction
A representative soil sample was tested in the laboratory to determine the maximum dry density and optimum moisture content, using the ASTM D1557 compaction test method.

This test procedure requires 25 blows of a 10-pound hammer falling a height of 18 inches on each of five layers, in a 1/30 cubic foot cylinder. The results of the test are presented below.

Boring No. Sample Depth
(ft.) Soil Description
Optimum
Moisture
Content
(%)
Maximum
Dry Density
(lb/ft3)
HA-1 1-2 Silty CLAY 14.0 113.2

Appendix C
Project 9864-04

Page 17 ends

c) Sulfate Content

A representative soil sample was analyzed for its sulphate content. The results are given below:

Boring No. Sample Depth
(ft.) Soil Description Sulphate Content
(%)
HA-1 1-2 Clayey SAND 0.1118

d) Chloride Content

A representative soil sample was analyzed for chloride content in accordance with California Test Method CA422. The result is given below:

Boring No. Sample Depth
(ft)
Soil
Description
Chloride Content
(%)
HA-1 1-2 Silty CLAY 0.0180

e) Resistivity and pH

A representative soil sample was analyzed in accordance with California Test Methods CA532 and CA643 to determine the minimum resistivity and pH. The result is provided below:

Boring No. Sample Depth
(ft)
Soil
Description pH
Minimum
Resistivity
(Ohm-cm)

HA-1

1-2 Silty CLAY 8.4 1,256

Appendix C
Project 9864-04

Page 18 ends

f) Expansion Potential

Surface soils were collected in the field and tested in the laboratory in accordance with the ASTM Test Designation D4829. The degree of expansion potential is determined from soil volume changes occurring during saturation of the specimen. The results of the tests are presented below:

Boring No. Sample Depth
(ft)
Soil
Description
Expansion
Index
Expansion
Potential
HA-1 1-2 Silty CLAY 69 Medium

DETAIL C

DETAIL D

QTYMATERIALDESCRIPTIONREVPART IDITEM
1CONCRETEXERXES DEADMENA 1
4GALVANIZED STEELXERXES GALVANIZED HOOKA 2
2STLXERXES 6FT STRAP AND TURNBUCKLEA 3
1PVCVALVE, BACKWATER, 4", PVC, SOCB0002-38964
1FIBREGLASSTANK 4000USG SINGLE LOOPA0011-37745
1 WATTS XS134 FLOAT VALVEA0011-54516
1PLASTICWATTS FLT-BA0011-54527
C
D
SHEET:

OF:

SCALE:SIZE:REV:DWG ID:

DESIGNED:

DRAWN:

CHECKED:

DATE:
.X ±0.5
.XX (>10) ±0.05
.XX (<10) ±0.01
.XXX ±0.005
ANGULAR ±1°
SURFACE FINISH 63µ in.

TOLERANCES UNLESS NOTED

ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES
805 CROWLEY AVE.

KELOWNA, BC
CANADA, V1Y 7G6
P: 250-712-3393
F: 250-861-4814 THIRD ANGLE

PROJECTION

ALL PLANS AND DESIGNS AT ALL TIMES REMAIN THE PROPERTY OF

THE WMI MANUFACTURING CORPORATION AND CANNOT BE USED
OR REPRODUCED WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION.

MASS:

TANK 4000USG SINGLE LOOP

WATER MANAGEMENT
NTSB
TYRHIR
TYRHIR
PAYKOV
9/12/2023 0011-3782 B
8078.2 lbmass
4 1

TORQUE VALUES UNLESS NOTED
1/4-20....63 in-lbs 1/2-13....37 ft-lbs
3/8-16....201 in-lbs

REV DESCRIPTION DATE
A INITIAL RELEASE 6/28/2024
B REMOVED HATCH/LID 10/24/2024
4 1

SUCTION CHECK VALVE (INCLUDED WITH WTS)
1 1
2 4
3 2
FILL (2IN PVC)
WTS SUCTION (6IN PVC)
OVER FLOW (4IN PVC)
WTS RETURN (4IN PVC)
PAD RETURN (10IN PVC)
(0.0)
(34.0)
(53.8)
(71.8)
(109.5)
(6.0)
(0.0)
(53.8)
(65.1)
(273.1)
6 1
7 1
5 1
(n75.5)

SOLD SEPARATELY

SECTION A-A

SECTION C-CSECTION B-B

DETAIL D

DETAIL E
A
A
C
CB
B
DE
0011-3782
REV:

B
805 CROWLEY AVE.

KELOWNA, BC
CANADA, V1Y 7G6
P: 250-712-3393
F: 250-861-4814
SCALE:

B NTS 4
SIZE:THIRD ANGLE

PROJECTION
USE IN CONJUNCTION WITH SHEET NO. 1
DWG ID: 2 SHEET:

OF:

FILTER FABRIC
(12"OVERLAP MIN.)
(BY OTHERS)

PRIMARY BACKFILL MATERIAL

SECONDARY BACKFILL MATERIAL

GENERAL

1. Backfill is a critical part of a proper tank installation. • Both primary and secondary backfill material is to be clean, free-flowing, and free of dirt, sand, large rocks, roots, organic materials, debris, ice and snow.
• No backfill material shall be frozen or contain lumps of frozen material any time during compaction or placement.

PRIMARY BACKFILL

2. Use coarse aggregate (rounded stones or crushed stones) as primary backfill material. • Rounded stone to be 0.75IN MAX. to 0.125IN MIN.
• Crushed stone to be 0.50IN MAX. to 0.125IN MIN.

3. Primary backfill material should be a mix of well-graded stones, generally conforming to the 6, 67, 7 and 8 sizes of ASTM's C33.

4. No more than 5% of this material can be small enough to pass through the #8 sieve.

5. Do not use materials like soft limestone, sandstone, sea shells or shale that break down over time.

SECONDARY BACKFILL (used in split backfill installations)

6. Examples of acceptable secondary backfill material are:
• Clean native backfill
• Coarse sand
• Gravel

7. Secondary backfill must be compact to achieve a minimum of 85% standard proctor density.

8. 100% of secondary backfill material must pass through a 1IN [250mm] sieve.

9. Secondary material must be installed in 12IN [300mm] to 24IN [610mm] lifts compatible with the compaction equipment used.

10. When using secondary backfill, consider potential frost-related problems to avoid frost heave.

11. Requirements of the piping, surface slab or roadway used may determine specifications for secondary backfill material and compaction above the filter-fabric layer.

12. Refer to applicable codes or standards for base course and sub-base course material and compaction requirements.

FINAL GRADE
(NO TRAFFIC LOADING)

0.00 68.63 MIN

COMPACTED PLUMBING BEDDING, SIDE AND OVERLAY

TO BE USED WITH XERXES INSTALLATION MANUAL AND/OR LOCAL CODES/REQUIREMENTS (12.0)
(15.0)
(0.0)
(43.0)
(43.0)
(0.0)(76.6) (76.6)
0011-3782
REV:

B
805 CROWLEY AVE.

KELOWNA, BC
CANADA, V1Y 7G6
P: 250-712-3393
F: 250-861-4814
SCALE:

B NTS 4
SIZE:THIRD ANGLE

PROJECTION
USE IN CONJUNCTION WITH SHEET NO. 1
DWG ID: 3 SHEET:

OF:

FRESH WATER FILL*
OVERFLOW*
P
D.S.S.*
PARK DRAINS*
MANIFOLD*
SPRAY FEATURES*
*

SPRAY PAD
*

SUCTION
SINGLE LOOP WTS*
STORM SEWER* *

BACKWATER
FLOAT

FOR OPERATIONAL PURPOSES, NOT FINAL LOCATION

PLUMBING

FLEXIBLE TUBING

CONTINUATION

ENGLISH DESCRIPTION SYMBOL

P&ID SYMBOLS

WIRING REFERNCE
P
V
F
UV
PT
M
CL

VANSTONE FLANGE

BUTTERFLY VALVE

SAMPLE POINT

BALL VALVE

CHECK VALVE (SINGLE & DOUBLE)

PRESSURE SUSTAINING VALVE

ACTUATED MULTI-PORT VALVE

MULTI-PORT VALVE

EROSION FEEDRER

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER

ELECTRONIC FLOW METER

PRESSURE GAUGE

VACUUM GAUGE

FLOW METER

INSPECTION POINT

UV REACTOR

ACTUATED VALVE

Y STRAINER

STATIC MIXER

CENTRIFUGAL PUMP

PERISTALTIC PUMP

SAND FILTER

FLOW DIRECTION

HOLDING TANK TO BE INSTALLED AS CLOSE TO
TREATMENT SYSTEM AS POSSIBLE. REVIEW

ENGINEERED CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS FOR
PROJECT SPECIFIC DETAILS.

INSTALLATION MUST BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND ADHERE TO ALL LOCAL CODES

SEE WTS INSTALL FOR MORE DETAILS

SECTION A-A

DETAIL B
SECTION C1-C1
SECTION C2-C2
A
A
B
C1
C1
0011-3782
REV:

B
805 CROWLEY AVE.

KELOWNA, BC
CANADA, V1Y 7G6
P: 250-712-3393
F: 250-861-4814
SCALE:

B NTS 4
SIZE:THIRD ANGLE

PROJECTION
USE IN CONJUNCTION WITH SHEET NO. 1
DWG ID: 4 SHEET:

OF:

LOW POINT DRAIN

DSS HOLDING TANK (SOLD SEPARATELY)SPRAY PAD DRAINS (SOLD SEPARATELY)

ACTUATOR
M

TANK FILL LEVEL TANK FILL LEVELTANK FILL LEVEL

FINAL GRADE (SLOPED IF APPLICABLE)

ENSURE GOOD SLOPE

STORM DRAIN
(0.0)
(59.4)
4 1

SOLD SEPARATELY
PAD RETURN (10IN PVC)

2.88 (8.65)

SUCTION CHECK VALVE (INCLUDED WITH WTS)

PLUMBING BY OTHERS
6 1
7 1
20°

FILLING POSITION

6.9 FULL POSITION
DISCARD 1IN TO 3/4IN ADAPTORPLUMBING REDUCER TO 1IN NPT BY OTHERS

1.8 FILL (2IN PVC)
WTS SUCTION (6IN PVC)
OVER FLOW (4IN PVC)
SECTION 02 4100

ROOF REMOVAL AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
MILLS PARK 02 4100 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Removal of existing roofing components and substrate preparation related to roof replacement work.

B. Recycling of attached built-up roofing system, membranes, adhesion, foam insulation, damaged plywood, etc.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Division 1 – Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference standards of the following sources are applicable to products and procedures specified in Part 2 - Products and Part 3 – Execution of this Section:

1. Factory Mutual Global (FM)

2. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the start of work, submit the following to the Owner for approval:

1. Product submittals required within Division 1.

B. Refer to Division 1 for procedural requirements related to the submittal process.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES
A. Applicator Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer’s product and that is eligible to receive a manufacturer’s warranty. Company shall have a minimum of 5 years’ documented experience certified by roofing system manufacturer.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Roofing system materials and components shall be supplied and warranted by roofing system manufacturer for specified roofing system and shall be in compliance with specified regulatory requirements.

C. Examine the technical specifications and drawings. Verify all dimensions, SECTION 02 4100

ROOF REMOVAL AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
MILLS PARK 02 4100 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
detail conditions, roof plan notes and existing site conditions that may affect the work. Verification of existing dimensions and site conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor. No additional compensation will be considered for failure to verify existing dimensions, detail conditions, roof plan note callouts, and existing site conditions.

D. Upon examination, if conflicts between the technical specifications and drawings, and those of federal, state, or local regulatory agencies, the product manufacturer, industry roofing standards, or Owner-mandated requirements are discovered, notify the Owner immediately for resolution.

E. During work, if conditions are discovered which do not allow for continuation of the work per the technical specifications and drawings, notify the Owner immediately for resolution.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01 6000 for transport, handling, storage, and product requirements.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.

C. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure. Store roll materials standing on end.

D. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on previously completed roofing.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not perform roof removal work during inclement weather.

B. Cold weather precautions:

1. Refer to product manufacturer and NRCA requirements and recommendations for cold weather application requirements and restrictions.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all specified products shall remain on site for the duration of this project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 FASTENERS
SECTION 02 4100

ROOF REMOVAL AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
MILLS PARK 02 4100 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. For re-securement of wood deck to underlying structural components, per Article 3.4:

1. For untreated wood: No. 14 fluorocarbon-coated screws, length as necessary to penetrate minimum 1-1/4-inch depth into underlying wood structural framing.

2. For treated wood: Stainless steel screws; length as necessary to penetrate minimum 1-1/4-inch depth into underlying wood structural framing.

B. For re-securement of existing perimeter wood nailers to underlying substrates, per Article 3.5:

1. For securement to untreated wood: No. 14 fluorocarbon-coated screws, length as necessary to penetrate minimum 1-1/4-inch depth into underlying wood substrate.

2. For securement to treated wood: Stainless steel screws; length as necessary to penetrate minimum 1-1/4-inch depth into underlying wood substrate.

3. For securement to existing masonry walls: 1/4-inch minimum diameter “Tapcon” screws or other fastener type suitable to adequately secure the wood to the existing masonry wall.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Exercise caution to avoid damage to components indicated as “existing” or remaining in place. Do not disturb these components.

B. Prior to any cutting, drilling, or removals, view both sides of the surface affected. If damage occurs to existing components, repair or replace components defaced or damaged during removals to the satisfaction of the Owner.

C. Prior to work start, the contractor shall obtain the services of a licensed plumber to verify that all roof drains and plumbing vents located within the project area are free of debris and properly functioning. Notify the Owner immediately if roof drains or plumbing vents are found to be blocked, clogged, or otherwise not properly functioning. The licensed plumber shall provide a letter indicating all roof drains and plumbing vents in the project area are free of debris and properly functioning. Refer to Section 01 3300.

3.2 ROOF REMOVAL
A. Removal of existing roofing and related components: Remove and discard all existing roofing materials down to the structural deck, except SECTION 02 4100

ROOF REMOVAL AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
MILLS PARK 02 4100 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
components designated for recycling per Article 1.4. This includes spray- applied polyurethane foam roof systems (where existing), roofing membranes, base flashings, penetration flashings, insulation, underlying roof membranes, underlayment, and sheet metal flashings and accessories, as indicated in the specifications and drawings. Remove all roofing and related components in a manner that will not cause damage to the underlying structural deck.

B. Do not begin work until the substrates have been prepared as specified and are ready and acceptable to have materials installed. By beginning work, the Contractor acknowledges that the substrates are satisfactory.

C. Existing roof system protection:

1. Do not use adjacent roof areas as storage areas for roofing materials.

2. Where excessive traffic over new or existing roofing is unavoidable, provide and use 3/4-inch plywood, set over a minimum of 1-1/2- inch-thick rigid board insulation to protect roofing components in place (expanded polystyrene insulation is not acceptable).

3. When materials are stored on the roof, provide roof protection as indicated above.

3.3 TEMPORARY DISPLACEMENT OF ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT
A. Temporary displacement of gas lines, conduit, junction boxes and condensate lines:

1. Temporarily displace gas lines, conduit, junction boxes, condensate lines or other items that may interfere with roof replacement work.

Any necessary disconnection of gas lines, conduit and junction boxes is to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor as applicable to the work being performed. Coordinate all disconnections with the Owner.

B. After completion of work, reinstall any mechanical units that have been temporarily displaced. Reconnect all electrical, plumbing, gas lines and ventilation ducts where required. All
reconnection of plumbing, gas lines, electrical conduit and ventilation ducts is to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor.

Coordinate all reconnections with the Owner.

C. After completion of work, reconnect any gas lines, conduit and/or junction boxes have been disconnected. Reconnection of gas lines, conduit and/or junction boxes is to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor as applicable to the work being performed. Coordinate all reconnections with the Owner.

SECTION 02 4100

ROOF REMOVAL AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
MILLS PARK 02 4100 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.4 DECK INSPECTION AND RE-SECUREMENT
A.

After completion of roof removal work, inspect the existing roof deck. If damaged or deteriorated roof deck is encountered, notify the Owner immediately. Refer to Section 06 1516 for wood roof deck repair and replacement procedures.

B. Re-securement of wood decks:

1. For locations requiring a wind uplift rating of FM 1-90 or less:
a. In the field of the roof, re-secure the existing wood deck at a maximum spacing of 12-inches on center (every other rib for 1-1/2 in. deck) at
underlying supports in the field of the roof. At the roof perimeters and corners, re-secure the deck at a maximum spacing of 6 inches on center (every rib for 1-1/2 in deck) at all underlying supports.
b. At each deck side lap, secure the deck to the supporting members. For interlocking-type side laps, secure both sides of the lap (upper and lower). For overlap-type side laps, ensure securement penetrates all deck panels at the laps. c. Ensure spacing between each side lap fastener or side lap fasteners and supports is no more than 36-inches in the field of the roof and no more than 30-inches on center in the perimeter and corner areas. Fasten overlap-type side laps with FM-Approved side lap fasteners.

2. For locations requiring a wind uplift rating of FM 1-105 through 1- 120:
a. In the field of the roof, re-secure the existing wood deck at a maximum spacing of 6-inches on center (at every rib for 1- 1/2 in. deck) at underlying supports in the field of the roof. At the roof perimeters and corners, re-secure the deck with two fasteners every 6-inches on center (two fasteners at each rib location for 1-1/2 in deck) at all underlying supports. b. At each deck side lap, secure the deck to the supporting members. For interlocking-type side laps, secure both sides of the lap (upper and lower). For overlap-type side laps, ensure securement penetrates all deck panels at the laps. c. Ensure spacing between each side lap fastener or side lap fasteners and supports is no more than 30-inches in the field of the roof and no more than 15-inches on center in the perimeter and corner areas. Fasten overlap-type side laps with FM-Approved side lap fasteners.

3.5 RE-SECUREMENT OF PERIMETER WOOD BLOCKING
SECTION 02 4100

ROOF REMOVAL AND SUBSTRATE PREPARATION
MILLS PARK 02 4100 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Re-secure wood blocking (nailers) to the underlying substrate at perimeters in a manner to resist a minimum force of 300 lbs. per linear foot, at a minimum spacing of 12-inches on center. Refer to FM Global Loss Data Sheet 1-49.

3.6 RECYCLING OF EXISTING ROOFING COMPONENTS
A. Built-up roofing & Metal Roofing membrane:

1. Confirm securement type of built-up roofing membrane. Note that fully-adhered roofing membranes cannot be recycled.

2. Cut membrane into manageable pieces, following the instructions of the recycler. Remove and discard existing membrane seams, fastening strips, and associated fasteners.

3. Remove roofing membrane from the roof surface.

4. Contact the recycler for instructions regarding storage of roof membrane awaiting pick-up.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
MILLS PARK 02 4119 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building elements.

2. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures.

3. Salvaged items.

4. Salvaged material.

5. Salvaged items for re-use.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000- Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 3543 - Environmental Procedures: Recycling and reuse of waste materials.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The extent of Selective Demolition Work is that Work necessary and required to facilitate the new construction indicated.

B. Demolition shall be such that all construction, new and existing, can be performed, and completed in accordance with the construction documents.

C. The contractor shall visit the project site and familiarize himself with the existing conditions and project requirements.

D. Verify the scope of the Work under this Section including salvage material. The City will be responsible for removing all materials and equipment which the City wishes to salvage prior to the beginning of this Work.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Criteria:

1. Requirements of Structural Work: Do not cut structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load-carrying capacity of load/deflection ratio.

2. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut operational elements and safety-related components in a manner resulting in a reduction of capacities SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
MILLS PARK 02 4119 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
to perform in a manner intended or resulting in a decreased operational life, increased maintenance, or decreased safety.

3. Visual Requirements: Do not cut work which is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the demolition work judged by the Engineer to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

4. Loading: Do not superimpose loads at any point upon existing structure beyond design capacity including loads attributable to materials, construction equipment, demolition operations and shoring and bracing.

5. Vibration: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would induce vibration into any element of the structure.

6. Fire: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce any fire hazard unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

7. Water: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce excessive water run-off, and water pollution.

8. Air Pollution: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce uncontrolled dust, fumes, or other damaging air pollution.

1.4 PROJECT SITE
A. Indicated "Existing Construction" was obtained from existing drawings or other information which may not reflect actual conditions. The Contractor shall verify all existing conditions and notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the Work.

B. Perform the removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and using small tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building.

C. Occupancy: Contractor shall make full use of the facility during construction.

D. Condition of Structure: The City assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of portions of the structure to be demolished.

E. Partial removal: Items of salvageable value to the Contractor may be removed from the structure as the work progresses if not claimed by the City. Salvaged items must be transported from the site as they are removed.

F. Protection: Make sure that the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition is maintained during the demolition operation. Conduct operations to prevent injury to adjacent buildings, structures, other facilities, and persons.

1.5 PROTECTION OF EXISTING CONSTRUCTION
A. Provide temporary protection of existing construction (floors, roof, and walls) SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
MILLS PARK 02 4119 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
when adjoining new work and in traffic areas.

B. Provide temporary construction, constructed of framing and plywood, to protect existing construction and surrounding surfaces from damage by movement of materials and personnel.

C. The contractor is responsible for all damage to existing structure and shall replace or repair all areas of damage.

D. Repair, replace, or rebuild existing construction as required or as directed which has been removed, altered, or disrupted to allow for new construction. Existing construction shall be corrected to match adjacent construction, new or existing.

E. Perform cutting of existing concrete and masonry construction with saws and core drills. Do not use jack-hammers or explosives.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SALVAGED MATERIALS
A. Removed and salvaged materials of value not designated for reinstallation, unless claimed as salvage by the City, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the premises by the Contractor and recycled, reused, or disposed of as specified in Section 01 3543- Environmental Procedures.

B. The City will remove or, under separate contract, have all materials and equipment which the City requires removed prior to Work under this Section begins.

2.2 SALVAGED ITEMS FOR RE-USE
A. Materials and items scheduled for re-use which are damaged by the contractor to the extent which they cannot be re-used shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
MILLS PARK 02 4119 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

C. Report in writing to the Engineer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by the Engineer.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Temporary Support: Provide adequate temporary support for work to be cut to prevent failure. Do not endanger other work.

B. Provide adequate protection of other work during selective demolition to prevent damage and provide protection of the work from adverse weather exposure.

3.3 PROCEDURE
A. Employ only skilled tradesmen to perform selective demolition.

B. Cut work by methods least likely to damage work to the retained and work adjoining.

C. In general, where physical cutting action is required, cut work with sawing, and grinding tools, not with hammering and chopping tools. Core drill openings through concrete and masonry work.

D. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work.

E. Where selective demolition terminates at a surface or finish to remain, completely remove all traces of material selectively demolished, including mortar beds.

Provide smooth, even, substrate transition.

3.4 POLLUTION CONTROLS
A. Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest practical level. Comply with AQMD standards.

B. Comply with governing authorities pertaining to environmental protection.

SECTION 02 4119

SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION
MILLS PARK 02 4119 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Protect natural resources as specified in Section 01 3543 - Environmental Procedures.

C. Clean adjacent portion of the structure and improvement of dust, dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, as directed by the Engineer and governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to their condition prior to the start of the work.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Collect, recycle, reuse, and dispose of demolished materials as specified in Section 01 3543 - Environmental Procedures and as approved by the City in the Solid Waste Management and Environmental Protection Plan.

3.6 SCHEDULE OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
A. Plumbing:

1. Remove all plumbing fixtures and accessories including all exposed supply, waste, and vent piping.

2. Concealed piping within and below slab construction shall be identified and capped a minimum of 3 inches (8 cm) below finish floor.

B. Electrical Service:

1. All electrical circuits within the existing structure shall be abandoned from the existing service entrance section, beyond.

2. Remove all abandoned electrical conduit, boxes, and wiring back to the existing electrical service which is to remain.

C. Provide additional selective demolition as indicated and required by the Contract Documents and as required for indicated new construction.

D. Items for demolition covered under the plans and these specifications include carpet, rubber base, build-in furniture, plumbing features, F.A.U. concrete slab saw cut, cap utilities, remove interior walls, some doors, selective demolition plus asbestos abatement.

E. Payment for items of work covered in the plans and Division 2 specification will be based on the lump sum bid price for building demolition and removals, no additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Products and procedures for bonded abrasive polished concrete floors using multi-step wet/dry mechanical process, and accessories indicated, specified, or required to complete polishing.

1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Terminology: As defined by Concrete Polishing Council (CPC) glossary.

B. Polished Concrete: The act of changing a concrete floor surface, with or without surface exposure of aggregate, to achieve a specified level of appearance.

C. Bonded Abrasive Polished Concrete: The multi-step operation of mechanically grinding, honing, and polishing a concrete floor surface with bonded abrasives to cut a concrete floor surface and to refine each cut to the maximum potential to achieve a specified level of appearance as defined by the CPC.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical literature for each product indicated, specified, or required. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations.

B. Installer Qualifications: Data for company, principal personnel, experience, and training specified in PART 1 “Quality Assurance” Article.

C. Maintenance Data: For inclusion in maintenance manual required by Division 01.

1. Include instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use.

2. Include precautions against cleaning products and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Polisher Qualifications:

1. Experience: Company that has successfully completed five projects similar in design, products, and extent to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce specified work.

2. Supervision: Maintain a competent supervisor who is at Project during SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
times specified work is in progress, and is currently certified as Craftsman - Level I or higher by CPAA, CPC Craftsman, or equivalent.

3. Manufacturer Qualification: Approved by manufacturer to apply liquid applied products.

B. Field Mock-up/Sample: Before performing work of this Section, provide following field mock-up/sample to verify selections made under submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of polishing. Approval does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents unless Architect specifically approves deviations in writing.

1. Form, reinforce, and cast concrete slab for 10-foot square field mock-up.

2. Mock-up shall be representative of work to be expected.

3. Perform grinding, honing, and polishing work as scheduled for Project using same personnel as will perform work for Project.

4. Approval is for following aesthetic qualities:
a. Compliance with approved submittals.
b. Compliance with specified aggregate exposure class.
c. Compliance with specified appearance level.
d. Compliance with specified color.

5. Obtain Architect’s approval before starting work on Project.

6. Protect and maintain approved field mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed work.

7. Upon completion of mock-up; owner to review and approve desired outcome and sign off. Mock-up to be used as a reference throughout the polishing phases of the project.

C. Pre-Installation of Concrete Conference: Prior to placing concrete for areas scheduled for polishing, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections.

1. Required Attendees:
a. Owner.
b. Architect.
c. Contractor, including supervisor.
d. Concrete producer.
e. Concrete finisher, including supervisor.
f. Concrete polisher, including supervisor.
g. Technical representative of liquid applied product manufacturers.

2. Minimum Agenda: Polisher shall demonstrate understanding of work required by reviewing and discussing procedures for, but not limited to, following:
a. Tour field mock-up and representative areas of required work, discuss and evaluate for compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
procedures, and other preparatory work performed by other installers. b. Review Contract Document requirements.
c. Review approved submittals and field mock-up.
d. Protection of concrete substrate during construction and prior to polishing process.
e. Project phasing and scheduling for each step of grinding, honing and polishing operations including, but not limited to:
i. Quality of qualified personnel committed to project. ii. Quality and size of grinders committed to project.
iii. Proper disposal of concrete slurry and/or concrete dust. f. Details of each step of grinding, honing, and polishing operations. i. Application of color.
ii. Application of liquid applied products.
iii. Protecting polished concrete floors after polishing work is complete.

3. Reports: Record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Damage and Stain Prevention: It is the responsibility of others to prevent damage and staining of concrete surfaces to be polished.

1. Prohibit use of markers, spray paint, and soapstone.

2. Prohibit improper application of liquid membrane film forming curing compounds.

3. Prohibit vehicle parking over concrete surfaces.

4. Prohibit pipe-cutting operations over concrete surfaces.

5. Prohibit storage of any items over concrete surfaces for not less than 28 days after concrete placement.

6. Prohibit ferrous metals storage over concrete surfaces.

7. Protect from petroleum, oil, hydraulic fluid, or other liquid dripping from equipment working over concrete surfaces.

8. Protect from acids and acidic detergents contacting concrete surfaces.

9. Protect from painting activities over concrete surfaces.

B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting liquid applied product application.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 LIQUID APPLIED PRODUCTS
A. Liquid Densifier: An aqueous solution of silicon dioxide dissolved in one of the SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
following hydroxides that penetrates into the concrete surface and reacts with the calcium hydroxide to provide a permanent chemical reaction that hardens and densifies the wear surface of the cementitious portion of the concrete.

1. Sodium Silicate

2. Potassium Silicate

3. Lithium Silicate

4. Alkali solution of Colloidal Silicates or Silica
B. Dye: Non-film forming soluble colorant dissolved in a carrier designed to penetrate and alter coloration of a concrete floor surface without a chemical reaction.

C. Pigmented Micro Stains: Fine pigment particles suspended in water- based silicate solution that penetrates concrete and reacts with calcium hydroxide to lock in color particles.

D. Acid Stain: Reactive solution of one or more metal salts stabilized by acid that produces coloration in a concrete substrate by neutralization of acid followed by precipitation of metal hydroxides or oxides.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Repair Material: A product that is designed to repair cracks and surface imperfections. The specified material must have sufficient bonding capabilities to adhere after the polishing to the concrete surface and provide abrasion resistance equal to or greater than the surrounding concrete substrate.

B. Material: Acceptable products shall be: Clear Epoxy.

2.3 POLISHING EQUIPMENT
A. Field Grinding and Polishing Equipment:

1. A multiple head, counter rotating, walk behind or ride on machine, of various size and weights, with diamond tooling affixed to the head for the purpose of grinding concrete. Excludes janitorial maintenance equipment.

2. If dry grinding, honing, or polishing, use dust extraction equipment with flow rate suitable for dust generated, with squeegee attachments to meet OSHA requirements.

3. If wet grinding, honing, or polishing, use slurry extraction equipment suitable for slurry removal and containment prior to proper disposal.

B. Edge Grinding and Polishing Equipment: Hand-held or walk-behind machines which produces the same results, without noticeable differences, as field grinding and polishing equipment.

C. Burnishing Equipment: High speed walk-behind or ride-on machines capable of generating 1000 to 2000 revolutions per minute and with sufficient head pressure of not less than 20 pounds to raise floor temperature by 20 degrees F.

SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Diamond Tooling: Abrasive tools that contain industrial grade diamonds within a bonded matrix (such as metallic, resinous, ceramic, etc.) that are attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate.

1. Bonded Abrasive: Abrasive medium that is held within a bonding that erodes away to expose new abrasive medium as it is used.

2. Metal Bond Tooling: Diamond tooling that contains industrial grade diamonds with a metallic bonded matrix that is attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. These tools are available in levels of soft, medium, and hard metallic matrices that are matched with contrasting concrete substrates (i.e., hard matrix/soft concrete, medium matrix/medium concrete, soft matrix/hard concrete) and are typically used in the grinding and early honing stages of the polishing process.

3. Resin Bond Tooling: Diamond tooling that contains industrial grade diamonds within a resinous bonded matrix (poly-phenolic, ester- phenolic, and thermoplastic-phenolic) that is attached to rotating heads to refine the concrete substrate. Resin bond tooling does not have the soft/medium/hard characteristics of metal bond tooling and are typically used for the later honing and polishing stages of the polishing process.

4. Hybrid Tooling: Diamond tooling that combines metal bond and resi
n bond that has the characteristics of both types of tooling.

These types of tools are typically used as either transitional tooling from metal bond tools to resin bond tools or as a first cut tool on smooth concrete surfaces.

5. Transitional Tooling: Diamond tooling that is used to refine the scratch pattern of metal bond tooling prior to the application of resin bond tooling in an effort to extend the life of resin bond tooling and to create a better foundation for the polishing process.

6. Abrasive Pad: An abrasive pad, resembling a typical floor maintenance burnishing pad that has the capability of refining the concrete surface on a microscopic level that may or may not contain industrial grade diamonds.

These pads are typically used for the maintenance and/or restoration of previously installed polished concrete flooring.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions:

SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Examine substrates to be polished for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
a. Concrete finished floor flatness according to applicable B. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents.

C. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Cleaning New Concrete Surfaces:

1. Prepare and clean concrete surfaces.

2. Provide sound concrete surfaces free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, paint splatter, and other contaminants incompatible with liquid applied products and polishing.

3.4 COLORING CONCRETE FLOORS
A. Dye or Pigmented Micro Stain Application:

1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendation.

3.5 POLISHING CONCRETE FLOORS
A. Perform all polishing procedures to ensure a consistent visual appearance from wall to wall.

B. Initial Grinding:

1. Use grinding equipment with metal or semi-metal bonded tooling.

2. Begin grinding in one direction using sufficient size equipment and diamond tooling to meet specified aggregate exposure class.

3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit tool with each pass, up to 100 grit metal bonded tooling.

4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit tools.

5. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.

6. Continue grinding until aggregate surface exposure matches approved field mock-up.

C. Treating Surface Imperfections:

1. Mix patching compound or grout material with dust created by grinding operations, manufacturer’s tint, or sand to match color of adjacent concrete surfaces.

2. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, small and micro cracks, air holes, pop-outs, and voids with grout to eliminate micro pitting in finished work.

SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections, compared to mockup, are not noticeable when viewed from 20 feet away under lighting conditions that will be present after construction.

D. Liquid Densifier Application: Apply undiluted to point of rejection, remove excess liquid, and allow curing according to manufacturer’s instructions.

E. Grout Grinding:

1. Use grinding equipment and appropriate grit and bond diamond tooling.

2. Apply clear epoxy into cracks of the concrete slab to fill surface imperfections.

3. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.

F. Honing:

1. Use grinding equipment with hybrid or resin bonded tooling.

2. Hone concrete in one direction starting with 100 grit tooling and make as many sequential passes as required to remove scratches, each pass perpendicular to previous pass, up to 400 grit tooling reaching maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit tooling.

3. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.

G. Polishing:

1. Use polishing equipment with resin-bonded tooling.

2. Begin polishing in one direction starting with 800 grit tooling.

3. Make sequential passes with each pass perpendicular to previous pass using finer grit tooling with each pass until the specified level of appearance has been achieved.

4. Achieve maximum refinement with each pass before proceeding to finer grit pads.

5. Clean floor thoroughly after each pass using dust extraction equipment properly fitted with squeegee attachment or walk behind auto scrubber suitable to remove all visible loose debris and dust.

6. Stain Protection: Uniformly apply and remove excessive liquid according to manufac
turer’s instructions. Final film thickness should be less than .05 mils after cure.

7. Final Polish: Using burnishing equipment and finest grit abrasive pads, burnish to uniform reflective sheen matching approved field mock-up.

H. Final Polished Concrete Floor Finish:

1. Aggregate Exposure Class B – Fine Aggregate: Surface exposure of 85 to 95% fine aggregate and 5 to 15% cement fines and coarse aggregate based on SECTION 03 3543

BONDED ABRASIVE POLISHED CONCRETE FLOORS
MILLS PARK 03 3543 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
visual observation of the overall area of the polished floor.

2. Appearance Level 3 – Polished:
a. Procedure: Recommended not less than 4 steps with full refinement of each diamond tool with one application of densifier.
b. Measurement: Determine the Image Clarity Value, %, and the Haze Index:
1) Image Clarity Value, %: An average value of 40 to 69 measured in accordance with ASTM D5767 prior to the application of sealers. 2) Haze Index: An average value less than 10 measured in accordance with ASTM D4039 prior to the application of sealers.
3) The minimum number of tests distributed across the polished surface should be three, for areas up to 1000 ft2 and one additional test for each 1000
ft2 or fraction thereof. This applies to both the Image Clarity Value and Ha
ze Index.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protection is the responsibility of others.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 1000

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 03 1000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete as indicated.

2. Installation of items to be embedded in concrete, such as anchor bolts, inserts, embeds, and sleeves.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcing.

3. Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication:

1. ACI 318 – Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, Chapter 6, Formwork, Embedded Pipes, and Construction Joints.

2. ACI 347 – Guide to Formwork for Concrete.

B. American Plywood Association (APA):

1. Form No. V345 - Concrete Forming Design/Construction Guide.

C. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST):

1. NIST Voluntary Product Standard PS 1.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit detailed structural calculations and drawings approved and signed by a California registered Civil Engineer where the height of the falsework or vertical shoring, as measured from the top of the sills to the soffit of the superstructure exceeds 14 feet, or where individual horizontal span lengths exceed 16 feet, or where provision for vehicular traffic through falsework or shoring occurs. For all other falsework and shoring submit layout signed by California registered Civil Engineer, manufacturer’s authorized representative or a licensed contractor experienced in the usage and erection of falsework and vertical shoring. A copy of the plans and calculation shall be available at the jobsite at all times.

B. Submit Shop Drawings indicating locations of forms, construction and expansion joints, embedded items, and accessories.

C. Submit Product Data “manufacturer's Product Data” form materials and accessories.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. California Building Code (CBC), Chapter 19A.

SECTION 03 1000

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 03 1000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Division 1, Chapter 4, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders, Article 6, Excavations, Sections 1713 and 1717.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Storage shall prevent damage and permit access to materials for inspection and identification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Form materials may be reused during progress of the Work provided they are completely cleaned and reconditioned, recoated for each use, capable of producing formwork of required quality, and are structurally sound.

B. Form Lumber: WCLIB Construction Grade or Better, WWPA No. 1 or Better.

C. Plywood: NIST Voluntary Product Standard PS 1, Group 1, Exterior Grade B-B Plyform or better, minimum 5-ply and 3/4 inch thick for exposed locations and at least 5/8 inch thick for unexposed locations, grade marked, not mill oiled. Furnished plywood with medium or high density overlay is permitted.

D. Coated Form Plywood: For exposed painted concrete, plastic overlaid plywood of grade specified above, factory coated with a form coating and release agent Nox-crete", or equal.

E. Tube Forms: Sonoco "Seamless Sonotubes,” Ceme-Tube, Quik-Tube, or equal, of the type leaving no marks in concrete, one-piece lengths for required heights.

F. Joist Forms: Code recognized steel or molded plastic types as required.

G. Special Forms: For exposed integrally-colored concrete, plywood as above with high density overlay, plywood with integral structural hardboard facing or fibrous glass reinforced plastic facing, providing specified finish.

H. For Exposed Concrete Finish:

1. Plywood: New, waterproof, synthetic resin bonded, exterior type Douglas fir or Southern pine plywood manufactured especially for concrete formwork and conforming to NIST Voluntary Product Standard PS 1, Grade B-B grade, Class I.

2. Glass-Fiber-Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surfaces.

3. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete, without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearances of finished concrete surfaces.

4. Plywood: "Finland Form,” "Combi Form" by North American Plywood Corporation, “Plyform” by Roy O. Martin, “ProForm” by Pacific Wood Laminates, or equal. The material shall be furnished with hard SECTION 03 1000

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 03 1000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
smooth birch face veneers with phenolic resin thermally fused onto panel sides. Edges shall be factory sealed.

I. Form Ties: Prefabricated rod, flat band, wire, internally threaded disconnecting type, not leaving metal within 1 1/2-inch of concrete surface.

J. Form Coating: Non-staining clear coating free from oil, silicone, wax, not grain-raising, "Formshield" by A.C. Horn, Inc., "Release" by Edoco/Dayton Superior, "Cast-Off" by Sonneborn/BASF Building Systems or equal. Where form liners are furnished, provide form coatings recommended by form liner manufacturer.

K. Form Liner: Rigid or resilient type by L.M. Scofield, Symons, Greenstreak, or equal.

L. Void Forms: Manufactured by SureVoid Products, Inc., Sonotube, Void Form International, or equal. Forms shall be "WallVoid" for temporary support of concrete walls and grade beams spanning between supports, and "SlabVoid" for creating gaps between concrete slabs or steps and underlying soils. Void forms shall be fabricated of corrugated paper with moisture resistant exterior and shall be capable of withstanding working load of 1,500 psf. Provide accessories as required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Forms shall be constructed so as to shape final concrete structure conforming to shape, lines and dimensions of members required by Drawings and Specifications and shall be sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. They shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain position and shape. Forms and their supports shall be designed so that previously placed structures will not be damaged.

B. Use form coating at all surfaces in contact with concrete.

3.2 TOLERANCES
A. Permitted abrupt or gradual irregularities in formed surfaces as measured within a 5 feet length with a straightedge shall per ACI 347, Table 3.1:

Class of Surface

A B C D
1/8 inch 1/4 inch 1/2 inch 1 inch

1. Class A: Use for concrete surfaces prominently exposed to public view.

2. Class B: Use for coarse-textured concrete-formed surfaces intended to receive plaster, stucco, or wainscoting.

SECTION 03 1000

CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES
MILLS PARK 03 1000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Class C: Use as a general standard for permanently exposed surfaces where other finishes are not specified.

4. Class D: Use for surfaces where roughness is not objectionable and will be permanently concealed.

3.3 ERECTION
A. Plywood shall be installed with horizontal joints level, vertical joints plumb and with joints tight. Back joints by studs or solid blocking and fill where necessary for smoothness. Reused plywood shall be thoroughly cleaned, damaged edges or surfaces repaired, and both sides and edges oiled with colorless form oil. Nail plywood along edges, and to intermediate supports, with common wire nails spaced as necessary to maintain alignment and prevent warping.

B. Openings for Cleaning: Provide temporary openings at points in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. At base of walls and wide piers, bottom form board on one face for entire length shall be omitted until form has been cleaned and inspected.

C. Chamfers: Provide 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch chamfer strips for all exposed concrete corners and edges unless otherwise indicated.

D. Reglets and Rebates: As specified in Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Forms shall not be removed until concrete is sufficiently hydrated to maintain its integrity and not be damaged by form removal operations.

Unless noted otherwise and/or permitted by the Architect, columns and wall forms shall not be removed in less than five days, floor slabs in less than seven days, beams, and girders in less than 15 days, pan forms for joists may be removed after three days, but joist centering shall not be removed until after 15 days, and ramp, landing, steps, and floor slabs shall not be removed in less than seven days. Shoring shall not be removed until member has acquired sufficient strength to support its weight, load upon it, and added load of construction.

B. Compressive strength of in-place concrete shall be determined by testing field-cured specimens’ representative of concrete location or members, as specified in Section 03 3000: Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of them off the Project site.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 2000

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
MILLS PARK 03 2000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Reinforcing steel bars.

2. Reinforcement accessories.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 011000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Coordination between concrete placement and reinforcing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI):

1. ACI 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.

2. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.

3. ACI SP-66 - American Concrete Institute - Detailing Manual.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 184 - Fabricated Deformed Steel Bar Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.

2. ASTM A 615 - Deformed and Plain Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

3. ASTM A 704 - Welded Steel Plain Bar or Rod Mats for Concrete Reinforcement.

C. American Welding Society (AWS):

1. AWS D 1.4 – Structural Welding Code for Reinforcing Steel.

D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI):

1. CRSI - Manual of Practice.

2. CRSI 63 - Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars.

3. CRSI 65 - Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 03 2000

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
MILLS PARK 03 2000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Submittal Procedures:

1. Shop Drawings: Indicate bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing steel [and wire fabric, bending and cutting schedules, and supporting and spacing device. Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.

2. Assurance/Control Submittals.
a. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Submit certified copies of mill test report of reinforcement materials analysis.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with CRSI 63, 65 and Manual of Practice ACI 301, ACI SP-66, ACI 318, and ASTM A 184.

B. Reinforcement design is provided by the Structural Engineer of Record, experienced in design of this work, and licensed in the State where the Project is located.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Resource Management

1. Recycled Content
a. Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one half of pre- consumer recycled content not less than 75 percent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615, 60 ksi yield grade; deformed billet steel bars, unfinished.

B. Reinforcing Steel Mat: ASTM A 704, ASTM A 615, 60 ksi yield grade; steel bars or rods, unfinished.

C. Dowels at Construction Joints: See drawings for size, Diamond Dowels by PNA Construction Technologies or approved equal.

2.2 ACCESSORIES
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.

SECTION 03 2000

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
MILLS PARK 03 2000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of reinforcement during concrete placement conditions including load bearing pad on bottom to prevent vapor barrier puncture.

C. Special Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers Adjacent to Weather Exposed Concrete Surfaces: Plastic coated steel type (CRSI, Class 1) or stainless steel protected (CRSI, Class 2); size and shape as required.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate concrete reinforcing in accordance with ACI SP-66 and ACI 318.

B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on drawings, at point of minimum stress.

Review location of splices with the Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 PLACEMENT
A. Place, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from required position.

B. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier.

C. Accommodate placement of formed openings.

D. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
SECTION 03 2000

CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
MILLS PARK 03 2000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection.

B. Inspect reinforcing locations, bar types and sizes, wire ties, and welding (if applicable).

END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Includes all labor, materials, and appliances, and perform all operations in connection with the installation of Concrete Work, and all related work incidental to the completion thereof, as shown on the drawings, complete, in strict accordance with the drawings and as specified herein. Section Includes:

1. Cast-in-place (CIP) concrete in foundations, foundation walls, slabs-on- grade.

2. Finishing of concrete slabs and toppings. Concrete liquid surface treatment, sealer, and slip-resistant coatings.

3. Expansion and contraction, control joints in CIP concrete.

4. Concrete curing and protection.

5. Non-shrink grout including installation and forming.

6. Testing related services.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents and References in Section 1.2.

C. Related Sections: Related work specified elsewhere includes but may not be limited to

1. Section 03 2000 – Concrete Reinforcement.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. General:

1. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.

2. Where a date is given for reference standards, the edition of that date shall be used. Where no date is given for reference standards, the latest edition available on the date of Notice Inviting Bids shall be used.

B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).

1. AASHTO M182, “Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats.”
C. Unless otherwise shown or specified, the work shall conform to the following standards and recommendations of the American Concrete Institute (ACI), latest editions adopted:

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. ACI 117, “Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.”

2. ACI 121R, “Quality Assurance Systems for Concrete Construction.”

3. ACI 212.2R, “Guide for Use of Admixtures in Concrete.”

4. ACI 302.1R, “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.”

5. ACI 304R, “Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete.”

6. ACI 304.2-R, "Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods."

7. ACI 305, “Hot Weather Concreting.”

8. ACI 306, “Cold Weather Concreting.”

9. ACI 306.1 “Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting.”

10. ACI 308, “Standard Practice for Curing Concrete.”

11. ACI 309R, “Guide for Consolidation for Concrete.”

12. ACI 315, “Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.”

13. ACI 347, “Guide to Formwork for Concrete.”

14. ACI SP-15, “Field Reference Manual” which includes ACI 301 “Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings”, and reference standards specified therein.

D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1. ASTM A615, "Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement."

2. ASTM C33, "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates."

3. ASTM C39, "Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens."

4. ASTM C94, "Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete."

5. ASTM C150, "Standard Specification for Portland Cement."

6. ASTM C156, "Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials."
E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI),

1. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittal Procedures:

1. Review of submittals will cover general design only. In no case shall submittal review relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for strength of concrete, general or detailed dimension, quality or quantity of materials, or any other conditions, functions, performance or guarantees required.

2. Product Data:
a. Manufacturers' literature containing product and installation specifications and details.
b. Where Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and/or directions are required in this specification, deliver to the Engineer two SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
(2) copies of such printed specifications, recommendations, and/or directions for approval before any work is commenced.
c. Sources of fine and coarse aggregate. Once approved, the source of fine and coarse aggregate shall not be changed without written approval of the Engineer.
d. List of manufacturers and brand names for cement, mineral and liquid admixtures, bond breakers, curing compounds, joint sealants, and materials other than aggregates and reinforcing steel. Include product data sheets, instructions, and specifications for use.

3. Batch Plant Equipment and Procedures
a. Supplier of concrete and ready-mix grout. Only one source will be approved for the Contractor, including all subcontractors. All concrete and ready-mixed grout supplied to the project shall originate from the approved single facility.
b. The following information shall be submitted:
1) Name of supplier.
2) Plant location.
3) Plant volume and output capacity.
4) Capacity of transit equipment.
5) Estimated travel time from plant to jobsite.
c. If the Contractor elects to use an on-site concrete batching plant, the following information shall be submitted:
1) Drawings and data including proposed location of the batch plant on the site.
2) List of and performance data for material handling equipment. 3) Procedures for processing, handling, transporting, sorting, and proportioning the materials for concrete.
d. All other data necessary to show the supplier’s capability to produce concrete of the quality and quantity required.

4. Concrete Procedures
a. The following information shall be submitted:
1) Procedure for mixing and transporting concrete to the point of placement.
2) Procedures for placement of concrete.
3) Methods of obtaining and maintaining the required concrete temperature during placement and initial curing.
4) Procedures for consolidating the concrete.
5) Procedures for how concrete is finished and cured (slab-on- grade concrete).

5. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to the Engineer from Testing Laboratory, with copy to Contractor. Prepare reports in conformance with Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements. b. Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test, including certified copy of results of aggregate tested by ASTM SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C1260 or C1567. Mix designs for each strength and type of concrete proposed for use. Details to be included are found in section 2.7. c. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
d. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

6. Delivery Tickets:
a. Copies of delivery tickets for each load of concrete delivered to site. b. Indicate on each ticket information required by ASTM C94 including additional information required herein.
c. Mix identification number on ticket shall match number on submitted and approved mix design
d. Indicate number of drum revolution from when water is added until concrete is discharged.
e. Submit copies to Testing Laboratory same day as concrete delivery.

7. Verification Samples:
a. At exposed concrete location provide a sample of concrete with medium broom finish and sealed for Engineer’s approval.

B. Closeout Procedures and Training:

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:
a. Shop drawings shall be corrected to reflect actual field changes and become part of the “Record As-Built Drawings.”

2. Extra Products: Submit extra products as specified in this Section.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents.

C. Store powdered materials in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid materials from freezing or exceeding maximum storage temperatures set by product manufacturer.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Jobsite Requirements:

1. Conform to ACI 305 R when placing concrete during hot weather.

2. Conform to ACI 306 R when placing concrete during cold weather.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Environmental Impact:

1. Concrete placement accessories:
a. Mixing equipment: Return excess concrete to supplier; minimize water used to wash equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Applied Concrete Technology, Inc.,

2. The Euclid Chemical Company,

3. Fortifiber Corporation,

4. ChemRex Inc.,

5. W.R. Meadows, Inc.,

6. Reef Industries,

7. Stego Industries LLC.

8. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.

9. Curecrete Chemical Company, Inc.

10. Midwest Floor Care Inc.,

11. General Resource Technology, Inc.,

12. Or approved equal
B. Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Concrete:

1. Concrete shall be in accordance with ASTM C94. If a conflict exists between ASTM C94 and these specifications, these specifications shall govern.

B. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 – Type I unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer.

1. Assume full responsibility for the quality and soundness of cement. Cement is to be of one type and from the same mill; it is to be of uniform color for all concrete with permanently exposed concrete finishes.

C. Liquid admixtures: All admixtures shall be used in conformance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. When air entraining admixtures, water reducing admixtures, high range water reducing admixtures, and non-corrosive accelerating admixtures are used in any combination, all products shall be from the same manufacturer, or the ready-mix concrete producer shall certify that they are compatible. The following admixtures are permitted when approved in writing SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
prior to use or are required as specified herein and shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications or recommendations:

1. Calcium chloride: Conform to ACI 301. The water-soluble chloride ion level shall not exceed 0.3 percent by weight of cement.

2. Air-entraining admixtures: ASTM C260 shall be used to achieve the specified air content in all permanently exposed exterior concrete. For steel hard trowel interior slab finish, do not use air entrainment admixtures. The total air entrainment (entrained and entrapped air) must not exceed 3 percent. For steel trowel exterior slab finish, comply with ACI 318 and ACI 302.
a. Euclid: AEA-92 or Air Mix 200.
b. BASF: Micro-Air, MBVR-Standard, and MB AE 90.
c. Sika: Sika AEA-14, Sika AEA-15, and Sika Air.
d. W.R. Grace: Darex EH, Darex II AEA, Daravair AT60, Daravair 1400, and Daravair 1000.
e. Or approved equal.

3. Water-reducing admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A, containing not more chloride ions than allowed in paragraph C., above. a. Euclid: Eucon WR series or Eucon MR.
b. BASF: Masterpave, Masterpave N, PolyHeed 997, Pozzolith 220N, and Glenium 7500.
c. W.R. Grace: Daracem 55 and Daracem 65, WRDA 82 and WRDA with HYCOL.
d. Sika: Sikament HP, Plastocrete 161, and Sikament 686. e. General Resource Technology: Polychem 400 NC and Polychem 1000.
f. Or approved equal.

4. Water-reducing/accelerating admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type C or E having long-term test results showing non-rusting on metal deck and reinforcing steel.
a. Euclid: Accelguard series.
b. BASF: Pozzutec 20+, Pozzolith NC 534, and Rheocrete CNI. c. Sika: Sika Rapid-1 and Plasocrete 161FL.
d. W.R. Grace: Lubricon NCA, Polarset, and DCI.
e. Or approved equal.

5. Water-reducing/retarding admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type D containing not more than 1 percent chloride ions.
a. Euclid: Eucon Retarder series.
b. BASF: Delvo Stabilizer, Masterpave series, and Pozzolith 100XR, 200N, 220N and 322N.
c. Sika: Plastimet.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
d. W.R. Grace: Daratard 17, WRDA-64, and WRDA-82.
e. Or approved equal.

6. High-range/water-reducing (HRWR) admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type F or G super plasticizers containing 1 percent maximum chloride ions may be used with low slump (3 inches maximum) concrete to produce flowable concrete (up to 8 inches slump) with early strength gain and 28- day strengths equal to reference concrete. HRWR admixture may be used providing not more than 60 minutes is allowed from addition of admixture to final placement of concrete. HRWR admixture shall be used in concrete with a maximum water/ cement ratio of 0.50 or less and is suggested in the following:
a. In pumped concrete.
b. In concrete topping slabs
c. In lieu of the specified water-reducing admixture (Type A) where confinement of placing due to heavy reinforcement or narrow space requires flowable concrete.
d. Where more than 30 minutes is required between the addition of admixtures to final placement of the concrete, a combination of water- reducing, set controlling admixtures (ASTM C494, Types A, D, & E) as in Master Builders Company "Synergized Performance System" may be used.
1) Euclid: Eucon 37 or Eucon 537.
2) BASF: Rheobuild 1000, Glenium 3000 NS, and Glenium
3400NV.
3) Sika: Sikament 300, Viscocrete 2100, and Sikament 686. 4) W.R. Grace: Daracem 100, ADVA Cast 530, Mira 92, and ADVA Cast 575.
5) Or approved equal.

D. Fly ash: Conform to ASTM C618. The use of quality fly ash will be permitted as a cement-reducing admixture (minimum 15 percent and maximum 25 percent).

Fly ash used in concrete shall be from a single source and of a single class in combination with Portland cement of a single source and single class unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. The fly ash shall meet all of the requirements of ASTM C618, Class C or Class F, with the following special requirements: The loss on ignition in Table 1 shall not exceed 3 percent.

Compliance to Table 1A shall apply. The amount retained on the 325 sieves in Table 2 shall not exceed 34 percent. Where a Type II low-alkali cement is specified, the total C3A shall be less than 8 percent of total cementitious material.

The
chemical analysis of the fly ash shall be reported in accordance with ASTM C311. Quality assurance testing and reports for a minimum of six months shall be submitted by the fly ash supplier. The option to use fly ash must be approved prior to use.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Granulated Blast Furnace Slag is an alternative to fly ash and shall conform to ASTM C989 Grade 100 0r 120. Granulated blast furnace slag may be used as a substitute for a maximum of 30 percent of Portland cement.

F. Certification: Certification of the above requirements is required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review and approval by the Engineer.

Upon request by the Engineer, a qualified representative is to be provided to ensure proper use of admixtures. Use of admixtures other than listed above will be permitted only when approved by the Engineer.

G. Aggregates:

1. Normal-weight concrete - ASTM C33. For slabs, also conform to combined aggregate grading recommendations of ACI 302 and ACI 302.1R, unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer.

2. All concrete exposed to the weather shall conform to the limits of deleterious substances and physical properties of Table 3, ASTM C 33.

3. Local aggregates: Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33, but which have been shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the Engineer.

4. The nominal size of an aggregate particle shall not exceed:
a. 20 percent of the narrowest dimension between sides of forms. b. 33 percent of the depth of slabs.
c. 75 percent of the dimension between reinforcing bars. d. 75 percent of the dimension between reinforcing bars and forms.

5. Maximum size of coarse aggregates and minimum cementitious contents:

ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R.

6. Concrete aggregate alkali-silica reactivity (ASR) shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 with a 14-day expansion (no supplementary cementing materials) or ASTM C1567 (with supplementary cementing materials) of less than 0.1 percent. Materials (cement, supplementary cementing materials, and aggregates) to be used in the concrete shall be tested. Coarse aggregates and fine aggregates shall be individually tested.

If two grades of coarse aggregates are blended, they shall be individually tested.

7. Abrasive aggregates non-slip finishes: Fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory-graded, packaged, rustproof, non- glazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials.

H. Water:

1. Clean, potable, and free of injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic or other deleterious matter not detrimental to concrete, drinkable.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Water shall contain no more than 650 parts per million of chlorides as Cl or more than 1000 parts per million of sulfates as SO 4. In no case shall the water
contain an amount of impurities that will cause a change in the setting time of Portland cement of neither more than 25 percent nor a reduction in compressive strength of mortar at 14 days of more than 5 percent when compared to the results obtained with distilled water when tested in accordance with ASTM C109.

3. Water used for curing shall not contain impurities in amounts to cause discoloration of the concrete or mortar or to produce etching of the surface.

4. Recycled water shall conform to ASTM C94.

2.3 CURING/SEALING/HARDENERS
A. Dissipating liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete; Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1. Curing compound shall be compatible with floor sealer or finish used. Low VOC.

1. Euclid: VOX Kurex DR VOX series; waterborne products.

2. W.R. Meadows: 1100-Clear series.

3. Edoco: Burke Aqua Resin Cure.

4. L&M Construction Chemicals: Cure R.

5. BASF: Kure 200W

6. Or approved equal.

B. Method of curing shall be approved by the finish flooring applicator where finishes are indicated.

C. Exterior Sealers: applied to horizontal concrete surfaces permanently exposed to salts, deicer chemicals and moisture, including parking decks. The manufacturer shall provide a five-year labor and materials warranty on performance of the sealer. Sealer shall be compatible with the curing compound used.

1. Euclid: Eucoguard or Diamond Clear or Super Diamond Clear.

2. ChemREX: Hydrozo Clear 40.

3. Or approved equal.

D. Liquid Densifier/Sealer/Hardener: to be applied on exposed concrete floors cured with dissipating membrane forming curing compound to harden and densify concrete surfaces. Sealers are to be clear, chemically reactive, a waterborne solution of silicate or siliconate materials and proprietary components, odorless, and colorless.

1. ChemMasters: Chemisil Plus

2. Conspec Marketing and Manufacturing Co., Inc. Intraseal

3. Euclid Chemical Company: Euco Diamond Hard (Liquid Sealer and Hardener)

4. L&M Construction Chemicals: Seal Hard (Liquid Sealer and Hardener) SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Curecrete Chemical Company: Ashford Formula (Liquid Sealer and Hardener)

6. W.R. Meadows, Inc.: Liqui-Hard

7. Sika: Sikafloor 3S

8. Sonneborn: Kure-N-Harden

9. Symons Corporation: Buff Hard

10. Or approved equal.

2.4 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS:

A. Construction and Contraction Joints: Comply with ACI 301 and recommendations of ACI 302.1R. Sealant shall be two-part semi- rigid epoxy and shall have minimum Shore A Hardness of 80 when measured with ASTM D2240.

B. Isolation Joints: Fillers shall consist of 1/8-inch width strips of neoprene, synthetic rubber, or approved substitute, extending the full depth of the slab. Sealant shall be two-part elastomeric type, polyurethane base.

2.5 PROPORTIONING
A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If laboratory trial batch method is used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to the Engineer for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing and inspection unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer.

B. Submit written reports to the testing laboratory of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed and approved. Include the following information for each concrete mix design:

1. Method used to determine the proposed mix design.

2. Gradation of fine and coarse aggregates, plus combined aggregate gradation for slabs, ACI 302.1R.

3. Aggregate specific gravities and absorptions.

4. Proportions of all ingredients including reported on a saturated surface dried basisall admixtures added either at the time of batching or at the job site.

5. Water-cementitious ratio.

6. Slump, ASTM C143.

7. Certification of the chloride content of individual admixtures and of the mixes as proposed.

8. Air Content: ASTM C173 (Volumetric Method).

9. Unit weight of concrete, ASTM C138.

10. Strength at 3, 7, and 28 days, ASTM C39.

11. Method of recording batch proportions.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

12. Substantiating test reports.

C. Concrete types and strengths: Minimum 28 Day Compressive Strength shall be per design requirements but not less than:

1. Paving base, columns, beams, walls, foundations, and footings: 4,000 psi.

2. Slab-on-grade:3,000 psi.

3. All concrete exposed to weather shall be air entrained (ASTM C260).

4. All concrete shall be normal weight except as noted above.

When the concrete mix design is developed from laboratory trial batching, adjust proportions to produce a design mix at least 1200 psi greater than the specified strength.

When the field experience method is used, the required average compressive strength shall be determined in accordance with ACI 318.Documentation that proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength shall consist of a field strength test record representing materials and proportions to be used for this project. A field strength test record shall consist of at least 10 consecutive tests encompassing a period of time of not less than 45 days and made within the past 12 months.

Also, see general and specific notes on structural drawings.

D. Weights: All concrete shall be normal-weight concrete unless otherwise designated on the structural drawings.

E. Aggregate gradation: For slabs, also conform to combined aggregate grading recommendations of ACI 302.1R, unless otherwise permitted. For all other concrete not otherwise noted the coarse aggregate gradation shall conform to ASTM C33 size no. 57 or larger.

F. Durability: Conform to ACI 301.

1. All concrete exposed to potentially destructive weathering, such as freezing and thawing, or to de-icer chemicals is to be air-entrained, 6 percent +1percent, a minimum six sacks cementitious per cubic yard of concrete,

0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio, and 4-inch maximum slump.

2. Water-cement ratio: For concrete subject to freezing and thawing or deicer chemicals, the water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.53 by weight including any water added to meet specified slump in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94 unless otherwise noted.

G. Slump: Conform to ACI 301.

1. 3 ½ inch maximum for consolidation by vibration

2. 5 inch maximum for consolidation by other methods
SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. 8 inch maximum for flowable concrete. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): 3 inch maximum before addition of HRWR

4. Where field conditions require slump to exceed that specified above, the increased slump shall be obtained by the use of a superplasticizer only, and the Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Engineer who may require an adjustment to the mix.

H. Slab-On-Grade

1. Concrete shall conform to ACI 302.1R except that the minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 3000 psi.

2. The minimum cementitious content shall be in accordance with ACI 302.1R Table 6.2.

3. The maximum water-cementitious ratio shall be 0.48.

4. The maximum water content shall not be greater than 250 lbs. per cubic yard of concrete.

5. The air content shall be less than 3 percent.

I. Production of concrete: Conform to ACI 301:

1. Cast-in-place concrete used in the work shall be produced at a single off- site batching plant or may be produced at an on-site batch plant.

2. All concrete shall be proportioned conforming to the approved mix designs and of the materials contained in those approved mixes. A certified copy of the design weights for each mix shall be kept at the producing plant for each class of concrete used on the project.

3. Plant equipment and facilities are to conform to the "Check List for Certification of Ready-Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association (NRMCA) and have NRMCA or approved certification within the past year.

4. Coarse aggregates shall be washed and, if necessary, shall be uniformly moistened just before batching. Each size of coarse aggregate shall be batched from separate bins as required to produce the combined grading requirements.

5. Prior to adding a high-range water reducer (super plasticizer), slump shall not exceed the working limit. The high-range water reducing admixture shall be accurately measured and pressure-injected into the mixer as a single dose. If added at the jobsite, the field dispensing system shall conform to the same requirements as a plant system and tested prior to each day’s operation. After the addition of the high-range water reducer, the concrete shall be mixed at mixing speed for a minimum of 5 minutes.

6. Ready-mixed and on-site batched concrete shall be batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94.
a. Truck mixers and their operation shall ensure that the discharged concrete is uniformly within acceptable limits of consistency, mix, and grading. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water-measuring and discharge apparatus, conditions of the blades, speed of rotation, SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
general mechanical condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum shall be checked before the use of the unit will be permitted. b. Truck mixers shall be equipped with approved revolution counters by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may readily be verified. The water tank system of the truck shall be equipped with gauges that permit accurate determination of the tank contents. c. Each batch of concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer for not less than 80 revolutions of the drum or blades and at the rate of rotation designated as mixing speed by the manufacturer of the equipment.

Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated as the agitating speed by the manufacturer of the equipment. All materials, including mixing water but excluding any high-range water reducers added onsite, shall be in the mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of revolutions of mixing. d. The concrete producer shall furnish duplicate delivery tickets, one for the Contractor and one given to the Owner’s Representative for each batch of concrete. The information provided on the delivery ticket shall include the quantity of materials batched including the amount of free water in the aggregate and any water added onsite. Show the date, time of day batched, and if ready-mixed the time of discharge from the truck. The quantity of water that can be added at the site without exceeding the maximum water-cementitious ratio specified shall be noted on the delivery ticket.

7. Concrete produced by on-site volumetric batching and continuous mixing if approved shall conform to ASTM C685.

8. For concrete produced on site with a central batch plant, mixing shall be done in an approved batch mixer.
a. The Contractor shall maintain and operate the on-site batch plant and transportation equipment in a manner that will produce the results specified in this section.
b. The Engineer reserves the right to reject the proposed on-site plant if, in his/her opinion, the on-site plant will interfere with other operations or impair the quality of the concrete.
c. The quantities of cement, pozzolanic materials, and aggregates used in each batch shall be determined by automatic weighing. The quantity of water shall be determined by weighing or volumetric measurement. d. The weighing equipment for aggregates shall be readily adjustable both to compensate for variation in moisture content of the aggregates and for changing mix proportions. Moisture-sensing devices shall automatically compensate the aggregate weights for changes in moisture content. The charging of weigh hoppers directly from aggregate handling equipment such as front-end loaders will not be permitted.
e. Mixers in centralized batching and mixing plants shall be arranged so that mixing actions can be observed from a location convenient to the mixing-plant operator’s station.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 14

BLDG RENOVATIONS
f. Equipment shall be provided that discharges pozzolanic material into the cement hopper only after the addition of the Portland cement.

Pozzolanic materials shall be stored in such a manner as to permit ready access for the purpose of inspection and sampling and be suitably protected against contamination of moisture. Should any pozzolan show evidence of contamination or be otherwise unsuitable, the Engineer will reject it and require that it be removed from the site. g. Dispensers for admixtures shall have the capacity of the full quantity of the properly diluted solution required for each batch. They shall be maintained in a clean and freely operating condition. Admixtures shall be added to the premeasured water for the batch or shall be discharged into the batch by flowing automatically and uniformly into the stream of mixing water from the beginning to end of its flow into the mixer. Equipment for measurement shall give visual confirmation of the accuracy of the measurement for each batch.
h. The central batch mixer shall be rotated at a speed recommended by the manufacturer and mixing shall be continued for a minimum of 1- 1/2 minutes after all materials are in the drum.
i. Each stationary mixer shall be equipped with a mechanically operated timing and signaling device that will indicate and ensure the completion of the required mixing period and will count the batches. j. All concrete shall be mixed until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and shall be discharged completely before the mixer is recharged.

9. The Engineer may increase the mixing time when the charging and mixing operations fail to produce a delivered batch in which variations of consistency, mix, or grading are within the limits specified.

10. Variations in consistency during the discharge of a single batch shall not exceed 1 inch of slump, except that a greater variation will be permitted if the slump of the concrete decreases and no water is added. Variations in mix and in grading of different parts of the delivered batch shall be within limits stated in ASTM C94.

11. Water shall be introduced prior to, during, and following mixer-charging operations.

12. When a mixer produces unsatisfactory results, it shall be repaired promptly and effectively, or it shall be replaced.

13. Mixers shall not be loaded in excess of their rated capacity.

14. Overmixing, such as requiring addition of water to preserve the required consistency or to reduce slump, will not be permitted.

15. All other concrete: Conform to ACI 301

16. Use of accelerating admixtures in cold weather and retarding admixtures in hot weather shall not relax placement requirements specified herein.

17. All concrete placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F is to contain an approved accelerator. The concrete temperature when delivered at the site shall be at least 50 degrees F.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 15

BLDG RENOVATIONS

18. All concrete placed at ambient temperatures above 80 degrees F is to contain an approved retarder.

19. All concrete required to be air-entrained is to contain an approved air- entraining admixture.

20. When improved workability, pumpability, lower water-cement ratio, or high ultimate and/or early strength is required, the HRWR admixture (super plasticizer) may be used.

21. Ensure air content for slabs with steel trowel finish is less than 3.0 percent.

22. The concrete shall be of such consistency and composition that it can be worked readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on the surfaces. Within the limiting requirements, adjust the consistency of the concrete as may be necessary to produce mixtures which will be placeable with reasonable methods of placing and compacting.

Maintain on the job at all times adequate extra cement to be used at rate of 1/2 sack cement per cubic yard concrete for each 2" slump increase for corrections due to wetness desired or obtained. No water shall be added to concrete except with the approval of the City inspector.

23. No water shall be added to concrete except with the approval of the City inspector. The water-cementitious ratio stated on the approved mix designs shall not be exceeded unless approved by the Engineer. Re-tempered concrete shall be mixed for not less than 80 revolutions of the drum or blades and at the rate of rotation designated as mixing speed by the manufacturer of the equipment.

24. Adjustments to concrete mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant at no additional cost to City.

Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted and accepted before using in work.

2.6 REINFORCING MATERIALS
A. Section 03 2000: Concrete Reinforcement
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 16

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Report in writing to the Engineer prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and approved by the Engineer.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install all cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 301 except as herein specified.

B. All bearing materials shall be inspected by the Engineer prior to placing concrete.

The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the suitability of the bearing material.

C. Compact stone base aggregate to thickness indicated on drawings. Proof roll stone screenings topping to provide smooth hard surface on which to place slab.

Surface should not show footprints or truck tracks when driven over.

D. Immediately before placing concrete, spaces to be occupied by concrete shall be free from standing water, ice, mud, and debris.

E. Concrete shall not be deposited under water or where water in motion may injure the surface finish of the concrete.

F. Immediately before placing concrete for exterior sidewalk, curb and gutter, pavements, and slab-on-grade, subbases and compacted subgrades shall be thoroughly moistened, but not muddied, by sprinkling with water. Surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling, as required, up to the time of placing of concrete.

G. Forms and the reinforcement shall be thoroughly cleaned of ice and other coatings. Remove surplus form releasing agent from the contact face of forms.

H. Notify all trades concerned and the Owner’s Representative sufficiently in advance of the scheduled time for concrete placement to permit installation of all required work by other trades.

I. Before placing concrete, all required embedded items, including dovetail anchor slots, anchors, inserts, curb angles, metal frames, fixtures, sleeves, drains, stair nosing, accessory devices for Mechanical and Electrical installations shall be properly located, accurately positioned, and built into the construction, and maintained securely in place.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 17

BLDG RENOVATIONS
J. Build into construction all items furnished by the Owner and other trades. Provide all offsets, pockets, slabs, chases, and recesses as job conditions require.

K. Place and properly support reinforcing steel and anchor bolts.

L. The alignment, orientation, spacing, and embedment length of mechanical load transfer devices in slab-on-grade and pavements shall conform to dimensions and tolerances shown on the drawings.

M. The Engineer and City Inspector shall be notified when the first concrete pour is scheduled.

3.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Placement: Section 03 2000 - Concrete Reinforcement

3.4 METHODS OF PLACEMENT AND PLACING CONCRETE
A. Placement: Conform to ACI 301:

1. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as per Section 3.3 above and ACI 301.

2. The methods and equipment used for transporting concrete to the site work and the time that elapses during transportation shall not cause segregation of coarse aggregate or slump loss in excess of 1 inch when measured at the point of discharge.

3. Concrete shall be placed within 90 minutes after the water has been added to the cement and aggregates. Concrete shall be placed prior to initial concrete set.

4. Placing of concrete will not be permitted during rainfall or when rain appears imminent. If rain should fall subsequent to placement, the concrete shall be completely protected until curing is complete.

5. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306.1 “Standard Specifications for Cold-Weather Concreting” and as follows. a. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. b. When necessary, arrangements for heating, covering, insulating, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature during the first 24 hours.
c. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 18

BLDG RENOVATIONS
d. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen ground or placed when the ambient temperature is 40 deg F or less and dropping.
e. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
f. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures using vented heaters and insulating blankets.
g. Vent heater exhaust gases that contain carbon dioxide outside of enclosed areas.
h. Concrete temperatures shall be maintained above 50 degrees F for the first 7 days of curing.

6. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305R “Standard Specification for Hot-Weather Concreting” and as specified.
a. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice of a size that will melt completely during mixing may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
b. Reject any concrete that has a temperature at the point of placement above 90 deg F, unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. When air temperatures are between 80 and 90 deg F the maximum mixing and delivery time is reduced to 75 minutes. When air temperatures exceed 90 deg F, the maximum mixing and delivery time is reduced to 60 minutes.
c. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
d. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
e. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to the Engineer.
f. Spray evaporative retardants, wind breaks, misters, or shade concrete when the rate of surface evaporation when calculated in accordance with ACI 305.5 exceeds 0.2 lb./sq. foot per hour.

B. Depositing Concrete

1. Deposit concrete as near its final position as possible to avoid segregation due to rehandling or flowing. Hoppers, tremies, pump line, ducts, chutes, or other methods approved by the Engineer shall be used to deposit concrete in its final position within the specified time limits and without segregation of the mix.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 19

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. The sequence of concrete placement and the number, type, position, and design of joints shall be approved by the Engineer prior to concrete placement.

3. Place floor slabs-on-grade by "strip cast" method.

4. Concrete shall be deposited as practical in its final position to avoid segregation due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete shall have a free fall of over three feet from truck, mixer, or buggies.

5. The concreting shall be carried on at such a rate that the concrete is plastic at all times and flows readily into the spaces between reinforcing bars. No concrete that has partially hardened or been contaminated by foreign materials shall be deposited in the work

6. When concreting is started, it shall be carried on as a continuous operation until the placing of the section is completed.

7. Except as intercepted by joints, concrete shall be placed in continuous layers. The depth of layers shall not exceed 20 inches. Succeeding layers shall be placed while the previous layer is still plastic. Concrete placement shall begin at the lowest point in each section of concrete to be placed.

8. Protect adjacent surfaces from concrete drippings, spillage, and splashes.

Hardened or partially hardened splashes or accumulations of concrete on forms or reinforcement shall be removed before the work proceeds. Clean all damaged surfaces immediately.

9. All conveyances shall be thoroughly cleaned at frequent intervals during the placement of the concrete, and before the beginning a new run of concrete all hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the surfaces.

10. The Superintendent or Foreman in charge of concrete work shall mark on the drawings the time and date of the placing of each concrete pour.

Locations where concrete test cylinders are made shall also be noted on the drawings. Such drawings shall be kept on file at the job until its completion and shall be subject to inspection of the Engineer at all times.

C. Conveyor Belts and Chutes

1. Chutes or conveyor belts shall not be used except as approved by the Engineer.

2. Concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final deposit by methods that will prevent separation and loss of material.

3. Chutes longer than 50 feet and conveyor belts longer than 110 feet will not be permitted.

4. Equipment for conveying and chuting concrete shall be of such size and design as to insure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery point without separation of material.

5. Provide runways or other means for wheeled equipment to convey concrete to point of deposit. Construct runways so that supports will not bear upon reinforcement or fresh concrete.

6. The minimum slope of chutes shall enable concrete of the specified consistency to readily flow.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 20

BLDG RENOVATIONS

7. Ends of chutes, hopper gates, and other points of concrete discharge throughout the conveying, hoisting, and placing system shall be designed and arranged so that concrete passing from them will not fall separated into whatever receptacle immediately receiving the concrete. Adequate headroom provision must be made at such points for a vertical drop and for proper baffling.

8. If a conveyor belt is used, it shall be wiped clean by a device operated so that none of the mortar adhering to the belt will be wasted.

D. Pumping of Concrete

1. The type and operation of a concrete pump shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The equipment used in placing the concrete and the method of its operation shall introduce the concrete into the forms without high velocity.

2. During pumping, the Contractor shall have on-site a standby placing system, acceptable to the Engineer, to ensure that in the event of breakdown of the primary placing equipment, the concrete placement can continue without cold joints.

3. The minimum diameter of the hose or conduit shall be 4 inches unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Aluminum conduits shall not be used for conveying the concrete. Pumping equipment, hoses, and conduits that are not functioning properly shall be replaced.

E. Joints

1. Joints shall be vertical in walls and horizontal in slabs.

2. Dowel bars and tie bars shall be inspected

3. Control joints for controlling concrete shrinkage shall be provided in floor slabs, walls, decks, conduits, and channels as shown on the plans or approved by the Engineer.

4. Joint spacing and sawcut depth for slab-on-grade and concrete pavement shall conform to that shown on the pour sequencing plan and/or drawings. a. Sawed control (contraction) joints for pavements and slab-on-grade shall be installed as soon as practical so as not to ravel the concrete but less than 12 hours.
b. The minimum sawcut joint depth shall be 1/4 of the slab thickness unless an early-entry SOFF-CUT saw is used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations (typically sawed between 1 to 4 hours after finishing to a 1-inch minimum depth.
c. Joint spacing shall in feet shall not exceed 2-1/2 times the slab thickness in inches unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. d. The long dimension of a slab shall not exceed 1.5 times the short dimension unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

5. Joints in slabs shall align with joints in adjoining walls unless otherwise approved by the Engineer or shown in the drawings. Joints shall also line up with architectural reveals and form lines. All corners shall be relieved by cutting joint to adjacent control joint.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 21

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. When not otherwise shown on the drawings or specified, concrete placement for walls shall be constructed in segments no longer than 30 feet unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

7. If there is a delay in casting but prior to concrete initial set, the concrete placed after the delay shall be thoroughly spaded and consolidated at the edge of that previously placed to avoid cold joints. Concrete shall then be brought to correct level and struck off with a straight edge. Bullfoats shall be used to smooth slab surfaces, leaving it free of humps or hollows.

8. Where placing concrete is interrupted long enough for the concrete to take its initial set, the working face shall be made a construction joint. a. Preparation and disposition of unplanned cold joints in walls shall be approved by the Engineer.
b. For slab-on-grade, pavements, sidewalk, and curb and gutter, concrete shall be removed back to the nearest planned joint and a construction joint installed.

9. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, where concrete is to be placed against existing concrete, except in the case of expansion joints, the joint face of the existing concrete shall be roughened.
a. Before new concrete is placed against hardened concrete, the bonding surface of the existing concrete shall be roughened to an amplitude of 0.25 inch using bush hammers, abrasive blasting, or high-pressure water blasting.
b. Fresh concrete may be green-cut with water blasting and hand tools to remove concrete laitance and spillage and to expose sound aggregate.
c. The prepared surfaces of hardened concrete shall be kept thoroughly wet during the 24-hour period immediately prior to the placement of the new concrete. Wetting shall be accomplished by continuous sprinkling or by covering exposed surfaces with wet burlap. d. Where shown on the drawings or permitted by the Engineer, bond- preventing compound shall be applied by brush in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

10. Corner sections of walls shall not be placed until the adjoining wall sections have cured at least 14 days.

F. Consolidation

1. All concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by internal mechanical vibrators during the placing operation and shall be thoroughly worked around the reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of the forms.

2. Concrete for slabs 8 inches thick or less may be consolidated with vibrating screeds. Slabs between 8 to 12 inches thick shall be compacted with internal vibrators and (optionally) with vibrating screeds.

3. Concrete shall be consolidated by vibration to the maximum practicable density. The concrete shall be free from pockets of coarse aggregate and entrapped air.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 22

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Vibrators shall have a minimum diameter of 3 inches with a frequency of at least 7000 vibrations per minute and with an amplitude adequate to consolidate the concrete in the section being placed.

5. Forms shall contain sufficient windows or shall be limited in height to allow visual observation of the concrete during placement. Sufficient illumination shall be provided in the interior of forms so that at the places of concrete deposition the concrete shall be visible from the deck or runway.

6. Vibrators shall not be secured to forms or reinforcement.

7. Keep a minimum of two standby vibrators in operable condition on the job during concreting operations.

8. Consolidation shall be carried on continuously with the placing of concrete.

9. The number of vibrators employed shall be sufficient to consolidate the concrete within 15 minutes after it is deposited in the forms.

10. When consolidating each layer of concrete, the vibrator shall be operated at regular and frequent intervals 18 to 30 inches apart.

11. The vibrator shall be kept in a vertical position as practicable. The use of vibrators to shift or drag concrete after deposition will not be permitted.

Vibrators shall not be laid horizontally or laid over.

12. The vibrator head shall penetrate 6 to 8 inches into the preceding layer and then be withdrawn at a slow rate. The top part of each layer shall be re- vibrated systematically at the latest time the concrete can be made plastic by means of vibration.

13. Concrete shall not be placed until the previous layer has been vibrated.

14. Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, the top 2 feet of walls shall be re-vibrated approximately 1 hour after placement of concrete and while a running vibrator will still sink under its own weight into the concrete and liquefy it momentarily.

G. Protection of cast concrete: Conform to ACI 301.

H. Repair of surface defects: ACI 301.

1. Inspect concrete surfaces and surfaces to be painted immediately upon removal of forms Irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground to secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface.

2. Clean surfaces of tie holes. Tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar.

3. Surfaces to be smoothed shall not be plastered or coated.

4. Patch imperfections as needed or as directed by the Engineer. Repairs in accordance with Section 3.8 shall not be made until the surface has been inspected and repair methods have been approved by the Engineer.

3.5 FINISHING
A. Finishing of formed surfaces: ACI 301:

1. Tops of forms:
a. Strike concrete smooth at tops of forms.
b. Float to texture comparable to formed surfaces.

2. Formed surfaces:

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 23

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Finished formed surfaces shall conform accurately to the shape, alignment, grades, and sections shown on the drawings or prescribed by the Engineer.
b. Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, honeycombing, or roughness of any kind and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface.
c. Permanently exposed surfaces: ACI 301 - "Smooth Form Finish" with the fins ground smooth and air holes shall be filled with a non-shrink mortar. The color of the patch material shall match the color of the surrounding concrete. Surfaces in unfinished areas unexposed to public view: ACI 301- "Rough Form Finish".

B. Slabs: Minimum slab surface tolerance must satisfy ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R as measured in accordance with ASTM E1155.

1. Slabs-on-grade:
a. For exposed slabs, install semi-rigid epoxy sealant in construction and contraction joints after slab has a minimum of 60 days or otherwise approved by the Engineer.
b. Separate slabs-on-grade from vertical surfaces with 1/2-inch-thick joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface.
c. Allowable tolerance for slab on grade surfaces, measured in accordance with ACI 117 and ASTM E1155, shall meet or exceed an overall value of FF35/Fl25, with minimum local value of FF24/FL17.

2. Concrete Finishes:
a. The following will not be permitted on slab or floor finishes:
1) Dusting dry cement or sand on the surface to absorb excess moisture.
2) Use of a mortar finishing coat.
3) Excessive troweling or manipulation that brings water or a large amount of fines to the surface.
4) Use of a Fresno.
5) Addition of water to the surface during the finishing operation. 6) Use of the floor during construction in a manner that leads to marring or staining the finish.
b. Surface preparation
1) The concrete shall be brought up evenly to slightly above finished grade and shall be thoroughly compacted and
consolidated. The top shall be struck off to accurately established grade strips or grade blocks. Complete screeding before any excess moisture or bleed water is present on the surface.
2) After bull floating, defer additional finishing operations until the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to sustain foot traffic pressure with an indentation of not more than ¼ inch.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 24

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. Exposed concrete slabs shall be sealed or sealed and hardened using a liquid compound compatible with the curing method used as described in 3.7 Curing, Protection, Liquid Hardeners and Sealers of this Section.
d. Exterior Concrete Finishes: Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, floors and walkways shall be sloped a minimum 0.125 inch per foot to drain water. A light steel trowel with medium broom finish unless otherwise noted on the plans. Apply exterior sealer to surfaces exposed to deicer chemicals that is compatible with the curing method used.

3.6 CURING, PROTECTION, LIQUID HARDENERS AND SEALERS
A. Temperature, Wind, and Humidity

1. When concrete slabs and other unformed concrete is placed in warm, dry, dusty, or windy conditions, concrete surfaces shall be protected from rapid drying by use of windbreaks, shading, fogging with professionally designed nozzles, or a combination of these measures. Hot weather concreting procedures provided in ACI 305R shall be used when ambient conditions dictate.

2. Cold weather concrete procedures provided in ACI 306R shall be used when ambient conditions dictate.

3. Changes in air temperature immediately adjacent to the concrete during and immediately following the 7-day initial curing period shall be kept as uniform as possible and shall not exceed 5 deg. F in any 1 hour or 50 deg. F. in any 24-hour time period.

B. Curing Compound

1. All curing methods shall be placed immediately after final finishing (i.e., within two hours). Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that experience shows the most important time of curing is from three to four hours after placing and extending five to six hours thereafter. It is extremely important, therefore, to prevent loss of moisture, particularly during this period when concrete is especially vulnerable to plastic shrinkage cracks.

All exposed surfaces of concrete including floor slabs, whether or not they receive a finish flooring, shall be protected from premature drying for a minimum of seven days.

2. Apply the specified curing compound in strict accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Curing compound shall not be diluted by the addition of solvents or thinners, nor shall it be altered in any other manner. Curing compound that has become chilled and is too viscous for satisfactory application shall be heated by steam or hot water bath until it has proper fluidity. The temperature of the compound shall not exceed 100 ºF. Curing compound shall not be heated by direct exposure of the container to fire.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 25

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. When used on an unformed concrete surface, application of the first coat of curing compound shall commence immediately after finishing operations have been completed. When curing compound is used on a formed concrete surface, the surface shall first be moistened with a fine spray of water immediately after the forms have been removed. The spray shall be continued until the surface does not readily absorb further water. As soon as the surface film of water has disappeared and the surface is almost dry, the first coat of curing compound shall be applied. In the event that application is delayed on either formed or unformed surfaces, the surface shall be kept continuously moist until the compound has been applied or the specified period of water curing has elapsed.

4. Surfaces shall be sprayed uniformly with 2 coats of curing compound. Each coat shall provide a minimum coverage of 1 gallon per 250 square feet of surface. As soon as the first coat has become dry, a second coat shall be applied in the same manner. The direction of application of the second coat shall be perpendicular to the first coat. The curing compound shall be sprayed using approved pneumatic or pump driven equipment having the following characteristics:
a. Separate lines to the nozzle for material and for compressed air b. A filtering system for the removal or entrapment of contaminants c. A constant application pressures

5. Curing compound shall not be used on any concrete surface specified to receive additional concrete, coatings, grout, and chemical treatment C. Protection

1. Freshly placed concrete shall be protected against wash by rain.

2. Dust control shall be provided in the surrounding areas during placement.

If, in the opinion of the Engineer, these conditions are not satisfactory met, concrete shall not be placed.

3. During the first 2-day period of curing, no traffic on or loading of the floors will be permitted.

4. The contractor shall allow no traffic and take precautions to avoid damage to the membrane of the curing compound for a period of not less than 28 days. Damage shall be repaired immediately to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

5. Special care shall be taken to prevent avoid damaging the surfaces and joints due to load stresses from construction equipment, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. During construction activities, concrete shall be protected against damage with plywood or other approved materials until final acceptance by the Engineer.

6. Precautions shall be taken to prevent overloading floors, pavements, slabs, beams, and other members. The Contractor shall comply with the Engineer’s instructions regarding the loads that will be permitted on these members during construction.

7. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way to overstress the concrete.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 26

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.7 PATCHING AND REPAIR
A. Concrete will be considered by the Engineer as not conforming to the intent of the drawings and specifications for the following reasons:

1. Concrete is not formed as shown on the drawings.

2. Concrete is not in true alignment or level.

3. Concrete which exhibits a defective surface.

4. Concrete with defects that reduce the structural integrity of a member or members.

5. Concrete jointed slabs with uncontrolled random cracking.

B. Non-conforming concrete to required thickness, lines, details, and elevations will be rejected by the Engineer and shall be modified or replaced with concrete that conforms to the contract requirements without a claim by the Contractor for additional cost or extension of contract time.

C. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of City Engineer for each individual area. Should the City Engineer grant permission for the Contractor to attempt restoration of a defective area by patching or other repair methods, such permission shall not be considered a waiver of the Engineer’s right to require complete removal of the defective area if, in the Engineer’s opinion, the restoration does not provide the structural or aesthetic integrity of the member or members.

D. All repairs of defective areas shall conform to ACI 301. On areas requiring treatment of defects and until such repairs have been completed, only water cure will be permitted
E. At any time prior to final acceptance, concrete found to be defective, damaged, or not in accordance with the specifications shall be repaired or removed and replaced with acceptable concrete.

F. If approved by the Engineer, repair or replace concrete with excessive honeycombing due to improper placement.

1. Honeycombed areas shall be removed down to solid concrete a minimum of 1 inch over the entire area. Feathered edges will not be permitted. If chipping is necessary, the edges shall be perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut.

2. Laitance and soft material shall be removed prior to patching with a pea gravel concrete mix and bonding agent approved by the Engineer.

3. The area to be patched and an area at least 6 inches wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching materials.

4. If a cement slurry bonding grout is approved, the heavy-cream consistency grout shall then be rigorously brushed into the surface. The concrete patch material shall be installed prior to the bonding grout skimming over or drying.

5. If approved, a bonding admixture, bonding compound, or epoxy adhesive may be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s preparation and application recommendations. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 503.2 for SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 27

BLDG RENOVATIONS
standard specifications for bonding plastic concrete to hardened concrete with a multiple component epoxy adhesive.

6. The repair concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated in place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. The concrete shall be left undisturbed for at least 1 hour to permit initial shrinkage then finished.

7. The patched area shall be kept damp for 7 days.

8. The color of the patch material shall match the color of the surrounding concrete. Repairs shall be made promptly while the base concrete is less than 28 days old

9. Metal tools shall not be used in finishing a patch in a formed wall that will be exposed.

G. Areas requiring patching shall not exceed 2 sq. ft. per 1000 sq. ft. of surface area and shall be widely dispersed. Areas showing excessive defects as determined by the Engineer shall be removed and replaced.

H. High spots identified in the floor flatness and levelness survey may be removed with bump grinding. Areas to be ground shall not exceed more than 10 percent of any one slab nor more than 5 percent of the total slab-on-grade area. There are no limitations for exterior concrete pavement areas requiring grinding.

I. If approved by the Engineer, concrete slab random cracking may be routed and sealed. The number of interior/exterior slabs to be routed and sealed shall not exceed more than 20 feet of any one slab nor more than 5 percent of the total number of slab-on-grade/pavement slabs. Slabs with more than one structural crack or with multiple cracks within a slab shall be removed and replaced. If random cracks are attributed to non-working sawcut control joints, uncracked joints parallel to the cracking shall be filled with a structural epoxy.

J. Interior slab-on-grade subjected to lift truck traffic shall be routed and sealed with a semi-rigid epoxy sealant. Exterior slabs may be routed and sealed with the flexible joint sealant to be installed in pavement joints.

K. Completed concrete work which fails to meet one or more requirements, and which cannot be brought into compliance may be accepted or rejected by the City Engineer. In this event, modifications may be required to assure that remaining work complies with the requirements.

L. The costs of any additional tests or analysis, including additional architectural and engineering services, performed to prove the adequacy of the concrete work, shall be borne by the Contractor without extension of contract time.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Quality Requirements: Field testing and inspection.

B. Requirements:

1. Provide and maintain an adequate program of quality control for the materials, production methods, and workmanship to assure conformance of all work to the project contract documents. ACI 121R outlines the essential elements of the Material Control portion of the QA program.

SECTION 03 3000

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3000 - 28

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. All materials, equipment, and methods shall be subject to verification inspections and/or testing as specified herein; ACI 121R.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1: GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The General Provisions shall apply to all miscellaneous concrete work operations. Provide labor, materials, tools, transportation, equipment, and incidentals necessary to perform work as indicated on the Plans and as herein specified.

B. Related Sections.

Section 03 1000 - Concrete Formwork
Section 12 9300 - Site Furnishings and Miscellaneous Materials Section 32 8400 - Irrigation
C. The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, “Greenbook,” 2021 edition, is referenced as if herein contained and the Contractor shall keep a copy at the project site. These Specifications shall supersede conflicts with information given in the “Greenbook,” unless otherwise determined by the Engineer.

D. References
Refer to Geotechnical Investigation Document(s)
Refer to American Concrete Institute
Refer to State of California Department of Transportation (Cal Trans) Standard Specifications (DTSS)
Refer to applicable ASTM Specifications
E. Definitions.

1. City: City of Carson

2. Engineer: City Engineer, or the City Engineer’s designated representative.

3. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with all applicable local, state, and federal requirements regarding materials, methods of work, and disposal of excess and waste materials.

B. Manufacturer’s directions, specifications and detailed drawings will be followed in all cases where articles used furnish directions covering points not delineated on the Plans or Specifications.

SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. The work included in this section will be done to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The decision by the Engineer as to the true construction meaning of the Plans and Specifications will be final.

D. Material quality standards and testing procedures shall be in accordance with all ASTM standards and testing procedures and shall be the latest requirements.

1. All tests shall be made by a testing laboratory acceptable and approved by the Engineer.

2. One mechanical analysis and one decantation test shall be made of the sand and coarse aggregate proposed for the work.

3. Concrete specimens shall be taken when directed by the Engineer.

At least one pair of specimens shall be taken from each pour of concrete or from each one-hundred cubic yards of concrete or major fraction thereof. One cylinder from each pair shall be tested at seven (7) days. One from each pair shall be tested at twenty- eight (28) days. Concrete for specimens shall be taken from place of deposit. Specimens shall be prepared and tested in accordance with the latest ASTM specifications.

4. Additional tests shall be made when and as directed by the Engineer. Cost of additional tests shall be borne by Contractor.

5. Should concrete strengths do not attain the minimum specified at twenty-eight (28) days, the area of substandard work shall be examined by the Engineer. The defective concrete shall be removed between expansion joint and replaced or the work shall be strengthened in a manner as directed by the Engineer.

6. The cost of all examination and testing of defective material, as well as corrective measures, shall be borne by the Contractor.

E. Reinforcing Steel: All steel shall be Grade 60 billet steel conforming to ASTM A-615.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for concrete slabs showing dimensioned locations and types of construction and expansion joints.

SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Samples: Prepare minimum 4-foot square samples of each required slab finish excluding only monolithic trowel and float finishes. Include a transverse expansion joint, scoring, and edging.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work to existing site improvements and utilities and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the site and be thoroughly familiar with all details of the work and working conditions and verify all dimensions in the field. Protect all existing improvements to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction.

Repair at its sole cost, all damages resulting from its operations or negligence.

PART 2: PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Concrete flatwork and headers shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 2,500 psi.

B. Concrete walls have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 3,000 psi.

C. Portland Cement shall be Type V, low alkali, and shall conform to ASTM C150.

D. Concrete aggregate shall conform to ASTM C33. All aggregate shall be well graded and selected from a source that has a proven history of non-reactivity.

Maximum aggregate size shall be 3/4 inch.

E. Fine aggregate shall consist of washed natural sand having hard, strong, and durable particles and which does not contain more than 2% by weight of clay, loam, shale, alkali, organic matter, or other deleterious substances.

F. Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, fine grained, sound crushed rock or gravel, which does not contain more than 5% by weight of flat, chip- like, thin, elongated, friable or laminated pieces. Any piece having a major dimension in excess of two and one-half (2 1/2) times the average thickness and which will adversely affect the strength of the concrete shall not be used.

G. Water shall be clean and free from deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, and organic materials.

SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
H. Each component of the concrete mix shall be supplied from the same source for the entire project.

2.2 PROPORTIONS AND MIXING
A. The concrete shall be composed of cement, sand and coarse aggregate in the proportions as determined by the testing laboratory. Cost of mix design shall be borne by Contractor.

B. Slump: Adjust quantity of water so concrete at time of placing does not exceed the following slumps when tested according to ASTM C143. Use the minimum water necessary for workability required by part of structure being cast.

Part of Structure Maximum
Slump Inches
Maximum Water-
Cement Ratio
Footings, foundation walls, and
mass concrete, not reinforced
4 0.6
Slabs on grade, reinforced and
non-reinforced
3 0.45
Reinforced concrete over 8” thick 4 0.5
Reinforced concrete 8” or less
thick
4-1/2 0.5
All other concrete 4 0.5
C. The concrete shall be mixed as follows:

1. Each transit mixer shall be equipped with automatic devices for recording the number of revolutions of the drum prior to completing the mixing, with peripheral drum speed of approximately 200 feet per minute.

2. Transit-mix concrete shall be mixed for a period of not less than ten (10) minutes. At least three (3) minutes of the mixing period shall be immediately prior to discharging at the job.

3. Transit-mix concrete shall not be delivered to the work with the total specified amount of water incorporated therein. Two (2) gallons of water per cubic yard shall be withheld, and may be incorporated in the mix, before the concrete is discharged from the mixer truck.

4. The concrete, at time of placing, shall be in such condition that it can be properly placed.

SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3: EXECUTION

3.1 PLACING CONCRETE
A. Before the placing of any concrete, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned and wet. Concrete shall be poured into forms immediately after it is mixed, and so that no separation will occur. No concrete which has stood for more than fifteen (15) minutes after leaving the mixer shall be used.

Concrete shall be rejected if not placed in final position within ninety (90) minutes after water is first added to the batch.

B. Maximum free drop of concrete shall not be more than 5’-0”. Use tremies in deep sections.

C. The location of all stoppages shall be approved by the Engineer.

D. The flow surface of the freshly poured concrete shall be level whenever any pour is stopped, and tight dams shall be built as necessary to accomplish this result. Construction joints shall be made only when unavoidable, and then only at the point determined by the Engineer.

Details of such joints shall be directed by the Engineer.

E. Before the placing of any concrete, the surface of the previously poured concrete shall be wet.

F. Install concrete and cement finish work true to lines, dimensions, levels, and finish with smooth unblemished surfaces for exterior finishes specified on Plans.

G. Remove and replace defective concrete or cement work with new materials. Permission to patch any defective area shall not be a waiver of the right of the City to require complete removal of defective work if patching does not restore quality and appearance of work.

H. No advertising impression, stamp, or mark of any description will be permitted on surface of concrete or cement finish.

3.2 CEMENT FINISH
A. Compact and tamp concrete as specified to bring 3/8” of mortar to surface, wood float to straight edges and screeds, and apply following finishes. Do not use steel or plastic floats of any kind for initial floating operations.

Unless otherwise specified, do not apply finishes until surface water SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
disappears and surface is sufficiently hardened. Remove any bleed water and laitance as it appears.

B. The color for concrete paving shall be as shown on the plans.

3.3 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINTS
A. Expansion joint material shall be as noted on the Plans.

B. Locate expansion and control joints to least impair the strength and appearance of the structure. In no case place an intersecting construction joint in such a way that two intersecting walks are separated by a construction or control joint at the point of intersection. Transition curves shall be part of a continuous pour of the intersection slab.

1. Expansion joints shall be a maximum of twenty feet (20’) apart, with control joints a maximum of ten feet (10’) apart. Exception to this are specialty work joints which will be laid out as shown on the Plans.

2. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer’s approval of layout showing proposed location of joints before pouring concrete.

C. Caulking of expansion joints where called for on the Plans shall be done with a non-tracking, multi-part flow type, self-leveling, polyurethane sealant manufactured by Chem-Seat, Grace, 3-H, or approved equivalent.

1. Color shall match the color of the concrete where the expansion joint occurs unless shown otherwise on the plans.

2. Caulking shall be done by an experienced applicator in a workmanlike manner, in smooth straight runs, after thoroughly cleaning and priming joints.

3. All work shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer’s printed recommendations. Do not permit traffic to travel over seated joints until sealer is fully cured.

4. A light dusting of fine sand will be required over wet sealer.

Contractor to discuss option with City Engineer.

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Smoothness tolerance exterior cement finish surfaces shall be of such smoothness and evenness that they shall contact the entire length of a 10’ SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
straight edge laid in any direction, with an allowable tolerance of 1/8 inch.

Any operations necessary to achieve this result shall be performed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the City.

B. Inspections will be provided, as necessary. Call for inspection two (2) working days prior to need.

C. The Contractor shall call for inspection during specific phases of construction. They shall include:

1. All form work prior to pouring.

2. All footings prior to pouring.

3. Subgrade prior to pouring.

4. Drag form approval.

D. Contractor shall notify the Engineer twenty-four (24) hours prior to pouring any concrete.

E. Any work covered prior to inspection shall be opened to view by the Contractor at his expense.

3.5 TESTING
A. Compression tests of concrete shall be made as required by the Building Code except that compression tests of any grade of concrete shall be made whenever the quantity of that grade used in the project exceeds 25 cubic yards. At least two identical cylinders of each grade of concrete shall be taken of each 100 cubic yards of concrete or fraction thereof placed in the work. The cylinders shall be tested in a testing laboratory and test reports submitted to the City.

B. Storage of test cylinders on the site and after delivery to the testing shall be in accordance with ASTM Designation C31.

1. Should the strength by test fail, the mix shall be adjusted so that the resulting concrete shall comply with the minimum requirements, and all additional expense resulting from such adjustment shall be borne by the Contractor.

2. Should the strength of any grade by test fall below minimum, concrete from the defective pours which is in place may be tested by the core method. If such tests show the concrete to be defective, SECTION 03 3053

MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE
MILLS PARK 03 3053 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
the concrete shall be removed and replaced or adequately strengthened as required under the governing Code. All expenses involved shall be borne by the Contractor.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 05 5000R1

METAL FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 05 5000R1 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL`

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Aluminum wire mesh security panels.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data:
a. Submit complete descriptive data for all stock items.

2. Shop Drawings:
a. Prepare Shop Drawings under seal of professional structural engineer registered in California for products requiring structural engineering. b. Include profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories, erection drawings, elevations, welded connections using standard AWS welding symbol with net weld lengths.
c. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication when possible. Allow for trimming and fitting whenever taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay construction.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Anodized clear aluminum wire mesh screen, square, Aluminum, Allow 1350-H19, Woven – Intercripm Weave, I3I3 Crimp Style, 1”x1” opening (Square), 0.120 thick (11 Gauge) wire diameter, 80% open area.

SECTION 05 5000R1

METAL FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 05 5000R1 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Anodized clear aluminum U channels & Aluminum L bracket shapes 13 Gauge and shall conform to ASTM A36.

C. Anchors

1. Aluminum expansion anchor bolt, threaded Type Concrete Inserts.

D. Fasteners

1. Aluminum Bolts, Nuts and Washers for Interior Locations: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular hexagon head.

2. Bolts, Round Head: ANSI B-18.5

3. Wood Screws, Flat Head Aluminum: ANSI B-18.6.1.

4. Plain Washers, Helical Spring Type Aluminum: FS FF-W-84.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate according to approved shop drawings.

B. Pre-assemble products in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Clearly mark units for re-assemble and installation.

C. For exposed to view fabrications, use materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seams marks, roller marks, roller trade names and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes including zinc coating.

D. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured.

E. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to Project site.

F. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of structure, except where specifically noted otherwise.

G. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush and hairline.

H. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes Manual” for recommendations relative to application and designations of finishes.

SECTION 05 5000R1

METAL FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 05 5000R1 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.4 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

1. Anodized Aluminum.

2.5 PRODUCTS
A. Direct metals, 800-711-4939
B. Edward J. Darby & Son Inc., darbywiremesh.com, 877-996-1281 C. McNichols Co., mcnichols.com, 855-464-8486
D. Or Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place SECTION 05 5000R1

METAL FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 05 5000R1 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.

B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete masonry or similar construction.

D. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections.

3.4 INSTALLATION - SECURITY GRILLES
A. Securely fasten to structure OR door/window openings as detailed with tamper- proof fasteners.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Wood Framing.

2. Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items.

3. Sheathing material.

4. Wood treatment.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Lumber Standards Committee (ALSC):

1. Softwood Lumber Standards.

B. American Plywood Association (APA):

1. Grades and Standards.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength.

2. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

D. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA):

1. AWPA - C1 - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process.

2. AWPA - C15 - Wood for Commercial-Residential Construction Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes.

3. AWPA - C20 - Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.

4. AWPA - C27 - Plywood - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes.

5. AWPA - P5 - Waterborne Preservatives.

E. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL):

1. UL FR S - Fire Rated Treated Wood with Flame Spread and Smoke Developed Ratings of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. UL 723 - Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Certificates:
1) Pressure Treated Wood: Certification from treating plant stating chemicals and process used and net amount of preservative retained are in conformance with specified standards.
2) Preservative Treated Wood: Certification for water-borne preservative that moisture content was reduced to 19 percent maximum, after treatment.
3) Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Certification from treating plant stating that fire-retardant treatment materials comply with governing code, ordinances and requirements of local authority having jurisdiction, and treatment will not bleed through finished surfaces.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies:

1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC.

2. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire-retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/smoke ratings.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

1. Inspect wood materials for conformance to specified grades, species, and treatment at time of delivery to Project Site.

2. Reject and return unsatisfactory wood materials.

B. Provide facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces.

C. Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground minimum 12 inches or, if on concrete slab-on-grade, minimum 1-1/2 inches, fully protected from weather.

Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.

D. For materials pressure treated with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Environmental Impact:

1. Formaldehyde: Products containing urea-formaldehyde will not be permitted.

2. Wood pressure treatment products: Products containing chromium will not be permitted. Products containing arsenic will not be permitted.

3. Use exterior plywood only. Interior plywood is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS
A. Lumber finished 4 sides, 15 percent maximum moisture content. Each piece of lumber to be factory marked with type, grade, mill and grading agency.

1. Light framing: Construction grade Douglas fir or southern pine, appearance grade where exposed.

2. Structural framing and timbers: No. 2 grade Douglas Fir, Southern Pine, or Spruce, appearance grade where exposed.

3. Boards: Construction grade.

2.2 NAILERS, BLOCKING, FURRING AND SLEEPERS
A. Wood for nailers, blocking, furring and sleepers: Construction grade, finished 4 sides, 15 percent maximum moisture content. Pressure preservative treat items in contact with roofing, flashing, waterproofing, masonry, concrete or the ground.

2.3 BUILDING PAPER
A. Asphalt saturated felt, non-perforated.

2.4 FASTENERS
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturers with recommended power tools for each type of fastener.

1. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lag Screws, and Wood Screws: ASTM A307, Medium carbon steel; size and type to suit application; galvanized for treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations, of size and type to suit application, unless otherwise noted.

2. Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and concrete.

3. Powder or Pneumatically Activated Fasteners: For anchorage of non- structural items to steel.

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood (over 1/2 inch) to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck (up to 1/8 inch thick):
a. Hilti PWH #3 with wings.
b. ITW TEKS/4 with wings.
c. Or approved equal.

5. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood (up to 2 inches thick) to Metal (from 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch thick):
a. Hilti PFH #4 with wings.
b. ITW TEKS/4 with wings.
c. Or approved equal.

6. Fasteners for Non-Structural Wood Members to Masonry: 1/4-inch diameter x 3-1/4 inch with Phillip flat head.
a. Tapcon masonry anchors, by ITW Buildex.
b. Kwik-Con II fastener, by Hilti.
c. Or approved equal

7. Fasteners for preservative treated lumber must be hot dipped galvanized, type 304 or 316 stainless steel, or zinc-polymer coated.

2.5 WOOD TREATMENT
A. Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber, Alkaline Copper Quat (ACQ): Type B, Ammoniacal Copper Quat or Type D, Amine Copper Quat.

1. Manufacturers:
a. Chemical Specialties, Incorporated,
b. Arch Wood Protection, Inc.,
c. Osmose Inc.,
d. Or approved equal.

2. Products:
a. CSI: “Preserve.”
b. Arch Wood: “Natural Select.”
c. Osmose: “Nature Wood.”
d. Or approved equal.

3. Impregnate lumber with preservative treatment conforming to AWPA Standard C1 and P5. Apply the preservative in a closed cylinder by pressure process in accordance with AWPA Standard C15.

4. Retention of preservative:
a. Moderate service conditions (weather exposure): 0.25 pounds per cubic foot (oxide basis).
b. Severe conditions (constant contact with ground or water): 0.40 pounds per cubic foot (oxide basis).

5. Remove excess moisture where shrinkage is a serious fault or where treated lumber will be in contact with plaster, or stucco, and where water- borne treated lumber is to be painted or stained.

6. Lumber shall be dried to 15 to 19 percent moisture content after treatment, and material to be painted or stained shall have knots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood.

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

7. Liberally brush freshly cut surfaces, bolt holes and machined areas with the same preservative in accordance with AWPA Standard M4.

8. Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U. S.

Environmental Protection Agency.

B. Wood Requiring Treatment:

1. Lumber, Preservative Treated: Nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other construction. Sills, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify that spacing, direction and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, backing, stripping, furring, and nailing strips.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 INSTALLATION - FRAMING
A. Set structural members level and plumb, in correct position.

B. Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Place horizontal members, crown side up.

D. Construct load bearing framing and curb members full length without splices.

SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Double members at openings as indicated on Drawings. Space short studs over and under opening to stud spacing.

F. Construct double joist headers at ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to roof trusses. Frame rigidly into roof trusses.

G. Place full width continuous sill flashings under framed walls on cementitious foundations. Lap flashing joint 4 inches.

H. Place sill gasket directly on sill flashing. Puncture gasket clean and fit tight to protruding foundation anchor bolts.

I. Coordinate installation of wood decking and prefabricated wood trusses.

J. Installed miscellaneous blocking, nailing strips, and framing where required as backing for attachment of wall mounted fixtures, cabinetwork, and other items, and as detailed on Drawings. Coordinate to allow proper attachment of work of other Sections.

1. Secure in place using fasteners specified. Use only recommended power tools for placement of fasteners.

2. Recess heads of fasteners below surface of wood members.

K. Secure in place with appropriate fasteners. Use fasteners of correct size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or require finishing. Do not split wood with fasteners; set panel products to allow expansion at joints.

L. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest lengths.

3.3 INSTALLATION - PLYWOOD
A. Secure wall sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered.

B. Install plywood in combination single and two spans continuous.

3.4 INSTALLATION - AIR INFILTRATION SEAL
A. Place material horizontally over wall sheathing, minimum 2-inch (5 cm) overlap and 6-inch (15 cm) end lap; weather lap edges and ends; fasten to sheathing with corrosion resistant fasteners.

3.5 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS
SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.

B. Brush applies two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials and roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site-sawn cuts.

C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION
A. Site Tolerances:

1. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum.

3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection.

B. Framing Inspection:

1. Inspect wood framing installation and connections at completion of each phase of wood construction for correct installation, nailing, connections, and fasteners.

2. Inspect and verify that types and spacing of fasteners are installed in locations specified or indicated on Drawings.

3. Inspect types, locations, and fasteners for structural metal framing connectors.

4. Inspect types, locations, and connections of hold-down anchors.

3.8 SCHEDULE - NAILING

CONNECTION NAILING
Joist to sill or girder, toenail 3 - 8d
Bridging to joist, toenail each end 2 - 8d
Bottom Plate to joist or blocking, face nail 16d at 16 inches o.c.

Top plate to stud, end nail 2-16d
Stud to bottom plate 4-8d, toenail or
2-16d, end nail
Double studs, face nail 16d at 24 inches o.c.

Double top plates, face nail 16d at 16 inches o.c.

Top plates, laps and intersections, face nail 2 - 16d
Continuous header, two pieces 16d at 16 inches o.c.
along each edge
Ceiling joists to plate, toenail 3 - 8d
Continuous header to stud, toenail 4 - 8d
SECTION 06 1000

ROUGH CARPENTRY
MILLS PARK 06 1000 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Ceiling joists, laps over partitions, face nail 3 - 16d Ceil
ing joists to parallel rafters, face nail 3 - 16d
Rafter to plate, toenail 3 - 16d
Built-up corner studs 16d at 24 inches o.c.

Built-up beams 20d at 32 inches o.c. at
top and bottom staggered
2 - 20d at ends and at each splice
Payment for items of work covered under Division 6 of the plans and these specifications shall be based on the lump sum bid pricing identified in the Bid Schedule.

No additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 06 1516

WOOD ROOF DECK REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 06 1516 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Wood deck repair and replacement associated with roof replacement.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements
C. Section 02 4100 – Roof Removal and Substrate Preparation D. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.3 UNIT PRICES
A. Provide unit prices for the work described in Articles 3.2 and 3.3.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. Reference standards of the following sources are applicable to products and procedures specified in Part 2 - Products and Part 3 – Execution of this Section:

1. American Wood Preservers Association (AWPA)

2. American Wood Preservers Institute (AWPI)

3. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

4. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA)

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the start of work, submit the following to the Owner for approval:

1. Product submittals required within Section 01 3300.

B. Refer to Section 01 3300 for procedural requirements related to the submittal process.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES
A. Applicator Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer’s product and that is eligible to receive a manufacturer’s warranty. Company shall SECTION 06 1516

WOOD ROOF DECK REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 06 1516 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
have a minimum of 5 years documented experience certified by roofing system manufacturer.

C. Examine the technical specifications and drawings. Verify all dimensions, detail conditions, roof plan notes and existing site conditions that may affect the work. Verification of existing dimensions and site conditions is the responsibility of the Contractor. No additional compensation will be considered for failure to verify existing dimensions, detail conditions, roof plan note callouts, and existing site conditions.

D. Upon examination, if conflicts between the technical specifications and drawings, and those of federal, state or local regulatory agencies, the product manufacturer, industry roofing standards, or Owner-mandated requirements are discovered, notify the Owner immediately for resolution.

E. During work, if conditions are discovered which do not allow for continuation of the work per the technical specifications and drawings, notify the Owner immediately for resolution.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Refer to Section 01 6000 for transport, handling, storage and product requirements.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.

C. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure. Store roll materials standing on end.

D. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on previously completed roofing.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not perform wood deck repair/replacement work during inclement weather. Refer to product manufacturer for outdoor temperature requirements for installation of materials. Do not install materials at times when the outdoor temperature does not fall within the minimum/maximum temperature requirements of the manufacturer.

SECTION 06 1516

WOOD ROOF DECK REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 06 1516 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all specified products shall remain on site for the duration of this project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD DECK REPAIR/REPLACEMENT MATERIALS
A. For use at “Wood Deck Inspection/Repair” outlined in Article 3.2:

1. Steel plate: 16-gauge galvanized with pre-drilled holes for fasteners and plates.

2. For securing wood to wood and wood to steel: No. 14 fluorocarbon-coated screws; length as necessary to penetrate minimum 1-inch depth through the deck.

3. For securing wood to underlying structural steel (1/2-inch thick max.): 12-24 x 1-1/4 inch Hex Washer Head, Teks 5, or approved equal.

B. For use at “Wood Deck Inspection/Replacement” outlined in Article 3.3:

1. Replacement wood plank:
a. Wood plank dimensions and type: As required by conditions encountered; Type, grade and species to match dimensions and type of existing wood plank deck.

2. Replacement plywood:
a. Plywood dimensions and type: As required by conditions encountered; Type,
grade and species to match dimensions and type of existing wood plank deck.

3. Fasteners:
a. For securing wood to wood and wood to steel: No. 14
fluorocarbon-coated screws; length as necessary to
penetrate minimum 1-inch depth through the deck.
b. For securing wood to underlying structural steel (1/2-inch thick max.): 12-24 x 1-1/4 inch Hex Washer Head, Teks 5, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL
A. Refer to Section 02 4100 for general work and substrate preparation requirements.

3.2 WOOD DECK INSPECTION AND REPAIR (Unit Price Work)
A. Repair at openings caused by obsolete roof penetration removal or other SECTION 06 1516

WOOD ROOF DECK REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 06 1516 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
defects less than 12” by 12” in size:

1. At locations encountered and other locations indicated by the Owner, cover the existing opening with 16-gauge steel plate stock.

Lap the plate a minimum of 8-inches beyond the opening on all sides. Fasten the steel plate with specified fasteners and plates 6- inches on center. Secure the plate a minimum of 2-inches in from the outside edge of the repair plate.

3.3 WOOD DECK INSPECTION AND REPLACEMENT (Unit Price Work) A. Inspect deck for structurally unsound or otherwise defective areas and for fastening deficiencies. Perform treatments as indicated:

1. Remove defective decking and repair resultant openings:
a. Install replacement decking with the long dimension across the supports. Leave a 1/8-inch gap at all edges and end joints. Install shims as necessary between the replacement decking and the structural members to ensure that the
replacement decking is flush with adjacent decking.
b. Mechanically attach the new wood decking to the underlying supports using the specified fasteners.

2. Install additional fasteners where the existing fasteners missed the underlying supports or where the number of fasteners installed does not meet minimum code requirements.

3. Remove loose or protruding nails or hammer them down flush with the deck surface.

B. Sweep deck clean before installing new materials.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:

1. Plastic-laminated cabinets.

2. Plastic-laminate lockers and storage assemblies.

3. Solid-surfacing-material countertops and splashes.

4. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.

5. Plastic-laminate paneling system.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Division 1 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Woodworking Institute (AWI)
B. Woodwork Institute of California (WIC)

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with WIC custom quality.

1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For panel products, high pressure decorative laminate, adhesive for bonding plastic laminate, solid surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. Drawings shall show each type of cabinet, with sufficient details to clearly indicate all features of construction and attachment to structure. Drawings will include, as minimum, the following:

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Show indication of material and grades.

2. Scaled plans or plan section of each item, showing location and layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, windows, and other building components, fully dimensioned.

3. Scaled elevations of each cabinet type, fully dimensioned.

4. Scaled sections to clarify special conditions, and locations and details or anchorage.

5. Fixed dimensions, with provisions of insertion of field dimensions.

6. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.

7. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers and other items installed in architectural woodwork.

8. Coordinate with other work involved and show on Shop Drawings.

9. Reproduction of Contract Documents to be used as Shop Drawings is not acceptable.

10. Conform to WIC custom grade, WIC Certificate not required.

Provide compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.

11. Keying Schedule: Indicate keying system for cabinet and fixture locks.

C. Samples for Initial Selection:

1. Plastic Laminates.

2. PVC edge material.

3. Thermoset decorative panels.

4. Solid-surfacing materials.

D. Samples for Verifications
SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

2. Plastic Laminate Panel System, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with edge banding on 1 edge.

3. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square.

4. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in “Project Conditions” Article.

1. Cabinets: Cabinets shall be handled carefully and set or stores inside on a level floor. Care shall be taken to protect exposed finished portions from bumping, scratching, etc. Under no circumstances shall cabinets or countertops be used for “work benches” or convenient places to store other materials.

2. Countertops: Countertops shall be stacked flat, at least four inches off the floor, with protective covering under the bottom unit, and covered on top to protect surfaces from scratching. Strips of wood or other suitable materials shall be placed between tops. Care shall be taken to prevent breakage. Under no circumstance’s hall countertops be stood or stacked on end against a wall where they can be broken or damaged by falling.

B. Replacements: in the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the State’s Representative and at no additional cost to the State.

Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork ban be supported and installed as indicated.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Plumbing Fixture Coordination: Coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication of countertops with sinks and lavatories specified in Division 22- “Plumbing.”
PART 2- PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of WI’s quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following:

1. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay, 3/4 inch thick.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates by one of the following:
a. Formica Corporation.
b. Lamin-Art, Inc.
c. Nevamar Company, LLC; Decorative Products Div.
d. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc. e. Or Approved Equal.

D. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ISSFA-2.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
a. Bradley Mills
b. Aconite, Inc.
c. DuPont (Corian).
d. Formica Corporation.
e. Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
f. Or Approved Equal

2. Type: Standard type unless Special Purpose type is indicated.

E. Edge Bands:
3mm PVC banding at exposed edges and 1 mm PVC banding at semi- exposed edge ad case body to be machine applied with waterproof hot melt adhesive.

2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide cabinet heavy duty hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets.

B. Frameless Concealed Hinges: BHMA A156.9, B01602, 107 degrees of opening (90-95 degrees at corners), self-closing and having passed 100,000 cycle tests.

1. Equal to: Blum Modul Hinge series with 170-degree opening.

2. Hinge shall have a lifetime warranty as offered by the hinge manufacturer.

3. Hinges shall be heavy duty wrap-around offset for overlay doors with non-removable pin.

4. Hinge shall not be clipping type.

5. Hinges shall be securely anchored to the cabinet and door. Do not screw hinges into holes drilled for adjustable shelf brackets.

6. Number of hinges per door shall be as follows:
a. Door height 0”-36”: 2 hinges per door
b. Doors greater than 36” high and locker doors: Provide heavy duty piano type or continuous hinges.

C. Provide 4 types of heavy-duty sample of pulls for casework for architect approval.

D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, C03141.

E. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with self-rests, B04081.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal, two-pin type with self-hold- down clip.

G. Drawer Slides heavy duty type: BHA A156.9, B05091, side-mounted; full- extension type, zinc-plated steel ball bearing slides, equal to Accuride #7432, and rated for the following loads:

1. File Drawer Slides: Grade 1HD-200 (200 lbf); for all drawers.

H. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, molded- plastic grommets, and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “SG series” by Doug Mockett & Company, Inc.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.

Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; CHMA 652 for steel base.

J. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer’s standard finish that complies with product class requirements in BHMA A156.9.

K. Bumpers: Provide rubber bumpers on inside corners of all doors to prevent laminate to laminate contact.

L. Lock Keying: Cabinet lock to be coordinated with Owner for various tiers of security.

2.3 MISELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.

C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.

D. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives and Glues: Use installation adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Wood Glues: 30g/L.

2. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement or Contact cement.

H. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Fabricate woodwork to dimension, profiles and details indicated. Ease edge to radius indicated for the following:

Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members ¾ inch thick: 1/8 inch.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

E. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

F. Shop-cut opening to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

G. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A. Grade: Custom.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. WI Construction Style: Style A, Frameless.

WI Construction Type: Type I, multiple self-supporting units rigidly joined together.

D. WI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay.

E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.

2. Post formed Surfaces: Grade HGP.

3. Vertical Surfaces; Grade VGS.

4. Edges: PVC edge banding, 0.12-inch-thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

F. Materials for Semi exposed Surfaces, including cabinet interior, interior door faces, and surface of shelving:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS, or cabinet liner.
a. Edges of Plastic-laminate shelves: PVC T-mold matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.
b. For semi exposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: See Paragraph 2.4.I.(1).

3. Drawer Bottoms: See Paragraph 2.4.I.(2).

G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High- pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

H. Fabrication: Ends and Divisions: Cabinet ends and divisions shall be a minimum of 0.745” in thickness. The visible top edge of the ends of cabinets 6’-0” or more from the floor do not require an edge band but shall have all voids filled and sanded.

1. Joinery:
a. All cabinet members shall be securely fastened together. b. All joints shall be securely glued.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
c. All exposed and semi-exposed joints shall be tight and true. d. To assemble cabinet bodies and components, the use of finish nails is allowed. They shall be a maximum of 4” on center (except face frames – 8” on center) with a minimum of two (2) fasteners per joint for cabinet body and drawer construction. Staples, screws, and T nails are not permitted for exposed surfaces.
e. For custom and premium grades, at the option of the manufacturer, construction joinery shall be as follows.
1) Dadoes or Lock Joints: plows or rabbets.
2) Doweled Joints: The dowels shall be a minimum of 8mm x 30mm with a minimum of two (2) dowels per joint. The first dowel shall be spaced a maximum of 37mm from each edge or end, and the second dowel shall be a maximum of 32mm on center from the first dowel. Subsequent dowels shall be spaced a maximum of 128mm on center. Al dowel construction shall be glued and clamped. 3) Confirmat Type Screws: Maximum of 37mm from each end with subsequent screw being spaced 28mm on center. Glue is not required with this system.
4) Lamello Type Jointing Plates: The plates shall be a maximum of two (2) inches from each edge or end to the center of the plate.

Subsequent plates shall be spaced a maximum of six (6) inches on center. All joints shall be glued and clamped.
5) Mod-eez Type Fastening Systems: The fasteners shall be a maximum of 16” on center and 4” from any edge or end. They shall be fastened with 10 full thread sheet metal screws for cabinet body construction. Glue is not required with this system.
6) No exposed fastening is permitted, except for access panel. f. Vertical or horizontal divisions shall be dadoed or tenoned into adjoining members.

2. Backs: Backs are required and shall be plywood or tempered and sealed hardboard a minimum of ¼” in thickness. Color to match interior. Backs shall be securely nailed, stapled or dadoed to the case body and intermediate members. Backs shall be rabbeted or dadoed into exposed ends unless a plant-on end is used.

Wood Anchor Strips: Suitable wood anchor strips are required and shall be a minimum of 1/2 “x 2-1/2” in thickness and provided at the top and bottom of the cabinet back.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Tops and Bottoms: Tops and bottoms shall be plywood with a minimum of ¾” in thickness.

4. Bases: Cabinet bases may be constructed with either separate or integral base. Continuous top-set vinyl base with formed interior and exterior corners, or integral sheet vinyl base to match adjacent room base.

I. Drawers

1. Drawer Boxes: Construct subfront sides and back with ½” minimum 7 ply Baltic Birch plywood. All corner joints at sides to subfront and back shall be lock jointed and glued together. Drawer sides, subfront and back shall be plowed to receive bottom, which shall be glued, or glue blocked to form a rigid unit. Hardwood shall have a clear factory finish. Provide drawers with metal slides as specified.

2. Drawer bottoms shall be ¼” thick sound hardwood plywood with cabinet liner on the exposed interior face.

3. Drawer finish fronts shall be ¾” plywood with plastic laminate or wood veneer finish on exposed surface and cabinet liner on interior surface.

Corners shall be eased, and all four edges shall receive 3mm PVC edge with joint on bottom. Secure finish front to drawer box subfront from the inside with #12 particle board screws, 1-1/2” from each side, bottom, and top edge of front and 12” O.C. minimum horizontally for the full drawer width.

J. Doors: Cabinet doors shall be plywood core a minimum of 0.745” in thickness.

The interior faces of cabinet doors including faces shelving shall be 0.030” minimum thickness high pressure thermoplastic cabinet liner. All four edges shall be banded with color to match exterior. Clear distance between doors shall be between 3/32” to 5/32”, width of a nickel. Overlay type, hinged to swing flat against the face of adjoining cabinet or the side of cabinet, with eased corners, and 3mm PVC with joint hidden under hinge. Do not notch door or cabinet ends, or divisions to receive hinge.

1. Provide edge bands per paragraph 2.1.E.

2. Provide door hinges per paragraph 2.2.B.

3. Provide door pulls per paragraph 2.2.C.

4. Provide metal strike plates at all cabinet door lock locations.

5. Provide catches per 2.2.D.

6. Provide bumpers per 2.2.K.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

7. Provide locks per 1.5.B.(11) and 2.2.L.

K. Cabinet Shelves: ¾” thick plywood core for spans up to 35 inches and 1” thick for spans over 35 inches and up to 48 inches, and adjustable to 1-inch centers. Comply with WIC Technical Bulletin adjustable shelf loading/deflection requirement. Do not recess metal shelf standards into the end panels, notch shelving to clear standards. Provide edge bands per Paragraph 2.1.E.

L. Finish for Toe Kick Base: To match new cabinets.

M. Visible Edges: All visible edges, exposed or semi-exposed, or ends, tops, bottoms, shelves, webs, stretchers, divisions or partitions, and top edges of drawer sides and backs, top of splash, shall be banded with one of materials listed in Paragraph 2.1.E. Only the front edges of adjustable shelves are required to be banded.

N. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements.

1. Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by manufacturer’s designations.

2. As selected by Architect from laminate manufacturer’s full range in the following categories:
a. Solid colors, matte finish.
b. Solid colors with core same color as surface, matte finish. c. Wood grains, matte finish.
d. Patterns, matte finish.

2.6 SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS AND SPLASHES
A. Grade: Custom.

B. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: ¾ inch.

C. Colors, Patters, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors of solid surfacing material complying with the following requirements:

1. Match color, pattern, and finish as indicated by manufacturer’s designations.

2. As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Fabricate tops in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid- surfacing-material manufacturer’s written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.

1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated.

2. Fabricate tops with loose backsplashes for field application.

E. Seal joint between countertop and splashes and between splashes and walls with sealant as specified in Division 07 “Joint Sealants.” F. Edge treatment: As indicated.

G. Drill holes in countertops for plumbing fittings and soap dispenses in shop.

2.7 SHOP FINISHING
A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.

B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

C. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.

Back priming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require back priming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative panels.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before Installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and back priming.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. GRADE: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish cuts.

E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk, and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

F. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers’ fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

G. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

H. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches O.C. with No.10 wafer-head screw sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips.

I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

J. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smoothly, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

1. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inche sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches O.C. and to walls with adhesive.

K. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section “Joint Sealants.”
SECTION 06 4023

INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
MILLS PARK 06 4023 - 14

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.3 CAULKING
All horizontal and vertical joints up 6” under sink cabinets shall be caulked with a silicone based caulking compound to provide protection in case of plumbing failure.

3.4 ANDJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork.

Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi exposed surfaces. Touch up shop- applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 06 6116

SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 06 6116 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this Section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to complete the solid surfacing fabrications as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Solid surfacing material countertops.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Quality Requirements - Section 01 4000 for Mock-ups.

B. Architectural Woodwork - Section 06 4023.

C. Division 22 Plumbing Section.

1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 256 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastics.

B. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption.

C. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties.

D. ASTM D 696 - Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30 degrees C. And 30 degrees C.

E. ASTM D 785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

F. ASTM D 790 - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Un- reinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

G. ASTM D 785 - Standard Test Method for Rockwell Hardness of Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials.

H. ASTM G 22 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Plastics to Bacteria.

I. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association.

J. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with adjacent work.

B. Samples: Submit three (3) minimum 12” x 12" samples of each type of solid surface specified. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation.

Samples must have outside corner/nosing/edging as shown on drawings and fully finished as if it were the final end-product. Approved samples SECTION 06 6116

SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 06 6116 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
will be retained as a standard for work.

C. Product Data: Indicate product description, fabrication information, a n d compliance with specified performance requirements.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s care and maintenance data, including repair and cleaning instructions. Include in the project closeout documents.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicable Standards: Standards of the following, as referenced herein:

1. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

B. Allowable Tolerances:

1. Variation in Component Size: + 1/8".

2. Location of Openings: + 1/8" from indicated location.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver no components to project site until areas are ready for installation.

Store indoors.

B. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of project.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: The manufacturer shall warrant to the Owner that the manufacturer will, at his option, repair or replace without charge, such product if it fails due to a manufacturing defect during the first 10 years after initial installation. This includes all labor charges needed to repair or replace the product covered hereunder.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL
A. Material: Cast, filled, acrylic; not coated, laminated or of composite construction, meeting ANSI Z124-1980, Type Six, and ISS FA-2.01 "Classification and Standards Publication of Solid Surfacing Material” as published by the International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (ISSFA).

B. Material shall conform to the published performance characteristics of ISSFA-2- 01.

C. Performance Standards

PROPERTY REQUIREMENT TEST PROCEDURE
Tensile Strength 6000 psi ASTM D 638-84
Tensile Modulus 1.5 x 106 psi ASTM D 638-84
Elongation 0.4% min. ASTM D 638-84
Hardness 94 Rockwell "M" scale
SECTION 06 6116

SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 06 6116 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
56 Barcol Impressor
Gloss (60 degree) 5-20 ANSI Z124-1980
HUD Bulletin UM-73-84
Color Stability No change, 200 hours NEMA LD3
Wear and Clean Passes ANSI Z124-1980
HUD Bulletin UM-73-84
Flammability ASTM E 84-84a
Flame Spread 25
Smoke Developed 25
Class I
Water Absorption 24 hrs. Long Term ASTM D 570-81
Weight (% Max.) 0.09 0.80 (1/4")
Izod Impact 0.28 ft.-lbs./in. ASTM D 256-084
Impact Resistance No fracture NEMA LD3
Sheets 1/4" slab-36" drop 1/2 lb. ball
Boiling Water Surface
Resistance No visible change NEMA LD3
Stain Resistance Passes ANSI Z124-1980
HUD Bulletin UM-73-84

D. Counters: Provide 3/4" thick solid surface counters with cut-outs and without cutouts for sinks, and with integral vanity sinks, where indicated on the drawings.

1. Edge treatment: ¼” Beveled

2. Backsplash: Applied.

3. Sidesplash: Applied.

E. Solid Surface Schedule: (Basis of Design)
SS-2
Manufacture: Corian or approved equal by Wilsonart or Formica.

Color: Per approved drawings material schedule.

Thickness: ¾,” see details on approved drawings.

Counters shall be adhesively joined with no exposed seams, having edge details shown on drawings.

G. Finish:

1. Provide a surface with a uniform finish
a. Matte: Gloss range of 5-20.

2.2 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
A. Joint Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard two-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, non-porous joints.

B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard neoprene-based adhesive meeting ANSI A146.1-1967 and UL listed.

C. Sealant: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant, FDA/UL recognized silicone sealant in colors matching components.

2.3 FABRICATION
SECTION 06 6116

SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS
MILLS PARK 06 6116 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Fabricator must be approved by the solid surfacing material manufacturer.

B. Factory fabricates components exactly to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings. Contractor shall verify in the field all installation conditions, prior to fabrication.

C. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive; without conspicuous joints. No joints or seams will be permitted other than those shown on the approved shop drawings, unless specifically approved by the Architect.

D. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and accessories as indicated on the drawings.

E. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. Route radii and contours to template. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.

F. Provide all custom sizes, shapes, curves, configurations, reveals, and edgings as called for and shown on the drawings in the dimension and thicknesses noted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install components plumb and level, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product installation data.

B. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Keep components and hands clean when making joints.

C. All surfaces, other than those surfaces that are the mounting/gluing surfaces, must be fully polished to match the finished face of all components. Unfinished surfaces will be rejected.

D. Final finished surfaces must be fully and evenly polished with manufacturers’ recommended finishing products. Unfinished surfaces will be rejected.

E. Keep components and hands clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains. Keep clean until Date of Substantial Completion.

Replace stained components.

F. Protect surfaces from damage until Date of Substantial Completion. Repair work or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 0150

PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 0150 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Roof tear-off.

2. Temporary roofing membrane.

3. Roof replacement preparation.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP
A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.

1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

B. Existing Membrane Roofing System: Roofing system identified above, including roofing membrane, roof insulation, surfacing, and components and accessories between deck and roofing membrane.

C. Roof Tear-Off: Removal of existing membrane roofing system from deck.

D. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off- site unless indicated to be removed and reinstalled.

E. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not indicated to be removed.

F. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations.

Construction waste includes packaging.

G. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

SECTION 07 0150

PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 0150 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
H. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Temporary Roofing: Include Product Data and description of temporary roofing system. If temporary roof will remain in place, submit surface preparation requirements needed to receive permanent roof, and submit a letter from roofing membrane manufacturer stating acceptance of the temporary membrane and that its inclusion will not adversely affect the roofing system's resistance to fire and wind.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: For Installer
B. Digital Images or Videos: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including exterior and interior finish surfaces, which might be misconstrued as having been damaged by reroofing operations. Submit before Work begins.

C. Schedule of Re-Roofing Preparation Activities: Indicate the following:

1. Detailed sequence of re-roofing preparation work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure occupants' on-site operations are uninterrupted.

2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.

3. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Reroofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with Owner; Architect; roofing system manufacturer's representative; roofing Installer including project manager, superintendent, and foreman; and installers whose work interfaces with or affects reroofing including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing system tear-off and replacement including, but not limited to, the following:

SECTION 07 0150

PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 0150 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Reroofing preparation, including membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
b. Temporary protection requirements for existing roofing system that is to remain during and after installation.
c. Existing roof drains and roof drainage during each stage of reroofing, and roof drain plugging and plug removal requirements.
d. Construction schedule and availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
e. Existing deck removal procedures and Owner notifications. f. Condition and acceptance of existing roof deck and base flashing substrate for reuse.
g. Structural loading limitations of deck during reroofing. h. Base flashings, special roofing details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect reroofing.
i. Existing conditions that may require notification of Architect before proceeding.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Protect building to be reroofed, adjacent buildings, walkways, site improvements, exterior plantings, and landscaping from damage or soiling from reroofing operations.

B. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with reroofing preparation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit Work to proceed without water entering existing roofing system or building.

D. Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INFILL MATERIALS
A. Use infill materials matching existing membrane roofing system materials unless otherwise indicated.

SECTION 07 0150

PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 0150 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.2 TEMPORARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. Design and selection of materials for temporary roofing are responsibilities of Contractor.

2.3 TEMPORARY ROOF DRAINAGE
A. Design and selection of materials for temporary roof drainage are responsibilities of the Contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION, GENERAL
A. Temporary Weather Protection: During removal operations, have sufficient and suitable materials on-site to facilitate rapid installation of temporary protection in the event of unexpected rain.

B. Roof Drain Protection: Maintain roof drains in functioning condition to ensure roof drainage at end of each workday. Prevent debris from entering or blocking roof drains and conductors. Use roof-drain plugs specifically designed for this purpose. Remove roof-drain plugs at end of each workday, when no work is taking place, or when rain is forecast.

1. If roof drains are temporarily blocked or unserviceable due to roofing system removal or partial installation of new membrane roofing system, provide alternative drainage method to remove water and eliminate ponding. Do not permit water to enter or under existing membrane roofing system components that are to remain.

3.2 ROOF TEAR-OFF
A. General: Notify Owner each day of extent of roof tear-off proposed for that day and obtain authorization to proceed.

B. Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing membrane, insulations, flashings, and other membrane roofing system components down to the deck.

3.3 DECK PREPARATION
A. Inspect deck after tear-off of membrane roofing system.

B. Roof Deck: If broken or loose fasteners that secure deck panels to one another or to structure are observed or if deck appears or feels inadequately attached, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.

SECTION 07 0150

PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 0150 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Unsuitable Deck: If deck surface is not suitable for receiving new roofing or if structural integrity of deck is suspect, immediately notify Architect. Do not proceed with installation until directed by Architect.

3.4 TEMPORARY DISPLACEMENT OF ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT
A. Temporary displacement of mechanical units:

1. If mechanical units are to be temporarily displaced, shut off all affected electrical, plumbing and gas lines and disconnect all electrical, plumbing, gas lines and ventilation ducts where required to allow for lifting mechanical units prior to roof removal work. All disconnection of plumbing, gas lines, electrical conduit and ventilation ducts are to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor. Coordinate all disconnections with the Owner

2. Lift units in a manner that will not cause damage to the mechanical unit, mechanical unit components or structural deck.

3. Prior to leaving the site, return units to their original position, resulting in a watertight condition.

4. Ensure mechanical units are returned to their previous operational condition prior to leaving the site.

B. Temporary displacement of gas lines, conduit, junction boxes and condensate lines:

1. Temporarily displace gas lines, conduit, junction boxes, condensate lines or other items that may interfere with roof replacement work. Any necessary disconnection of gas lines, conduit and junction boxes is to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor as applicable to the work being performed. Coordinate all disconnections with the Owner.

C. After completion of work, reinstall any mechanical units that have been temporarily displaced. Reconnect all electrical, plumbing, gas lines and ventilation ducts where required. All reconnection of plumbing, gas lines, electrical conduit and ventilation ducts is to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor. Coordinate all reconnections with the Owner.

D. After completion of work, reconnect any gas lines, conduit and/or junction boxes have been disconnected. Reconnection of gas lines, conduit and/or junction boxes is to be performed by a licensed mechanical/electrical contractor as applicable to the work being performed. Coordinate all reconnections with the Owner.

3.5 TEMPORARY ROOFING MEMBRANE
A. Install approved temporary roofing membrane over area to be reroofed.

SECTION 07 0150

PREPARATION FOR RE-ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 0150 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Remove temporary roofing membrane before installing new roofing membrane.

3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Collect demolished materials and place them in containers. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.

1. Storage or sale of demolished items or materials on-site is not permitted.

B. Transport and legally dispose of demolished materials off Owner's property.

3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by preparation for re-roofing operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before operations began.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 2100

BUILDING INSULATION
MILLS PARK 07 2100 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Batt Insulation in ceiling construction.

2. Vapor retardant.

3. Air infiltration seal.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing.

2. ASTM D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.

3. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

B. Federal Specifications (FS):

1. FS HH-I-1972/GEN - Insulation Board, Thermal, Faced, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. a. Product Data: Indicate product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to insulation flame spread and smoke developed requirements of local authority having jurisdiction.

B. Certification: For projects California provides Products certified by manufacturer that meet California Quality Standards for Insulating Materials.

SECTION 07 2100

BUILDING INSULATION
MILLS PARK 07 2100 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Protect insulation from moisture, soiling and other damaging items.

C. Store in dry location protected from sunlight.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Resource Management:

1. Recycled Content: Provide fiberglass insulation manufactured from minimum 30 percent recycled glass.

B. Environmental Impact:

1. Only Greenguard indoor air quality certified products will be permitted.

2. Chlorofluorocarbons (CFCs): Products and equipment requiring or using CFCs during the manufacturing process will not be permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BATT INSULATION
A. Manufacturers:

1. Johns Manville Corporation, Denver, Co (800) 654-3103.

2. Knauf Fiberglass, Shelbyville, IN (317) 398-4434, (800) 825-4434.

3. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH (419) 248-8000, (800) 438-7465.

4. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Materials: Fiberglass insulation manufactured from minimum 30 percent recycled glass.

1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced. Thermal resistance R-value as indicated on Drawings.

2. Faced Glass Fiber: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class A, with reflective covering one side. Thermal resistance R-value as indicated on Drawings.

2.2 VAPOR RETARDANT
A. ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perm.

SECTION 07 2100

BUILDING INSULATION
MILLS PARK 07 2100 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Vapor Retardant Tape: Pressure-sensitive type recommended by vapor retardant manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retardant.

2.3 AIR INFILTRATION SEAL
A. Manufacturer:

1. Tenneco Building Products, Smyrna, GA (800) 241-4402.

2. DuPont, Wilmington, DE (800) 448-9835.

3. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Materials: One of the following two types of materials:

1. 15-pound, type 1, grade D, 10-minute unperforated asphalt saturated organic felt in accordance with ASTM D22.

2. Coated, cross-woven polyethylene or polypropylene fabric:
a. Tenneco: Amowrap Housewrap.
b. DuPont: Tyvek Housewrap.
c. Air Infiltration Seal Tape: Pressure sensitive type recommended by vapor retardant manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in air infiltration seal.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self-adhering type; 2 inches (5.08 cm) wide.

B. Adhesive: Waterproof type, acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board.

C. Wire Mesh: Galvanized steel, hexagonal wire mesh.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Batt Insulation:
a. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. b. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested.

SECTION 07 2100

BUILDING INSULATION
MILLS PARK 07 2100 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Report in writing to Project Manager prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the client/city.

3.2 INSTALLATION - BATT INSULATION
A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, without gaps or voids.

B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.

C. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane. Attach insulation in place to framing; tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal tears or cuts in membrane.

3.3 INSTALLATION - VAPOR RETARDANT AIR INFILTRATION SEAL A. Install vapor retardant air infiltration seal over entire building exterior walls and adjacent surfaces
B. Seal vertical joints over framing by lapping minimum 2 stud spaces. Fasten to framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints.

C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items with manufacturer's sealing tape. Seal penetrations airtight.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 2719

PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MILLS PARK 07 2719 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Mechanically attached permeable flexible plastic sheet air barriers.

2. Flexible flashing of openings, penetrations, joints, and terminations of exterior walls and taping of seams.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 07 6000 – Flashing and Sheet Metal.

3. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants.

4. Section 08 4113 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.

5. Section 09 2400 – Portland Cement Plastering and Metal Lath.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM E1677 - Standard Specification for an Air Barrier (AB) Material or System for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls.

3. ASTM E2178 – Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials.

B. International Code Council (ICC):

1. ICC-ES Evaluation Reports.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for each material and component proposed for installation.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and elevations indicating:

SECTION 07 2719

PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MILLS PARK 07 2719 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Complete information as to size and location of openings, sleeves, conduits, ducts, boxes, inserts, attachments, and structural interferences.

2. Layout of air barrier showing sheet lapping, cutting, flashing, and taping, with references to enlarged details.

C. Installation Instructions: Submit detailed manufacturer’s installation instructions.

D. Material Samples: Submit minimum 8-1/2-inch by 11-inch samples of air barrier, and 12 inch long flashing.

E. Test Reports: Submit Test Reports showing performance characteristics equaling or exceeding those specified.

F. Evaluation Reports: Submit ICC-ES Evaluation Report demonstrating conformance of plastic sheet air barrier to CBC 1404.2, for use as water- resistive barrier.

G. Qualification Statements:

1. Installer: Statement from plastic sheet air barrier manufacturer indicating installer is approved, certified, or has been trained for the installation of their products.

H. Commissioning Services Provider (CxSP) will review the Submittals of this Section as part of the Commissioning of Thermal and Moisture Protection.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer:

1. Plastic sheet air barrier components and accessories shall be from a single source.

2. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of continued experience in the manufacture of the specified products.

B. Installer:

1. Minimum five years in the installation of air/weather barriers.

2. Trained or certified by manufacturer for the installation of their products.

C. Mock-up: Refer to Section 09 2423, Cement Plaster and Metal Lath.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: CONTRACTOR shall coordinate and conduct pre-installation conference, Project Meetings, to review the progress of construction activities related to the installation of plastic sheet air barrier. In addition to the conference attendees listed in Division 01, plastic sheet air SECTION 07 2719

PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MILLS PARK 07 2719 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
barrier installer and manufacturer technical representative shall attend pre- installation conference.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in undamaged and original packaging.

B. Store materials in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by plastic sheet air barrier manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

C. Handle materials in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide a ten-year manufacturer’s standard material warranty for replacement of plastic sheet air barriers that fail due to material defects.

B. Installation Warranty: Provide a two-year installation warranty for the plastic sheet air barrier, including accessories, against loss of water-tight seal and loss of attachment.

C. Warranty shall start on the day of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Manufacturer and Products:

1. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company): Tyvek CommercialWrap.

2. Polymer Group Inc., TyparMetroWrap.

3. Equal.

B. Properties:

1. Plastic sheet air barrier shall be Type I in accordance to ASTM E1677.

2. Air Permeance: shall not exceed 0.004 cfm/ft 2, under a pressure differentia
l of 0.3 in w.g. (1.57 psf) (0.02 L/m2 at 75 Pa), when tested in accord
ance with ASTM E2178.

3. Flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested in accordance to ASTM E84.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
SECTION 07 2719

PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MILLS PARK 07 2719 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Flashing: Self-adhesive butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

1. DuPont (E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company); FlexWrap and StraightFlash.

2. Polymer Group Inc.; Flashing Flex and Flashing AT.

3. Equal.

B. Fasteners: Manufacturer approved fasteners.

C. Tape: Three-inch-wide seam tape. Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by air barrier manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in air barrier.

D. Sealants and Adhesive Primers: Compatible with plastic sheet air barrier and flashings system and approved by OWNER’s Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS).

1. Sealant: Dow Corning 732.

2. Spray Adhesive: Design Polymerics DP77.

3. Equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas and conditions under which plastic sheet air barrier will be installed.

B. Verify that substrate to receive air barrier has been completed and inspected before commencement of work.

C. For the installation of flashing and tape, surface shall be smooth, clean, dry, and free from voids, loose substrate, protrusions, or any material that would hinder adhesion.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plastic sheet air barrier in accordance to manufacturer’s installation guidelines, providing continuity throughout exterior walls. Install plastic sheet air barrier with drainage plane surface pattern in vertical position for proper drainage.

B. Install plastic sheet air barrier starting from the bottom of the building up to ensure proper overlapping of vertical and horizontal seams. Upper layer of SECTION 07 2719

PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MILLS PARK 07 2719 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
plastic sheet air barrier shall overlap bottom layer by a minimum of six inches.

Plastic sheet air barrier shall extend over the weep screed by two inches and be taped down.

C. Secure plastic sheet air barrier by fastening into studs at 12 to 18 inches on center vertically.

D. Unroll plastic sheet air barrier directly over windows and doors rough openings. Do not install fasteners within six inches of the sills and jambs of the openings and within nine inches of the header, plastic sheet air barrier shall be fastened at these locations during flashing installation.

E. Horizontal joints shall be overlapped a minimum of six inches with upper courses overlapping lower courses in water-shedding fashion. Vertical seams shall be overlapped a minimum of six inches. Overlap corners of building a minimum of 12 inches.

F. Tape vertical and horizontal seams using adhesive tape recommended by manufacturer. Seal tears and cuts with adhesive tape as recommended by manufacturer.

G. Place patch or strip of self-adhered flashing over plastic sheet air barrier where base plates, metal channels, z-girts, or other hardware will be installed.

3.3 FLASHING
A. Cut air barrier from door and window openings along jambs and sill. Cut a header flap at 45 degree angle to expose eight inches of plastic sheet air barrier to allow for head flashing installation. Install sill flashing per manufacturer instructions, overlapping up the jambs a minimum of six inches on each side.

B. Wrap flashing around interior jamb, wall face and exterior jamb, overlapping the vertical portion of the sill flashing by at least two inches.

C. Adhere flashing to the head following manufacturer’s instructions. Flashing shall wrap jamb flashings by a minimum of two inches.

D. Flash piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations through walls, and flashing ledgers and sills as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer’s technical representative shall inspect the work and submit a statement indicating that the installation has been done in conformance to manufacturer’s installation instructions.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste material and legally dispose of off the Project site.

SECTION 07 2719

PLASTIC SHEET AIR BARRIERS
MILLS PARK 07 2719 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Mechanically-fastened thermoplastic PVC/TPA roofing system on wood deck, including:

2. Substrate board.

3. Walkway material.

1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
a. Indicate details meet requirements of NRCA required by this Section.

2. Cricket layout, including slopes.

3. Fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.

2. Walkway pads or rolls.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Contractor's Product Certificate: Submit letter, indicating products intended for Work of this Section, including product names and numbers and manufacturers' names, with statement indicating that products to be provided meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer, Manufacturer, and Roofing Inspector.

1. Include letter from Manufacturer written for this Project indicating approval of Installer.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

1. Product Compatibility: Indicate manufacturer has verified compatibility of roofing system components, including but not limited to: Roofing membrane, flashing sheets, adhesives, and sealants.

D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.

E. Warranties: Unexecuted sample copies of special warranties.

F. Inspection Reports: Daily reports of Roofing Inspector. Include weather conditions, description of work performed, tests performed, defective work observed, and corrective actions taken to correct defective work.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Maintenance Data: To include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and certified by manufacturer, including a full-time on-site supervisor with a minimum of five years' experience installing products comparable to those specified, able to communicate verbally with Contractor, Architect, and employees, and qualified by the manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and furnish warranty of type specified.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this Section, UL listed for roofing systems identical to that specified for this Project, with minimum five years’ experience in manufacture of specified products in successful use in similar applications.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Approval of Comparable Products: Submit the following in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review:
a. Product data, including certified independent test data indicating compliance with requirements.
b. Samples of each component.
c. Sample submittal from similar project.
d. Project references: Minimum of five installations of specified products not less than five years old, with City and Architect contact information. e. Sample warranty.

2. Approved manufacturers must meet separate requirements of Submittals Article.

C. Roofing Inspector Qualifications: A technical representative of manufacturer not engaged in the sale of products and experienced in the installation and maintenance of the specified roofing system, qualified to perform roofing observation and inspection specified in Field Quality Control Article, to determine Installer's compliance with the requirements of this Project, and approved by the manufacturer to issue warranty certification. The Roofing Inspector shall be one of the following:

1. An authorized full-time technical employee of the manufacturer.

2. An independent party certified as a Registered Roof Observer by the Roof Consultants Institute, retained by the Contractor or the Manufacturer and approved by the Manufacturer.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products.

E. Pre-installation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Meet with City, Architect, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.

2. Review drawings and specifications.

3. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

5. Examine substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening.

6. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.

7. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.

8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.

9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight.

1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection of deck.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Daily Protection: Coordinate installation of roofing so insulation and other components of roofing system not permanently exposed are not subjected to precipitation or left uncovered at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

1. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing and insulation with a course of roofing sheet securely in place with joints and edges sealed.

2. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing.

3. Remove temporary plugs from roof drains at end of each day.

4. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

1.10 WARRANTY
A. Warranty, General: Warranties specified shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents.

Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks.

1. Manufacturer's warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, fasteners, roofing membrane accessories and other components of roofing system specified in this Section.

2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Installer's Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, covering the Work of this Section and related Sections indicated above, including all components of membrane roofing such as single ply roofing membrane, base flashing, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

D. Manufacturer Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Requirement: By manufacturer’s technical representative, to report maintenance responsibilities to City necessary for preservation of City’s warranty rights. The cost of manufacturer's annual inspections and preventive maintenance is included in the Contract Sum. Inspections to occur in Years 2, 5, 10 and 15 following completion.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Manufacturer/Product: The roof system specified in this Section is based upon products of Tremco, Inc., Beachwood, OH, (800) 562-2728, www.tremcoroofing.com that are named in other Part 2 articles.

B. Approval of Other Manufacturers and Comparable Products: Submit in accordance with project substitution requirements, within time allowed for substitution review.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain components for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.

1. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

2. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Flashings and Fastening: Provide base flashings, perimeter flashings, detail flashings and component materials and installation techniques that comply with requirements and recommendations of the following:

1. NRCA Roofing Manual (Sixth Edition) for construction details and recommendations.

2. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (Seventh Edition) for construction details.

D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated, as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
by a qualified testing agency. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

E. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance index of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

2.3 THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE MATERIALS
A. Thermoplastic PVC/TPA sheet, ASTM D4434 Type IV internally fabric reinforced, Energy Star qualified, CRRC listed, and California Title 24 Energy Code compliant.

1. Basis of design product: Tremco, TPA Roof Membrane.

2. Tensile Strength at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 6509: 300 lbf/in (52 kN/m).

3. Tear Strength at 77 deg. F (25 deg. C), minimum, ASTM D 6509: 100 lbf (440 N).

4. Elongation at 0 deg. F (-18 deg. C), minimum at fabric break, ASTM D 6509:
25 percent.

5. Minimum Thickness, nominal, ASTM D 751: 60 mils (1.5 mm).

6. Exposed Face Color: White.

7. Reflectance, ASTM C 1549: 86 percent.

8. Thermal Emittance, ASTM C 1371: 0.86.

9. Solar Reflectance Index (SRI), ASTM E 1980: 108.

10. Recycled Content, minimum: 25 percent preconsumer.

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, and color as PVC/TPA sheet membrane.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Flashing Sheet Bonding Adhesive:

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Elastomeric low-VOC solvent-based contact-type adhesive for bonding TPA non-fleece-backed single ply membranes and flashings to substrates. a. VOC, maximum, ASTM D 3960: <200 g/L.

C. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (25 mm by 3 mm) thick; with anchors.

D. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc- coated steel sheet, approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch (25 mm wide by 1.3 mm) thick, prepunched.

E. Coping and Fascia Cover: 24-guage aluminum-zinc alloy coated steel, class AZ50 coating designation, grade 50, prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening components to substrate, and acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.

G. Termination Joint Sealant: Polyurethane: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50 single-component moisture curing sealant, formulated for compatibility and use in dynamic and static joints; paintable.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone, and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 SUBSTRATE BOARDS
A. Glass-mat-faced gypsum panel, ASTM C1177/C 1177M.

1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof deck.

2.6 WALKWAY MATERIALS
A. Rubber Blocks: 100% rubber blocks with steel channels and reflective strips designed for supporting conduit.

B. Walkway roll, reinforced PVC/TPA membrane roll with serrated slip-resistant surface, fabricated for heat welding to compatible PVC/TPA membrane surface.

1. Basis of design product: Tremco, TPA Walkway Roll.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Roll Size: 36 inches by 60 foot (914 mm by 18.3 m).

3. Thickness: 0.08 inch (2 mm).

4. Color: Grey.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:

1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.

2. Wood Roof Deck: Verify that wood deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in exc ess of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) out of plane relative to adjoining deck.

3. Existing Prepared Roof Substrate: Verify that existing insulation and substrate is sound and dry.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.

B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast.

C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Install roofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Install blocking and nailers. Perimeter nailers must match height of cricket material.

C. NRCA Installation Details: Install roofing system in accordance with the following NRCA Manual Plates and NRCA recommendations:

1. Perimeter Edge, Embedded Edge: Plate TP-4.

2. Curb Detail at Rooftop HVAC Units, Premanufactured: Plates TP-13.

3. Curb Detail at Rooftop HVAC Units, Job-Built, Wood: Plate TP-14.

4. Penetration, Sheet Metal Enclosure: Plate TP-16.

5. Penetration, Stack Flashing: Plate TP-18.

6. Penetration, Plumbing Vent: Plate TP-20.

7. Penetration, Plumbing Vent, Premanufactured Boot: Plate TP-20A.

8. Roof Drain: Plate TP-27.

9. Base Flashing at Through-wall Scupper: Plate TP-28.

10. Base Flashing at Overflow Scupper: Plate-29.

11. Gutter at Draining Edge: Plate TP-30.

12. Guide for Clearances between Pipes / Walls / Curbs – Table 4.

13. Guide for Crickets and Saddles – Table 5.

3.4 SUBSTRATE BOARD
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.

1. Secure substrate board using a minimum of 8 mechanical fasteners per sheet.

2. Adhere substrate board in Low Rise Foam Insulation Adhesive to decking where fasteners will be visible on the underside of the decking.

3.5 MECHANICALLY FASTENED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION A. Mechanically fasten membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5082.

Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.

C. Accurately align membrane roofing, maintain uniform side, and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

D. Mechanically fasten securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Adhere membrane to substrate board over deck areas where mechanical fasteners will be visible on the underside of the decking.

F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.

G. Welded Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.

3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.

3.6 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing. Install umbrellas to counter flash.

D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot- air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

E. Install raised edge metal system with fascia metal covering new wood nailers.

Cover edge metal with metal matching fascia metal.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.7 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products surrounding serviceable equipment and in a continuous path from roof access points. Heat weld walkway products to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install rubber blocks under pipe/conduits sitting on the roof. Loosely clamp conduit to unistrut channel and install an oversized walkway section under block.

1. Support lines every 8 feet on pipe runs along with support on each side of every union, junction, and direction change.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Roofing Inspector: City has the option to engage a qualified roofing inspector to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Roofing Inspector: Contractor shall engage a qualified roofing inspector for daily inspections for the duration of the project to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare start up, interim, and final reports. Roofing Inspector's quality assurance inspections shall comply with criteria established in ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion.

D. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

3.9 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and City.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

SECTION 07 5419

POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC/TPA) ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 5419 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 6000

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
MILLS PARK 07 6000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Sheet metal flashings in connection with roofing.

2. Reglet and counter flashing assemblies.

3. Miscellaneous metal flashing and counter flashing as required, except where provided under Divisions 22, Plumbing, 23, HVAC, or 26, Electrical.

4. Metal edging.

5. Drip flashings.

6. Roof pipe flashings.

7. Other sheet metal items, not necessarily specified herein or in other sections, but required to prevent penetration of water into building.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

4. Section 07 5419 – Polyvinyl-Chloride PVC-TPA Roofing.

10. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

12. Division 8 - Openings.

14. Division 22 – Plumbing.

15. Division 23 - HVAC.

16. Division 26 - Electrical.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated sheet metal indicating shapes, details, methods of joining, anchoring, and fastening, thicknesses and gages of metals, concealed reinforcement, expansion joint details, sections, and profiles.

B. Samples: Submit Samples for materials or assemblies as requested.

C. Product Data: Submit brochures of manufactured items.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drawings and requirements specified govern. Provide the Work of this section in conformance with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA for conditions not indicated or specified and for general fabrication of sheet metal items.

SECTION 07 6000

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
MILLS PARK 07 6000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Materials shall conform to following standards:

1. ASTM A167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

2. ASTM A653 - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

3. ASTM B370 - Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction.

C. Pre-installation Meetings: Refer to Division 07 roofing sections as appropriate. Attend the pre-installation and inspection meetings for roofing Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Do not install bent or otherwise damaged materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A653, coating designation G90, hot-dip galvanized.

B. Fastenings:

1. Galvanized Steel: Nails, rivets, and other fastenings furnished in connection with galvanized sheet steel Work shall be sealed with rust resistive coating. Rivets shall be tinned. Nails and other fastenings shall be zinc-coated.

C. Soldering Flux: Raw muriatic acid for galvanized steel; rosin for tin, lead, and tinned copper; non-corrosive soldering salts for uncoated copper and acid-type flux formulated for soldering stainless steel.

D. Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 5A, composed of 95-5 tin-antimony. Name of product manufacturer and grade designation shall be labeled, stamped, or cast onto each coil or bar.

2.2 FABRICATION
A. General:

1. Accurately form sheet metal Work to dimensions and shapes indicated and required. Cope finish molded and brake metal shapes with true, straight, sharp lines and angles and, where intersecting each other, to a precise fit. Unless otherwise specified, all galvanized sheet steel shall be 22 gage. Exposed edges of sheet metal shall have a ½ inch minimum hemmed edge.

2. Soldering of sheet steel or copper shall be performed with well- heated copper soldering iron or soldering torch, joints full flowing, neat and consistent. Fill joint completely with solder. Clean materials at joints before soldering, and tin coppers before SECTION 07 6000

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
MILLS PARK 07 6000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
soldering. Exposed soldering on finished surfaces shall be scraped smoothly. Lock seam work shall be fabricated flat and true to line and soldered along its entire length. Acid-fluxed Work shall be neutralized after fabrication.

3. Form and install sheet metal Work to provide proper allowances for expansion and contraction, without causing undue stresses in any part of completed Work. Installation shall be water and weathertight.

B. Reglet Type Counterflashing: Where roof encounters vertical surfaces, provides counterflashing. Set top of counter flashing 8 inches above roof deck unless otherwise indicated and extend down at least 5 inches or to top of cant strip. Counterflashing and Reglet shall be 22 gage galvanized sheet steel. Lap counter flashing and Reglet 3 inches minimum at splices and miter at angles or supply special metal corner fittings. Reglet and method of securing flashing shall be so constructed that flashing is firmly locked in place but may be readily removed for replacement.

C. Roof Expansion Joint Covers: Fabricate of 22 gage galvanized sheet steel, as detailed. One side of joint shall be zee shaped, with 3-inch standing leg extended over the joint and turned down. The other side shall be box shaped, fabricated to extend over the joint, over the standing leg, and turn down to form a water barrier. Prefabricated bellows type joint covers are not permitted.

D. Miscellaneous Flashing: Unless otherwise indicated, miscellaneous flashing shall be fabricated of galvanized steel. Exterior doors and windows, unless covered by overhangs shall be provided with 22 gage galvanized steel drip flashing as detailed. At wood construction, nail flashing to framing before paper backed lath is installed.

E. Roof Pipe Flashings: Provide PVC flashings or prefabricated welded or seamless flashings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Concrete and masonry materials in contact with sheet metal shall be painted with alkali resistant coating, such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint. Wood in contact with sheet metal shall be painted with two coats of aluminum paint or one coat of heavy-bodied bituminous paint.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Coordinate with installation of underlayment indicated in the Drawings and specified in Section 09 2423.

B. Reglets: Install reglets at constant height above cant or as indicated.

Provide minimum 3-inch lap at end splices of regrets. Seal laps watertight.

SECTION 07 6000

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
MILLS PARK 07 6000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Counterflashing:

1. Install at constant horizontal elevation across roof slope and slope at constant height above cant or as indicated.

2. Provide minimum 3-inch lap at all end splices of counterflashing.

D. Galvanized sheet steel parapet coping and flashing shall be continuous over top of parapet to form a watertight cap, with waterproof seams at approximately 10 feet on center, or as indicated. Anchor coping to outside of wall with a continuous cleat face nailed at 24-inch centers.

Coping shall be fastened on inside wall with hex head screws and bonded sealing washers through oversized holes in the back of the coping. Corners and angles shall be lapped and soldered; do not install joint sealant.

3.3 TESTING
A. Perform field water testing to demonstrate installation is watertight.

Continue testing with a continuous hose stream applied at base of installation for at least 30 minutes. If leaking is observed, discontinue test and repair installation, then test until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of them off the Project site.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements related to sheet metal fabrication and installation related to fully-adhered Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) roofing.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements
C. Section 02 4100 – Roof Removal and Substrate Preparation D. Section 07 5419 – Polyvinyl-Chloride PVC-TPA Roofing E. Section 07 9201 – Sealants for Roof Replacement
F. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference standards of the following sources are applicable to products and procedures specified in Part 2 - Products and Part 3 – Execution of this Section:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM A 653/653M – Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

2. American National Standard Institute (ANSI)

3. Factory Mutual Global (FM)

4. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA)

5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA).
a. SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, 6th Edition

6. Single Ply Roofing Industry (SPRI)
a. ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 – Wind Design for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems.

SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the start of work, submit the following to the Owner for approval:

1. Product submittals required within Section 01 3300.

B. Refer to Section 01 3300 for procedural requirements related to the submittal process.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROCEDURES
A. Applicator Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer’s product and that is eligible to receive a manufacturer’s warranty. Company shall have a minimum of 5 years documented experience certified by roofing system manufacturer.

E. During work, if conditions are discovered which do not allow for continuation of the work per the technical specifications and drawings, notify the Owner immediately for resolution.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01 6000 for transport, handling, storage, and product requirements.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.

C. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
moisture. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure. Store roll materials standing on end.

D. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on previously completed roofing.

1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not perform work during inclement weather. Refer to product manufacturer for outdoor temperature requirements for installation of materials. Do not install materials at times when the outdoor temperature does not fall within the minimum/maximum temperature requirements of the manufacturer.

B. Cold weather precautions:

1. NOTE: Do not install sealants, adhesives, primers, and pressure- sensitive flashings associated with sheet metal flashing at temperatures below 40°F (5°C).

2. When the outside temperature is forecast to fall below 40°F (5°C), store unused materials in a heated location. Remove these materials only when ready for installation. Sealants, adhesives, primers, and pressure-sensitive flashings should be maintained at a temperature of 40°F (5°C), minimum, at all times. Do not use sealants, adhesives or primers that develop a gelled or lumpy texture to them. Return these materials to a heated location.

3. Be aware of potential condensation formation on the PVC roof surface during application/flash-off of adhesives and primer.

Remove condensation using a heat gun prior to adhesion to the insulation or cover board substrate. Do not use an open flame to remove condensation from the roof membrane or flashing
materials.

4. Refer to the PVC roofing manufacturer and NRCA requirements and recommendations for additional cold weather application recommendations and restrictions.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all specified products shall remain on site for the duration of this project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
A. Perimeter edge metal flashing system: Perimeter edge sheet metal flashing system consisting of a continuous inner clip and outer fascia piece, designed in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/SPRI/FM SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
4435/ES-1.

1. Inner clip/retention system and continuous cleats associated with perimeter edge metal flashing systems: Galvanized steel, 20- gauge, ASTM A 653/653M; G-90, maximum section length of 10- feet.

2. Fascia piece/gravel stop associated with perimeter edge metal flashing systems: PVC-coated prefinished galvanized steel, 24- gauge, maximum section lengths of 10-feet; color as selected by the Owner.

B. Perimeter parapet cap metal flashing system: Parapet cap sheet metal flashing system consisting of a continuous inner clip and outer fascia piece, designed in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1.

1. Inner clip/retention system and continuous cleats associated with perimeter edge metal flashing systems: Galvanized steel, 20- gauge, ASTM A 653/653M; G-90, maximum section length of 10- feet.

2. Parapet cap associated with perimeter parapet cap metal flashing systems: Prefinished galvanized steel, 24-gauge, with Kynar 500 coating, maximum section lengths of 10-feet; standard prefinished color as selected by the Owner.

C. Interior parapet caps, area divider caps, expansion joint covers, curb caps, and fascia extensions: Prefinished galvanized steel, 24-gauge, with Kynar 500 coating, maximum section lengths of 10-feet; standard prefinished color as selected by the Owner.

1. Continuous cleats associated with prefinished aluminum cap and fascia extension installation: Galvanized steel, 20-gauge, ASTM A 653/653M; G-90, maximum section length of 10-feet.

D. Reglet-mounted, surface-mounted and slip counter flashings: Prefinished galvanized steel, 24-gauge, with Kynar 500 coating, maximum section lengths of 10-feet; standard prefinished color as selected by the Owner.

E. Pitch pans:

1. Pitch pans: PVC-coated sheet metal, 24-guage minimum thickness, or pre-fabricated pitch pan approved by the roofing membrane manufacturer. Fabricate to dimensions shown on drawings, with a minimum 4-inch depth and other dimensions to be kept to the minimum size necessary to provide a 2-inch clearance on all sides from the penetration.

2. Tubular penetration hoods and pitch pan covers: Stainless steel, 22-guage. Solder all seams and laps watertight. Fabricate to dimensions shown on drawings.

SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories:

1. For terminating flashing: Anchor bar: 1-inch x 1/8-inch extruded aluminum with slotted holes spaced 6 inches o.c.

2. For securement of tubular penetration flashings and sheet metal hoods at tubular penetrations: Stainless steel adjustable clamp.

2.2 FASTENERS
A. For securing sheet metal flashings: Fasteners appropriate for the substrate encountered, and compatible with the sheet metal type to be secured. Where fastener heads are exposed, provide neoprene washers.

B. For copper: Copper or bronze fasteners.

C. For stainless steel: Stainless steel fasteners.

D. For securing aluminum anchor bar: Fasteners appropriate for substrate encountered and approved by the roofing manufacturer.

2.3 SEALANT
A. Refer to Section 07 9201.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SHEET METAL INSTALLATION
A. Perimeter edge metal flashing system:

1. Install the metal system manufacturer to meet the requirements of ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. Provide a system matching the
dimensions indicated on the drawings.

2. For pre-fabricated parapet cap metal systems: Install in accordance with the metal system manufacturer.

3. For shop-fabricated perimeter edge metal systems:
a. Secure the horizontal flange of the inner clip/continuous cleat with nails 6-inches o.c.
b. Secure the outer vertical face of the continuous cleat with minimum #14 fasteners 18-inches o.c. Decrease fastener
spacing to 9-inches o.c. within 10-feet of a building corner. c. Place the outer fascia/gravel stop piece. Fully crimp the fascia to the underlying continuous cleat. Secure the flange with nails 3-inches o.c. in two staggered rows.

B. Parapet edge cap metal flashing system:

SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. For pre-fabricated parapet cap metal systems: Install in accordance with the metal system manufacturer to meet the requirements of ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. Provide a system matching the dimensions indicated on the drawings.

2. For shop-fabricated parapet cap metal systems:
a. Fabricate inner clips/continuous cleats with a kick-up, creating a minimum 1/2-inch per foot slope toward the roof. b. Secure the horizontal flange of the inner clip/continuous cleat with nails 6-inches o.c.
c. Secure the outer vertical face of the continuous cleat with minimum #14 fasteners 18-inches o.c. Decrease fastener
spacing to 9-inches o.c. within 10-feet of a building corner. d. Place the cap sections. At the outer face, fully crimp the fascia to the underlying continuous cleat. At the inner face, secure the flange with #12 fasteners, fitted with neoprene washers 18-inches o.c., max., and within 2-inches of each end.
e. Join adjacent parapet cap sections using a standing seam, with a 1” height.
f. Where parapet caps terminate at walls, turn cap piece up 4- inches, minimum. Install counterflashing over exposed end piece.

C. Interior parapet, area divider and expansion joint covers, and fascia extensions:

1. Install caps, as detailed, at locations indicated on the drawings.

2. Fabricate with seams type indicated on drawings to dimensions indicated on drawings. Provide a 3/4-inch hemmed drip edge.

3. Fastening: Secure faces of interior parapet, area divider and expansion joint covers with specified fasteners appropriate for the substrate encountered, fitted with neoprene washers, spaced 18- inches o.c. max., and within 2-inches of each end.

4. Join adjacent interior parapet, area divider and sheet metal expansion joint cover sections using standing seams, with a 1” height.

5. Where interior parapet, area divider, and expansion joint covers terminate at walls, turn cap piece up 4-inches, minimum. Install counterflashing over exposed end piece.

D. Fascia extensions:

1. Secure fascia extensions with specified fasteners appropriate for substrate condition encountered, 12-inches o.c. max.

E. Reglet-mounted and slip counterflashing’s: Provide counterflashing, as detailed, at locations indicated on the drawings:

SECTION 07 6207

SHEET METAL FOR PVC ROOFING
MILLS PARK 07 6207 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Cut reglets into masonry walls to accommodate reglet-mounted counterflashing.

2. Fabricate counterflashing to dimensions indicated on drawings.

Fabricate the counterflashing with a 3/4-inch hemmed drip edge, and on surface mounted counterflashing, a 1/2-inch 45-degree angle sealant slot. Fabricate slip counterflashing to dimensions necessary to accommodate existing conditions, and as shown on drawings. Provide a minimum 4-inch face if conditions allow.

3. Secure counterflashing with specified fasteners appropriate for substrate condition encountered, fitted with neoprene washers.

Space fasteners 12-inches o.c. max.

4. Provide a continuous bead of sealant along the top edge of reglet- mounted and surface-mounted counterflashing to shed water and provide a watertight seal.

F. Tubular penetration and pitch pan flashings:

1. Flash tubular penetrations and pitch pans as indicated on drawings.

Do not use pitch pans at tubular penetrations without the approval of the Owner.

2. Tightly secure top edge of tubular penetration flashing with a stainless-steel clamp. Seal top edge of flashing and clamp watertight.

3. Install tubular penetration hoods and pitch pan covers as indicated on the drawings.

G. Anchor bar: Fasten the upper edges of modified bitumen flashings with an anchor bar installed in accordance with the requirements of the roofing membrane manufacturer.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 7100

ROOF SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 07 7100 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Roof hatches.

2. Exhaust Equipment.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.

3. Section 07 5400 – Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing.

4. Section 07 6000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

5. Section 07 6207 - Sheet Metal for PVC Roofing

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit fabricated sheet metal indicating details, methods of joining, anchoring, and fastening, thicknesses and gauges of metals, concealed reinforcement, sections, and profiles.

B. Samples: Submit Samples for materials or assemblies as requested.

Provide finished Samples of exposed items.

C. Product Data: Submit brochures of manufactured items.

D. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's recommended installation methods and instructions for each item. Instructions shall be prepared to indicate exact conditions of roofing, structure, and adjoining construction.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Drawings and requirements specified govern. Provide the Work in accordance with the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA for conditions not indicated or specified and for general fabrication of sheet metal items.

B. Qualifications of Installer: Minimum 5 years’ experience in successfully installing the same or similar sheet metal specialties on roofing systems like the roofing systems specified.

C. Coordinate opening sizes and installation with roofing and related Work to ensure fit and installation.

D. Pre-installation Meetings: Refer to Division 07 roofing sections as appropriate. Attend the pre-installation and inspection meetings for roofing Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect roof specialties and accessories by storing above grade on required skids or supports. Protect from physical damage and do not install bent or damaged materials.

SECTION 07 7100

ROOF SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 07 7100 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Roof Hatches:

1. Babcock Davis.

2. Bilco Company.

3. Lane-aire Model CRH.

4. Dur-Red Products.

5. Equal.

B. Exhaust Equipment: Loren Cook Company, Greenheck, Grainger, or equal.

2.2 PRODUCTS
A. Roof Hatches: Provide roof hatches of indicated sizes. Hatches shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, 14 gage curb and cover, 22 gage cover liner, and 1-inch-thick insulation in cover and curb. Cover shall operate by a compression spring enclosed in a telescopic case or enclosed torsion spring, with automatic hold-open arm. Provide padlock hasp on inside of unit.

1. Accessories: Provide manufacturers with a fixed hatch railing system, providing a permanent means of fall protection for roof hatch openings. Rail system shall meet OSHA Standard 29 CFR
1910.23(a)(3).

B. Exhaust Equipment: Provide equipment at locations and of sizes and type indicated on plans. Ventilators shall be securely fastened to roof curbs as indicated in manufacturer's details. Equipment shall have ½-inch mesh galvanized steel mesh bird screen.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrate to receive roofing accessories and associated Work and conditions under which accessories will be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof accessories in accordance with SMACNA and manufacturer’s recommendations as required.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Upon request of the Project Inspector, perform field water testing to demonstrate that installation is watertight. Continue testing with a continuous hose stream applied at base of installation for at least 30 minutes. If leaking is observed, discontinue test and repair installation, then test until satisfactory results are obtained.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

SECTION 07 7100

ROOF SPECIALTIES
MILLS PARK 07 7100 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.5 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of them off the Project site.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Penetrations for the passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping, electrical busways, and raceways through fire-rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal barriers (floor/ceiling assemblies), and vertical service shaft walls and partitions.

2. Mineral fiber insulation, fire safing, and safing edge of floor slabs and curtain walls.

3. Damming material, clips, and closures.

4. Gaps between the top of walls and ceilings or roof assemblies.

5. Expansion joints in walls and floors.

6. Openings around structural members which penetrate floors or walls.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.

3. Section 07 2100 - Building Insulation.

4. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

5. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

6. Division 22 - Plumbing.

7. Division 23 - HVAC.

8. Division 26 - Electrical.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM Standards:

1. ASTM E84 – Standard Test Method for Surface Burning
Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM E119 – Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through- Penetration Fire Stops.

4. ASTM E1399 – Standard Test Method for Cyclic Movement and Measuring Minimum and Maximum Joint Widths on Architectural Joint Systems.

5. ASTM E1966 – Standard Test Methods for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

6. ASTM E2174 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Firestops

7. ASTM E2307 – Standard Test Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Perimeter Fire Barriers Using Intermediate-Scale, Multi-story Test Apparatus.

8. ASTM E2393 - Standard Practice for On-Site Inspection of Installed Fire Resistive Joint Systems and Perimeter Fire Barriers.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

1. UL Fire Resistance Directory.

2. UL 263 – Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.

3. UL 723 – Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

4. UL 1479 – Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops.

5. UL 2079 – Test for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems.

C. Testing Services:

1. Intertek ES SAT.

2. Southwest Research Institute.

3. Underwriters Laboratories.

D. International Firestop Council Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments.

E. California Building Code, Chapter 7 Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

F. Firestop Contractors International Association (FICA) Manual of Practice.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Provide fire stops and smoke seals to prevent the passage of fire, smoke, toxic gasses, or water from one floor or area to another. Seal openings in floors, fire rated walls and permanent partitions penetrated by pipes, ducts, conduits, and other items as shown, specified, and as required for the type of construction.

B. Mineral fiber insulation installed as fire safing at non-rated penetrations not containing pipes, ducts, conduits, and other items in floor slabs, wall partitions, construction-joint conditions between slabs and adjacent construction and where indicated or required.

C. Provide damming material, clips, and closures as required for support and containment of dams, and other insulation materials required for tested and rated fire stop systems.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Criteria:

1. Provide materials and Work to conform to source quality control criteria specified herein and CBC requirements in fire resistant wall and floor assemblies to prevent the passage of fire, smoke, and toxic gases.

2. Installed fire stops shall be of sufficient thickness, width, and density to provide a fire resistance rating at least equal to the floor, wall, or partition construction into which it is installed.

B. Comply with CBC requirements for fire rated construction.

C. Qualifications of Manufacturer: Products furnished for fire stopping and smoke seals shall be manufactured by a firm which has been continuously and regularly employed in the manufacture of these materials for a period of at least 5 years; and which can provide evidence of these materials being satisfactorily installed on at least 5 projects of similar size and type within such period.

D. Qualifications of Installer: The Work of this section shall be installed by a firm which has been in the business of installing similar materials for at least 5 consecutive years; and can provide evidence of satisfactory completion of 5 projects of similar size and scope. Installer shall have applicators trained and certified by manufacturer for performing this Work. Comply with requirements of FICA Manual of Practice.

E. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Engineering judgment drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council.

F. Firestopping tests shall be performed by a qualified testing and inspection agency. A qualified testing and inspection agency shall be SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
UL, Intertek or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Firestopping products shall bear the classification marking of a qualified testing and inspection agency.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer's Product Data for each type of fire stop and smoke seal material proposed for installation. Indicate product characteristics, typical installations, performance, and limitation criteria and test data.

2. Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions for each type of product, system, and construction required for the Work.

Indicate fire resistance rating of each installation.

3. Submit fire test reports from independent testing agency indicating the following:
a. Fire test report of fire stop material installed to substrate and penetration materials similar to the Work of this
section. Test to indicate both Fire Resistance (F) and
Temperature (T) Ratings.
b. Test reports of products to be installed shall indicate conformance to ASTM E814 or UL 1479 for penetrations,
ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 for joints, and ASTM E2307 for
perimeter fire barrier (edge-of-slab) systems.

B. Field Samples: No less than 10 days before commencing the Work of this section, provide field installed Samples of fire stop materials and systems.

1. Apply one Sample of fire stop material for each different penetration and related fire rating required for the Work.

2. Sample areas shall comply with thickness, fire resistance ratings, and finished appearance.

C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Submit evidence of conformance with qualification requirements specified above.

D. Installer’s Qualifications: Submit evidence of conformance with qualification requirements specified above.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers bearing correct UL labeling.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Fire stop material shall be stored above grade in an area protected from detrimental weather and moisture conditions and in compliance with manufacturer’s requirements, including temperature restrictions.

C. Fire stop and seal materials shall be installed before expiration of shelf life.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Unless otherwise noted, products of this section shall be manufactured by:

1. 3M Fire Protection Products.

2. Hilti, Inc.

3. Nelson Firestop Products.

4. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI).

5. Tremco, Inc.

6. Equal.

B. Provide materials and systems of specified manufacturers to suit penetration and substrate as determined by various conditions of installation.

C. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with the substrates forming openings and the items penetrating the firestop, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the fire stopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Firestop Collar: Made of galvanized steel housing and Intumescent inserts for firestopping combustible pipes through walls and floors. For use with concrete, masonry, wood floor and gypsum wall assemblies.

Provide two collars on walls, one on each side, and one collar on underside of floors.

1. 3M: Plastic Pipe Device PPD.

2. Hilti: CP 643N and CP 644.

3. Tremco: TREMstop D.

4. Nelson Firestop Products: PCS Pipe Choke System.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): Intumescent Firestop Collars, type LCC, SSC or RTC.

6. Equal.

B. Fire Pillows and Blocks: Intumescent flexible pillows consisting of a mineral fiber core sealed with a water-resistant intumescent membrane, heat-sealed in a durable fire-retardant poly bag; or intumescent block based on a two component foam, for use in walls, floors, and concrete, masonry, and gypsum wall assemblies. For large openings containing multiple penetrations: wall openings up to 48 inches by 48 inches and floors up to 36 inches by 36 inches.

1. 3M: Fire Barrier Self-Locking Pillow.

2. Hilti: FS 657.

3. Tremco: TREMstop PS1, TREMstop PS2.

4. Nelson Firestop Products: Fire Brick, Pillows.

5. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): SSB Firestop Pillows.

6. Equal.

C. Firestop Putty Stick: Intumescent, non-hardening, firestop putty for single or bundled cables and non-combustible pipe penetrations. For use in horizontal or vertical, concrete, masonry, or gypsum wall assemblies.

1. 3M: MP + Stix.

2. Hilti: CP 618 and CP 619T.

3. Tremco: TREMstop MP Putty Stick.

4. Nelson Firestop Products: FSP AA445, AA439.

5. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): SSP Firestop Putty.

6. Equal.

D. Firestop Putty Pad: Moldable firestop putty for protection of electrical outlet boxes.

1. 3M: MPP+.

2. Hilti: CP 617.

3. Tremco: TREMstop MP Putty Pad.

4. Nelson Firestop Products: FSP AA452, AA439.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): SSP Putty Pads or Electrical Box Insert.

6. Equal.

E. Firestop Sealant: Smoke, gas, and water resistant. For use in horizontal or vertical, concrete, masonry, or gypsum wall assemblies.

1. Single component intumescent sealant for protection of combustible and non-combustible pipe, conduit, and cable penetrations.
a) 3M: CP-25WB+, IC-15WB+, 3000WT.
b) Hilti: FS ONE.
c) Tremco: TREMstop IA+ or FyreCaulk.
d) Nelson Firestop Products: ES1399.
e) Specified Technologies, Inc, (STI): LCI or SSS
Intumescent Firestop Sealant.
f) Equal.

2. Silicone based system provides maximum movement in fire- rated joint applications and pipe penetrations.
a) 3M: 2000+, 2000 NS.
b) Hilti: CP 601S.
c) Tremco: TREMstop Fyre-sil.
d) Nelson Firestop Products: CLK AA529, AA542, AA492.
e) Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): SIL Silicone Firestop SealantSIL300 or SIL300SL (self-leveling).
f) Equal.

3. Acrylic based system that provides movement capability in fire rated joints and seals through penetration applications. a) 3M: FD 150+.
b) Hilti: CP 606.
c) Tremco: TREMstop Acrylic GG.
d) Nelson Firestop Products: FSC3.
e) Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): ES Elastomeric
Firestop Sealant.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
f) Equal.

4. Self-leveling silicone-based firestop sealant for use with through penetrations and construction joints in horizontal floor/ceiling assemblies.
a) 3M: 1000 SL.
b) Hilti: CP 604.
c) Tremco: TREMstop Fyre-sil S.L.
d) Nelson Firestop Products: CLK AA539, AA552.
e) Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): SIL Silicone Firestop, type SIL300SL.
f) Equal.

F. Firestop Wrap Strip: Wrap strip of intumescent, flexible firestop for use with plastic and insulated pipe penetrations. For use in horizontal or vertical, concrete, masonry, or gypsum wall assemblies.

1. 3M: Ultra GS, FS-195.

2. Hilti: CP 648-S, CP 648-E.

3. Tremco: TREMstop SuperStrip or TREMstop WS.

4. Nelson Firestop Products: MCT, MPS.

5. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): SSW Intumescent Wrap Strips, type BLU, BLU2, RED or RED2.

6. Equal.

G. Drywall Track Gaskets: Intumescent cover for drywall ceiling track providing fire, smoke, and acoustical ratings for head-of-wall joints between gypsum walls and concrete floor slabs.

1. Hilti: CFS-TTS Top Track Seal.

2. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): TTG Track Top Gasket.

3. Equal.

H. Fire Rated Cable Pathways: Gangable device modules capable of being retrofitted around existing cables and comprised of steel raceway with built-in intumescent material allowing 0 to 100 percent cable fill and requiring no additional action in the form of plugs, twisting closure, putty, pillow, or sealant to achieve fire and leakage ratings.

1. 3M: Fire Barrier Pass-Through Device.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Hilti: CP 653 Firestop Speed Sleeve.

3. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ-Path Fire Rated Pathway.

4. Equal.

I. Fire Rated Grommet or Disc: For single or dual cable penetrations through the same small opening.

1. Hilti: CFS-D Firestop Cable Disc.

2. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI): EZ-Path Firestop Grommets

3. Equal.

J. Fire Safing, Mineral Fiber, or Ceramic Wool Non-Combustible Insulation:

1. Mineral Fiber: Density 4 pounds per cubic foot, USG
Thermafiber, Johns Manville Industrial Insulation Group (IIG), Roxul AFB, or equal.

2. Ceramic Wool: Density 6 pounds per cubic foot, Johns Manville "Ceramic Fiber Insulation", Unifrax "Fiberfrax" ceramic fiber, or equal. Provide material in tested thickness for required hour rating.
a. Flame Spread: Less than or equal to 25.
b. Smoke developed: Less than or equal to 50.

3. For mineral fiber, provide 20 gage minimum size metal retainer clips and plates for fire safing support in vertical applications and in compliance with tested system design.

K. Supplemental Material: Provide supplementary materials required for complete, fire rated, installation.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Fire stop and smoke seal material shall be tested by an independent testing agency for conformance to Flame (F) and Temperature (T) requirements of ASTM E814/UL 1479, ASTM E1966/UL 2079, or ATSM E2307.

B. Conform to UL Fire Hazard Classification Requirements. Material shall be classified as a fill, void, or cavity material and system for UL through Penetration Firestop System.

C. Material shall be tested and shall display Flame Spread Index of 25 or less, and Smoke Developed Index of 450 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide single component fire stop sealant or putty:

1. Within penetrations subject to movement including conduit, cable bundles, buss duct, and noncombustible pipe.

2. As a sealant or caulking for smoke barrier construction, fire, and smoke dampers, mechanical/electrical framed elements in masonry and gypsum board partition systems, and other
conditions.

B. Provide mineral fiber insulation for fire safing at joints and openings through floor slabs, walls, and partitions not indicated to be grouted, gaskets, sealed or otherwise made sound or air tight in this or other sections. Fire safing shall be packed and wedged solidly from both sides of walls and partitions, and from both top and bottom sides of slabs with noncombustible mineral fiber insulation.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Examine the areas and conditions where fire stops, and smoke seals are to be installed for conditions detrimental to the proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected for rated fire protection.

B. Surface to receive fire stops or smoke seals shall be free of dirt, dust, grease, form release agents, or other matter that would impair the bond of the fire stop material to the substrate or penetrating items. Substrate shall be frost free and when required, dry.

C. Voids and cracks in substrate shall be filled and unnecessary projections removed before installation of fire stops.

D. Assure that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items, which penetrate fire rated construction, have been permanently installed before installation of fire stops. Schedule and sequence the Work to assure that partitions and other construction, which would conceal penetrations, are not installed before the installation of fire stops and smoke seals.

E. Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during, and after installation of fire stops and smoke seals.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Provide installation in accordance with manufacturer’s installation procedures, as required. Install fire stops in accordance with SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS
fire test reports, UL Fire Resistance Directory, Intertek Testing Services Directory or SpecDirect, and reviewed Sample installations.

B. Dam Construction:

1. Install dams when required to properly contain fire stopping materials within openings and as required to achieve fire resistance rating as tested and rated.

2. Provide in conformance with installation requirements for type of floor, wall, and partition construction, and as recommended by fire stop manufacturer.

3. Combustible damming material shall be removed after
appropriate curing. Noncombustible damming material may be left as a permanent component of the fire stop system.

4. Placement of dams shall not interfere with function, or adversely affect the appearance, of adjacent construction.

C. Installation of Single Component Fire Stop Sealant:

1. Provide noncombustible insulation as required to achieve fire resistance rating.

2. Install with manual or powered sealant gun. For up to four hour rating, install to the thickness required by the Listed System Designs as directed for wall and floor applications.

3. Surface of gun grade fire stop sealant shall be tooled in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

4. Remove excess materials from adjacent surfaces within 10 minutes, with either water or other material compatible with sealant and recommended by sealant manufacturer, leaving the Work in a neat, clean condition.

D. Installation of Cementitious Fire Stop Mortar:

1. Mixing: Add dry powder to water and mix with mechanical mixer or hand mixing tools. Ratio and duration of mix shall be as instructed by fire stop mortar manufacturer. Average wet density of mortar shall be 70 pounds per cubic foot (plus or minus 5).

2. Wet surfaces before installation of fire stop mortar. Mortar may be hand installed or pumped into the opening.

3. When installing around layered and grouped cables, vibrate or move the cables slightly to prevent voids from forming between the cables.

4. Exposed surfaces shall be finished with conventional plastering tools before curing.

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
MILLS PARK 07 8413 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS

5. Allow at least 48 hours for initial cure before form removal. For full cure allow 28 days.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas.

B. Repair damaged areas and restore integrity of assembly.

C. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. OWNER will engage a qualified independent inspection agency to inspect through-penetration firestop systems in accordance with ASTM E2174, or joint systems in accordance with ASTM E2393. Manufacturer representatives shall not perform inspections of installed firestopping systems.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

3.6 CLEANUP
A. Clean surfaces adjacent to sealed openings and joints and remove excess of firestopping materials.

B. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 07 9200 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Joint sealants.

2. Preparation for application of sealants.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 03 3543 Bonded Abrasive Polished Concrete Floors

3. Section 06 2000 - Finish Carpentry.

4. Division 08 - Openings.

5. Division 09 - Finishes.

6. Section 10 2813 - Toilet Accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating sealant joint locations, with full-size sealant joint details.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for each sealant material.

C. Material Samples: Submit Samples indicating color range available for each sealant material intended for installation in exposed locations.

D. Certifications: Submit manufacturer’s certification materials comply with requirements specified.

E. Site Samples: At locations required, provide a Sample of sealant for each typical installation, approximately 24 inches long, including joint preparation, backing, sealant and tooling. Allow backing to extend 6 inches beyond end of sealant for inspection of substrate.

F. Test Reports: Submit manufacturer's adhesion compatibility test reports according to ASTM C794 for each substrate.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications of Installer: The Work of this section shall be installed by a firm which has been in the business of installing similar materials for at least five consecutive years; and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of five projects of similar size and scope. Installer shall have applicators trained and approved by manufacturer for performing this Work.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Store in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide a uniform ambient temperature between 60- and 80-degrees F.

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 07 9200 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer: five-year material warranty.

B. Installer: two-year installation/application warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish sealants meeting following in-service requirements:

1. Normal curing schedules are permitted.

2. Non-staining, color fastness (resistance to color change), and durability when subjected to intense actinic (ultraviolet) radiation are required.

B. Furnish the products of only one manufacturer unless otherwise required, sealant colors as selected to match the adjoining surfaces.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated into the work include the following:

1. Bostik, Inc.

2. Dow Corning.

3. GE Silicones.

4. Mameco International.

5. W.R. Meadows, Inc.

6. Nomaco, Inc.

7. Pecora Corporation.

8. Sika Corporation.

9. Sonneborn Building Products Div. ChemRex, Inc.

10. Tremco.

11. USG Corp.

12. Or approved equal.

2.3 MATERIALS
A. Sealants:

1. Sealant 1: Acrylic latex, one-part, non-sag, mildew resistant acrylic emulsion compound complying with ASTM C834, Type S, Grade NS, formulated to be paintable.
a. Tremco Inc., Acrylic Latex Caulk.
b. Pecora Corporation, AC-20.
c. Equal.

2. Sealant 2: Butyl sealant, one-part, non-sag, solvent-release-curing sealant complying with ASTM C1311, gun grade and formulated with a minimum of 75 percent solids.

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 07 9200 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Tremco Inc., Tremco Butyl Sealant.
b. Pecora Corp., BC-158.
c. Equal.

3. Sealant 3: Silicone sealant, one-part non-acid-curing silicone sealant complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. a. Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 790, 791, 795.
b. General Electric Co., Silpruf.
c. Tremco, Inc., Spectrem 1.
d. Pecora Corp., 864.
e. Equal.

4. Sealant 4: One-part mildew-resistant silicone sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
a. Dow Corning Corp., Dow Corning 786.
b. General Electric Co., Sanitary 1700.
c. Tremco, Inc., Proglaze White.
d. Equal.

5. Sealant 5: One-part non-sag urethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25.
a. Sika Corporation, Sikaflex -221e.
b. Equal.

6. Sealant 6: Multi-part pouring urethane sealant, complying with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25.
a. Sika Corporation, Sikaflex 2C NS/SL.
b. Equal.

7. Sealant 7: Acoustical sealant, non-drying, non-hardening permanently flexible conforming to ASTM D217.
a. Pecora Corp., BA-98 Acoustical Sealant.
b. Equal.

B. Joint Backing: ASTM D1056; round, closed cell Polyethylene Foam Rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width, reticulated polyolefin foam.

C. Primer: Non-Staining Type. Provide primer as required and shall be product of manufacturer of installed sealant.

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.

E. Sealants shall have normal curing schedules, shall be non-staining, color fast and shall resist deterioration due to ultraviolet radiation.

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 07 9200 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive Work and field tolerances are within the guidelines recommended by sealant manufacturer.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Joints and spaces to be sealed shall be completely cleaned of all dirt, dust, mortar, oil, and other foreign materials which might adversely affect sealing Work. Where necessary, degrease with a solvent or commercial degreasing agent. Surfaces shall be thoroughly dry before application of sealants.

B. If recommended by manufacturer, remove paint and other protective coatings from surfaces to be sealed before priming and installation of sealants.

C. Preparation of surfaces to receive sealant shall conform to the sealant manufacturer's specifications. Provide air pressure or other methods to achieve required results. Provide masking tape to keep sealants off surfaces that will be exposed in finished Work.

D. Etch concrete or masonry surfaces to remove excess alkalinity unless sealant manufacturer's printed instructions indicate that alkalinity does not interfere with sealant bond and performance. Etch with 5 percent solution of muriatic acid; neutralize with dilute ammonia solution, rinse thoroughly with water and allow to dry before sealant installation.

E. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C804 for solvent release sealants, and ASTM C962 for elastomeric sealants.

F. Protect elements surrounding Work of this section from damage or disfiguration.

3.3 SEALANT APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Location Type Color
A. Exterior and Interior joints in Sealant 6 To match adjacent horizo
ntal surfaces of concrete, material
between metal and concrete
masonry and mortar.

B. Exterior door, entrance, and window Sealant 3 or 5 To match adjacent frames. Exterior and in
terior vertical material
joints in concrete and masonry
metal flashing.

C. Joints within glazed curtain wall Sealant 3 Translucent or system. Skylight framing system.

Black
Aluminum entrance system
glass and glazing.

D. Interior joints in ceramic tile Sealant 4 Translucent or White and at plu
mbing fixtures.

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 07 9200 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
E. Under thresholds. Sealant 2 Black
F. All interior joints not Sealant 1 To Match Adjacent
otherwi
se, scheduled Surfaces
G. Heads and sills, Sealant 7 Match Adjacent
perime
ters of frames Surfaces
and other openings in
insulated partitions

3.4 APPLICATION
A.

Provide sealant around all openings in exterior walls, and any other locations indicated or required for structure weatherproofing and/or waterproofing.

B. Sealants shall be installed by experienced mechanics using specified materials and proper tools. Preparatory Work (cleaning, etc.) and installation of sealant shall be as specified and in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations.

C. Concrete, masonry, and other porous surfaces, and any other surfaces if recommended by manufacturer, shall be primed before installing sealants.

Primer shall be installed with a brush that will reach all parts of joints to be filled with sealant.

D. Sealants shall be stored and installed at temperatures as recommended by manufacturer. Sealants shall not be installed when they become too jelled to be discharged in a continuous flow from gun. Modification of sealants by addition of liquids, solvents, or powders is not permitted.

E. Sealants shall be installed with guns furnished with proper size nozzles.

Sufficient pressure shall be furnished to fill all voids and joints solid. In sealing around openings, include entire perimeter of each opening, unless indicated or specified otherwise. Where gun installation is impracticable, suitable hand tools shall be provided.

F. Sealed joints shall be neatly pointed on flush surfaces with beading tool, and internal corners with a special tool. Excess material shall be cleanly removed. Sealant, where exposed, shall be free of wrinkles and uniformly smooth. Sealing shall be complete before final coats of paint are installed.

G. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are indicated on Drawings or specified.

H. Partially fill joints with joint backing material, furnishing only compatible materials, until joint depth does not exceed 1/2-inch joint width. Minimum joint width for metal-to-metal joints shall be 1/4 inch. Joint depth shall be not less than 1/4 inch and not greater than 1/2 inch.

I. Install sealant under sufficient pressure to completely fill voids. Finish exposed joints smooth, flush with surfaces or recessed as indicated. Install non-tracking sealant to concrete expansion joints subject to foot or vehicular traffic.

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS
MILLS PARK 07 9200 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
J. Where joint depth prevents installation of standard bond breaker backing rod, furnish non-adhering tape covering to prevent bonding of sealant to back of joint. Under no circumstances shall sealant depth exceed 1/2 inch maximum, unless specifically indicated on Drawings.

K. Prime porous surfaces after cleaning. Pack joints deeper than 3/4 inch with joint backing to within 3/4 inch of surface. Completely fill joints and spaces with gun applied compound, forming a neat, smooth bead.

3.5 MISCELLANEOUS WORK
A. Sealing shall be provided wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture leakage. Refer to Drawings for condition and related parts of Work.

B. Install sealants to depths as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by sealant manufacturer but within following general limitations:

1. For joints in concrete walks, slab and paving subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 3/4 inch deep or less than 3/8 inch deep, depending on joint width.

2. For building joints, fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but not more than 1/2 inch deep or less than 1/4 inch deep.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of them off the Project site.

3.7 CURING
A. Sealants shall cure in accordance with manufacturer's printed recommendations. Do not disturb seal until completely cured.

3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 07 9201

SEALANTS FOR ROOF REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 07 9201 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements related to the installation of sealants associated with sheet metal flashing work.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures
B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements
C. Section 02 4100 – Roof Removal and Substrate Preparation D. Section 07 6000 – Flashing and Sheet Metal
E. Section 07 6207 – Sheet Metal for PVC Roofing
F. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Reference standards of the following sources are applicable to products and procedures specified in Part 2 - Products and Part 3 – Execution of this Section:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
a. ASTM C 920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to the start of work, submit the following to the City for approval:

1. Product submittals required within Section 01 3300.

B. Refer to Section 01 3300 for procedural requirements related to the submittal process.

SEALANTS FOR ROOF REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 07 9201 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
have a minimum of 5 years documented experience certified by roofing system manufacturer.

D. Upon examination, if conflicts between the technical specifications and drawings, and those of federal, state, or local regulatory agencies, the product manufacturer, industry roofing standards, or City-mandated requirements are discovered, notify the City immediately for resolution.

E. During work, if conditions are discovered which do not allow for continuation of the work per the technical specifications and drawings, notify the City immediately for resolution.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Refer to Section 01 6000 for transport, handling, storage, and product requirements.

B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact.

C. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Protect foam insulation from direct sunlight exposure. Store roll materials standing on end.

D. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on previously completed roofing.

SEALANTS FOR ROOF REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 07 9201 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
the manufacturer.

B. Cold weather precautions:

1. Refer to the sealant manufacturer for cold weather application recommendations and restrictions.

C. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) of all specified products shall remain on site for the duration of this project.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 SEALANT
A. Sealant: Moisture-cured, non-sag, one-part polyurethane sealant, in compliance with ASTM
C 920, Type S, Grade NS. Color to match sheet metal or as directed by City.

1. Closed-cell backing materials, bond breakers, and primers as recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint conditions encountered.

B. High temperature sealant: For use at high-temperature penetrations and other locations where high temperatures are anticipated: Product type approved by City for temperature and substrate condition encountered.

C. Sealant primer: Type recommended and approved by sealant manufacturer for substrate encountered.

D. Joint filler, backer rod and bond breaker tape:

1. Product(s) recommended and approved by sealant manufacturer for substrate encountered.

2. Size and configuration as necessary for condition encountered.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEALANT INSTALLATION
A. Cleaning: Clean surfaces immediately before installation of sealants to provide surfaces suitable for the installation of sealant.

B. Joint filler, backer rod, and bond breaker tape: Install joint filler and backer rods to result in minimum sealant depth of 1/4-inch and maximum of 1/2 the joint width. If joint is of insufficient depth to receive joint filler or backer rod, install bond breaker tape to the bottom of the joint to prevent sealant bonding to the joint bottom.

C. Primer: Apply primer if required by the sealant manufacturer for the type SECTION 07 9201

SEALANTS FOR ROOF REPLACEMENT
MILLS PARK 07 9201 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
of sealant and conditions encountered. Apply primer in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements and recommendations.

D. Sealant installation: Install sealant where required in accordance with the requirements and recommendations of the sealant manufacturer. Tool the joint immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Hollow Metal doors and frames.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware coordination.

2. Section 09 9113 – Exterior Painting: Field painting and finishing of doors and frames.

3. Section 09 9123 – Interior Painting: Field painting and finishing of doors and frames.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 152 - Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

2. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheets, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1996.

B. Door Hardware Institute (DHI):

1. DHI - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware.

2. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware.

C. Steel Door Institute (SDI):

1. SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames.

2. SDI-105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 3300 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Indicate door materials, gauges, configurations, and location of cut-outs hardware reinforcement, and finish.

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Shop Drawings: Indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut-outs for louvers.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

B. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging.

C. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, Incorporated,

2. Ceco Door Products,

3. Curries Company,

4. Republic Builders Products,

5. Steelcraft,

6. Or approved equal

2.2 FRAME CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Provide fully welded steel frames with integral stops and trim for doors, transoms, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other openings, and with details indicated for type and profile. Use concealed fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Steel shall be free of scale, pitting, coil breaks or other surface blemishes, and free of buckles, waves, or other defects.

B. Metal Thickness of Frames (minimum):

1. Interior hollow metal frames up to 4-foot wide 16-gage; steel knock down S- series Frames with Trim for installation in wood stud gypsum board partitions. Commercial quality Carbon Steel ASTM A1008.

2. Interior hollow metal frames wider than 4-foot wide 14-gage; steel knock down S-series Frames with Trim for installation in wood stud gypsum board partitions. Commercial quality Carbon Steel ASTM A1008.

3. Exterior Frames: 14 gage, cold-rolled steel, mitered and welded, 2-inch profile, for installation in a metal or wood stud and gypsum board partition SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate from at least 16-gage, galvanized steel sheet.

Frame anchors shall comply with fire rated label requirements of opening.

1. Floor Anchors:
a. Minimum thickness: 12 gage galvanized steel sheet or bent steel plate, securely fastened inside each jamb, with two holes in anchor at each jamb for 3/8-inch floor anchorage fasteners.

For preframed wood stud walls provide and additional wood stud anchor located as close to the bottom of the jamb as is practical.
b. Where required at sloping and uneven floor conditions, or to coordinate adjustments for trim alignments, provide
adjustable floor anchors, providing at least 2-inch height adjustments.

2. Jamb Anchors:
a. Locate anchors near top and bottom and at intermediate points not to exceed 24 inches on center. Provide two anchors per head for openings up to 48 inches wide; over 48 inches wide provide anchors at 24 inches on center maximum.
b. Anchors in masonry construction: Provide manufacturers standard jamb anchors. Steel wire complying with ASTM
A510, 0.177 inch in diameter, may be furnished.
c. Anchors in Stud Partitions: Provide steel anchors, 16 gage minimum sheet steel, of design to suit partition construction, securely welded inside each jamb.
d. Through-Frame Anchors: At frames indicated to be anchored with bolts through frame, provide countersunk holes for bolts with 16-gauge minimum sheet steel stiffeners full thickness of frame, and securely welded inside each frame at each hole.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A153 Class C or D as required.

E. Head Reinforcing: Refer to Detail #2 of this section. Reinforcing shall not act as lintel or load-carrying member and shall comply with fire rating requirements.

Provide frames regardless of whether a closer is called for.

F. Hardware Reinforcement and Accessories:

1. Butt Hinge: 7 gage minimum.

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Head assemblies: Reinforced internally with, full length, 10 gage angles on each side of frame and bar at bottom of stop for closer reinforcement in frames as shown in Detail #2 of this section.

3. Reinforcing for other items of finish hardware shall be accomplished according to ANSI A250.6.

4. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage galvanized steel plaster guards or dust cover boxes, welded to frame, at back of finish hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings.

5. Door Silencers: Except for exterior doors, drill, and punch frames for three silencers at lock jamb of single swing doors or in double doors with astragal and one silencer per leaf in heads of doubled door frames.

2.3 DOORS CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Custom-made, flush-panel “seamless type” with one-piece face panels; continuous weld, seamless edge construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or on vertical edges.

1. Doors: SDI-100, Level II - Heavy-Duty - 1-3/4-inch, Model 1 - Full Flush Design, 16 gage cold-rolled steel.
a. Exterior doors: Thermal Insulation: Exterior doors shall be insulated with Polystyrene OR noted to R values scheduled or indicated on drawings.
b. Interior Doors: Kraft Honeycomb, Phenolic treated.

2. Labeled Doors: Where fire-rated openings and conditions are indicated. a. Labeled doors shall be provided with fire-resistance rating indicated and shall be constructed as tested and approved by Underwriters’ Laboratories (UL) for installation in labeled frame and door assemblies.
b. Gaskets: Gaskets are supplied under Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. Gaskets and installation shall conform to
requirements of NFPA 105, “Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies.”
c. Fabricate labeled doors with same finished appearance as specified for non-labeled hollow metal doors; with welded door edges, filled and ground smooth; with label affixed to door.

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
d. Where fire labels are required and continuous hinge is specified, install label on top of door within 6” of hinge side of door.

2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber.

2.5 PROTECTIVE COATINGS
A. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion.

B. Primer: Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, treated with Bonderite chemical, and given one baked-on shop coat of grey rust inhibiting primer.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate unit is rigid, neat, and free from warp or buckle. Fabricate KD or welded as specified. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

B. Reinforce units to receive surface applied finish hardware.

C. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide three single rubber silencers for single doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions.

D. Primer: Air dried.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 017300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105.

B. Install doors in accordance with DHI.

C. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, of size, and at locations indicated.

D. Coordinate with adjacent wall construction for anchor placement.

E. Field paint doors and frames as specified in Section 09 9113 & 09 9123.

F. The frame is to be mounted to the studding in such a manner to prevent a spreading of the frame from the studs of less than 1/2 inch.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with Other Work:

1. Coordinate frame installation with size, location, and installation.

2. Coordinate with door opening construction, door frame, and door hardware installation.

B. Site Tolerances:

1. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Field inspection.

B. Inspect metal door and frame installation, alignment, attachment to structure, and operation.

3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust hardware for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Cleaning installed Work.

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1113 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Payment for items of work covered under Division 8 of the plans and these specifications shall be based on the lump sum bid pricing identified in the Bid Schedule. No additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 1613

FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1613 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Aluminum framed; fiberglass reinforced polyester faced doors.

2. Fiberglass door frames.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes, materials, thickness, fabrication methods, door reinforcement, anchorage, and installation details.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data for each item and component proposed for installation.

C. Samples: Submit 6-inch by 6-inch Samples of face sheet finish in each available color. Color as selected by Architect.

D. Test Reports: Submit test reports for face sheet material, indicating compliance with referenced standards.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Supply hardware to door manufacturer for installation on doors prior to shipment. Provide and distribute copies of Shop Drawings to hardware supplier and obtain hardware supplier’s verification of details and dimensions.

B. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement:

1. ASTM D256 - Determining Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance of Notched Specimens of Plastic.

2. ASTM D570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.

3. ASTM D1242 - Resistance of Plastic Materials to Abrasion.

4. ASTM D2583 - Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means of a Barcol Impressor.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Doors: Provide protective wrapping as required to protect doors and hardware during shipping and storage. Store doors in accordance with manufacturers recommended procedures.

1.5 WARRANTY
A. Provide a five-year manufacturer material warranty.

B. Provide a two-year fabrication and installation warranty.

SECTION 08 1613

FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1613 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Door Manufacturers:

1. Special-Lite, Inc. SL17.

2. United States Aluminum, FRP Flush Panel Door.

3. Commercial Door Systems, F200 Narrow Stile FRP door.

4. Equal.

B. Frame Manufacturers:

1. Oshkosh Door Company, Cor-Guard.

2. Chem-Pruf Door Company.

3. Corrim Company.

4. Equal.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Stiles and rails shall be aluminum alloy with steel tie rod connections.

B. Face sheets shall be full thickness color-bonded fiberglass-reinforced polyester with a pebble-like finish.

C. Core shall be poured in place urethane foam to provide an integral door assembly.

2.3 DOOR CONSTRUCTION
A. Doors: 1 ¾-inch thick, constructed of aluminum alloy rails and stiles, joined with steel tie rods.

B. Core: Foamed-in-place urethane.

C. Face Sheets: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester, 0.120 inch thick, with pebble-like finish. Color shall be permanently bonded through the full thickness of the fiberglass face sheet.

D. Provide reinforcement for finish hardware items. Mortise, drill, and tap to template requirements for mortise type hardware. Reinforcement shall be installed before foam core is installed.

E. Pull Handle: Recessed pull handle, as selected by the Architect.

2.4 FRAME CONSTRUCTION
A. Reinforced, fiberglass reinforced polymer (FRP).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DOOR INSTALLATION
SECTION 08 1613

FIBERGLASS DOORS AND FRAMES
MILLS PARK 08 1613 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Adjust operable parts for correct function.

3.2 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, waste and debris and legally dispose of off the Project site.

3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 3100

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
MILLS PARK 08 3100 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Fire-resistive rated access door and frame units.

2. Non-fire-resistive rated access door and frame units.

3. Wall and ceiling locations.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data: Sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate exact position of all access door units.

B. Section 01 7704 - Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Accurately record the following:
a. Actual locations of all access units.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

SECTION 08 3100

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
MILLS PARK 08 3100 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. J.L. Industries, Bloomington, MN (612) 835-6850. (800) 554-6077.

2. Karp, Maspeth, NY (800) 888-4212.

3. Larsen's Manufacturing Company, Minneapolis, MN (800) 527-7367.

4. Milcor, Holland, OH (800) 861-6452.

B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.

Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS
A. Non-Fire-Rated: 20 gage recessed steel panel doors to accept field finish of drywall.

B. Fire-Rated Models: 14 gage recessed steel panel doors to accept field finish of drywall.

2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate frames and flanges of 0.058-inch steel.

B. Fabricate door panels of 0.070-inch single thickness steel sheet.

C. Weld, fill, and grind joints to ensure flush and square unit.

D. Hardware:

1. Hinge: 175-degree stainless steel piano hinge heavy duty type concealed constant force closure spring type.

2. Lock: Screwdriver slot for quarter turn cam lock unit.

2.4 FINISHES
A. Base Metal Protection: Prime coat units with alkyd primer. Color as noted on drawings.

SECTION 08 3100

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
MILLS PARK 08 3100 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.

C. Report in writing to Project Manager prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions where indicated on Drawings and required for access.

B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.

C. Position unit to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate with mechanical, electrical, and other Work requiring access units.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Aluminum entrance doors.

2. Aluminum storefronts
B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 1000- Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Wood jamb and head trim.

2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware for same, and coordination.

3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Requirements for glazing.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA):

1. AA-M12 C22 A41.

B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

1. AAMA 605.2.

2. AAMA 701.2.

3. AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B209.

2. ASTM B221.

3. ASTM A36/A36M.

4. ASTM A386.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Aluminum entrances and storefront system includes tubular aluminum sections, shop fabricated, factory finished, glass and infill, related flashings, anchorage, and attachment devices. System is to be glazed from the interior or exterior.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures; Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples:

1. Product Data:
a. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, and internal drainage details.

2. Shop Drawings:
a. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work and expansion and contraction joint location and details.

3. Samples:
a. Aluminum Extrusions: Submit one sample 12 inches (300 mm) long in size illustrating finished aluminum surface.
b. Glazing: Submit one sample 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating finished aluminum glass units, and glazing materials.

4. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Section 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Special Warranty: Submit written special warranty with forms completed in Owner name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years’ documented experience.

2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with a minimum of 5 years documented experience.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

B. Handle Products of this section in accordance with AAMA - Curtain Wall Manual #10.

C. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or spray coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather.

SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Jobsite Requirements:

1. Install sealants and glazing only when the temperature is 40 degrees F. or greater.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Energy Efficiency:

1. Exterior framing system: Provide frame with thermal break for exterior framing systems; provide weather-stripping for doors in exterior frame.

1.9 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 7000 –Execution and Closeout Procedures: Procedures for closeout submittals.

B. Special Warranty:

1. The manufacturer/installer shall warrant the product and installation to be free from defective material and workmanship for a period of two years after date of substantial completion and shall replace or repair any defective component or system, in whole or part, as necessary to restore the product to its original intended state and integrity.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Kawneer Company, Incorporated, Atlanta, GA

2. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products. a. Assa Abloy
b. Amarlite Architectural Aluminum and Glass Co
c. EFCO Corporation; Monett, MO
d. U.S. Aluminum Corporation, Waxahachie, TX

3. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221.

SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209.

C. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; shaped to suit a million sections.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Framing System: Trifab VG 451T framing system Center Set – Screw Spline Assembly – Outside Glazed (1“ infill), by Kawneer, 2-inch x 4-1/2-inch nominal dimension, minimum wall thickness of 0.080-inch, extruded aluminum flush glazed framing system with thermal break.

B. Receptor Channel: Model No. 450-038 and 65-025, by Kawneer Company, Inc.

Finish to match that of storefront system.

2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glazing Materials: As specified in Section 08 8000.

B. Glazing Gaskets:

1. Manufacturer's standard compression types

2. Replaceable, extruded EPDM rubber
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks:

1. Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type
D. Bond-Breaker Tape:

1. Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants for structural-sealant-glazed systems as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant:
a. ASTM C 1184
b. Single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with the system components with which it comes in contact c. Specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in the aluminum-framed systems indicated
d. Color: Black

2. Weather seal sealant:

SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O b. Single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with the structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact
c. Recommended by structural-sealant, weather seal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use
d. Color: Matching structural sealant

2.5 ENTRANCE DOORS
A. Doors: Series 350 swing door, medium stile, by Kawneer Company, Inc. Door sizes indicated on Drawings.

1. Vertical Stile: 3-1/2-inch, single piece.

2. Top Rail: 3-1/2-inch, single piece.

3. Bottom Rail: 10-inch, single piece.

4. Dual glazing: 1/4-inch-thick units per Section 08 8000, with standard bevel glass stops.

2.6 SEALANT MATERIALS
A. Sealant and Backing Materials:

1. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9200.

2. Sealant Used Within System (Not Used for Glazing): Type as specified in Section 07 9200.

2.7 HARDWARE
A. Verification of hardware components specified in Section 08 7100.

2.8 FINISHES
A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Architectural Class I anodic coating, AA-M12 C22 A44, Clear Anodize, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.

B. Maintain same color range on doors, frames, and other components. Do not mix light and dark shades.

C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq. ft.

D. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.

SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install wall system and fixed windows in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.

D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.

E. Install glass in accordance with Section 08 8000.

F. Install perimeter sealant, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 9200.

G. Install hardware using templates provided. Refer to Section 08 7100 for installation requirements.

3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Adjusting installed work.

B. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.

SECTION 08 4113

ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
MILLS PARK 08 4113 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.4 CLEANING
A. Section 01 7000 – Execution and Closeout Procedures: Cleaning installed work.

B. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.

C. Wash down exposed surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

D. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes Mechanical door hardware
B. Related Sections:

1. Division 06 Section “Rough Carpentry”

2. Division 08 sections for doors and frames with hardware specified in this section.

3. Division 09 sections for touchup, finishing or refinishing of existing openings modified by this section.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL, LLC

1. UL 10B - Fire Test of Door Assemblies

2. UL 10C - Positive Pressure Test of Fire Door Assemblies

3. UL 1784 - Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies

4. UL 305 - Panic Hardware
B. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute

1. Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule

2. Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware

3. Keying Systems and Nomenclature

4. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware
C. NFPA – National Fire Protection Association

1. NFPA 70 – National Electric Code

2. NFPA 80 – 2016 Edition – Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives

3. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code

4. NFPA 105 – Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies

5. NFPA 252 – Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
D. ANSI - American National Standards Institute

1. ANSI A117.1 – 2017 Edition – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities

2. ANSI/BHMA A156.1 - A156.29, and ANSI/BHMA A156.31 - Standards for Hardware and Specialties
SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. ANSI/BHMA A156.28 - Recommended Practices for Keying Systems

4. ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A - Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors

5. ANSI/SDI A250.8 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 01 Submittal Procedures.

1. Product Data: Submit technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements.

2. Riser and Wiring Diagrams: After final approval of hardware schedule, submit details of electrified door hardware, indicating:

3. Door Hardware Schedule: Submit hardware sets in vertical format as illustrated by Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule published by DHI. Indicate complete designations of each item required for each door or opening, include all notes and operational descriptions from hardware groups.

4. Key Schedule: After Keying Conference, provide keying schedule that includes levels of keying, explanations of key system's function, key symbols used, and door numbers controlled. Use ANSI/BHMA A156.28 “Recommended Practices for Keying Systems” as guideline for nomenclature, definitions, and approach for selecting optimal keying system.

5. Templates: After final approval of hardware schedule, provide for doors, frames and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared for door hardware installation.

6. Inspection and Testing: Submit written reports of the results of functional testing and inspection for fire door assemblies, in compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Supplier: Recognized architectural hardware supplier with record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for this Project.

2. Installer: Qualified tradesperson skilled in the application of commercial grade hardware with experience installing door hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality as indicated for this Project.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Certifications:

1. Fire-Rated Door Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA 80, UL 10C, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and NFPA 105.

3. Accessibility Requirements: This project must comply with all Federal Americans with Disability Act regulations and all Local Accessibility Regulations.

C. Pre-Installation Meetings

1. Keying Conference: Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including:

2. Pre-installation Conference: Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Coordinate door hardware with other related suppliers.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for hardware delivered to Project site. Promptly replace products damaged during shipping.

Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner
B. Handle hardware in manner to avoid damage, marring, or scratching. Correct, replace, or repair products damaged during Work. Protect products against malfunction due to paint, solvent, cleanser, or any chemical agent. Maintain manufacturer-recommended environmental conditions throughout storage and installation periods.

1.6 COORDINATION
A. Installation Templates: Distribute doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory or shop prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Existing Openings: Where existing doors, frames and/or hardware are to remain, field verify existing functions, conditions and preparations and coordinate to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide products from manufacturers listed in hardware groups. Additional alternate products require prior written approval from Owner and are contingent upon those products providing all functions, features, and meeting all requirements of scheduled manufacturer’s product.

2.2 MATERIALS
A. Provide hardware with options specified in the hardware sets, fasteners provided by hardware manufacturer, strikes provided by hardware manufacturer, drop plates, special templates, and other devices necessary for proper hardware installation.

B. Provide necessary fillers, Dutchmen, reinforcements, and fasteners, compatible with existing materials, as required for mounting new opening hardware and to cover existing door and frame preparations. When modifying existing fire-rated openings, provide materials permitted by NFPA 80 as required to maintain fire-rating.

C. Provide each electrified hardware item and wire harnesses with enough and wire gauge with standardized Molex plug connectors to accommodate electric function of specified hardware.

2.3 HINGES: IVES 3CB SERIES
A. Provide 3-knuckle concealed bearing hinges conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.1. Provide hinges in the size, quantity, weight, and base metal according to manufacturer’s published recommendations. Provide non- removable pins at out-swinging lockable doors. Adjust hinge width as required for door, frame, and wall conditions to allow proper degree of opening.

2.4 FLUSH BOLTS: IVES
A. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to 90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.5 COORDINATORS: IVES
A. Where pairs of doors are equipped with automatic flush bolts, an astragal, or other hardware that requires synchronized closing of the doors, provide bar- type coordinating device, surface applied to underside of stop at frame head.

Provide filler bar of correct length for unit to span entire width of opening, and appropriate brackets.

2.6 MORTISE LOCKS: SCHLAGE L9000 SERIES
A. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1, and UL Listed for 3-hour fire doors.

2.7 SLIDING DOOR LOCKS: ACCURATE
A. Provide mortise sliding door locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset.

2.8 EXIT DEVICES: VON DUPRIN 98/35A SERIES
A. Provide smooth touchpad exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height with flush end caps. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project.

2.9 EXIT DEVICES : VON DUPRIN 99/33A SERIES
A.

Provide grooved touchpad exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1 and UL listed for Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. Touchpad must extend a minimum of one half of door width. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height with flush end caps. Install exit devices at height recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by Architect. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors or provide spacers to fill gaps behind devices. Provide exit devices with optional trim designs to match other lever and pull designs used on the project.

2.10 CYLINDERS
A. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: existing key system SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Provide cylinders/cores to match existing key system compliant with ANSI/BHMA A156.5; latest revision; cylinder face finished to match lockset; manufacturer’s series as indicated. Refer to “KEYING” article, herein. Consult building locksmith for existing key system information.

2.11 KEYING:

A. EXISITING SYSTEM: Provide cylinders/cores keyed into Owner’s existing keying
system. Comply with guidelines in ANSI/BHMA A156.28, incorporating decisions made at keying conference. Contact: Raymond Velasco B. As Directed by Owner: Provide permanent cylinders/cores keyed by the manufacture
r according to the Master Keying system and forward to Owner separately from keys. Forward bitting list and keys separately from cylinders in proper quantities. Mark permanent cylinders/cores and keys with applicable blind code for identification. Do not provide blind code marks with actual key cuts. Failure to comply with these requirements will cause replacement of cylinders/cores/keys involved at no additional cost to Owner. a. 5 keys per change
b. 5 master keys
c. 3 control keys

2.12 SURFACE CLOSERS: LCN 4040XP SERIES
A. Provide cast iron door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory.

2.13 DOOR TRIM: IVES
A. Provide push plates, push bars, pull plates, pulls, and hands-free reversible door pulls with diameter and length as scheduled.

2.14 PROTECTION PLATES: IVES
A. Provide protection plates with beveled four edges as scheduled. Size plates 2 inches (51 mm) less width of door on single doors, pairs of doors with a mullion, and doors with edge guards. Size plates 1 inch (25 mm) less width of door on pairs without a mullion or edge guards. At fire rated doors, provide protection plates over 16 inches high with UL label.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2.15 OVERHEAD STOPS AND OVERHEAD STOP/HOLDERS: GLYNN-

JOHNSON
A. Provide overhead stop at doors where specified and where conditions do not allow for a wall stop or floor stop presents tripping hazard.

2.16 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS: IVES
A. Provide door stops at each door leaf. Provide wall stops wherever possible.

Provide concave type where lockset has a push button of thumbturn. Where a wall stop cannot be used, provide universal floor stops. Where wall or floor stop cannot be used, provide overhead stop. Provide roller bumper where doors open into each other, and overhead stop cannot be used.

2.17 THRESHOLDS, WEATHERSTRIPPING, AND GASKETING: ZERO

INTERNATIONAL
A. Provide thresholds, weather-stripping, and gasketing systems as specified and per architectural details. Match finish of other items. Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that meets requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.

2.18 SILENCERS: IVES
A. Provide "push-in" type silencers for hollow metal or wood frames. Provide one silencer per 30 inches (762 mm) of height on each single frame, and two for each pair frame. Omit where gasketing is specified.

2.19 BARN DOOR HARDWARE: SCHLAGE
A. Provide complete sets of sliding door hardware as recommended by manufacturer for door type and weight. Include track, channels, brackets, hangers, fasteners, guides, pulls, stops, and other hardware as required for complete installation.

2.20 FINISHES
A. Provide hardware with finishes as indicated in hardware sets.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installation of hardware, examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. Verify doors, frames, and walls have been properly reinforced for hardware installation. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. Submit a list of deficiencies in writing and proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Field verify existing doors and frames receiving new hardware and existing conditions receiving new openings. Verify that new hardware is compatible with existing door and frame preparation and existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where on-site modification of doors and frames is required, prepare hardware locations, and reinstall in accordance with installation requirements for new door hardware and with:

1. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."

3. Doors in rated assemblies: NFPA 80 for restrictions on on-site door hardware preparation.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following, unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.

2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831.

3. Interior Architectural Wood Flush Doors: ANSI/WDMA I.S. 1A

4. Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware: DHI TDH-007-20 B. Install door hardware in accordance with NFPA 80, NFPA 101 and provide post-install inspection, testing as specified in section 1.03.E unless otherwise required to comply with governing regulations.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Install hardware in compliance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommen
dations, using only fasteners provided by manufacturer. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying section. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation.

E. Key Control System: Tag keys and place them on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule.

F. Door Closers: Mount closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors, and stair side of stairway doors from corridors. Mount closers so they are not visible in corridors, lobbies and other public spaces unless approved by Architect.

G. Stops: Do not mount floor stops where they may impede traffic or present tripping hazard.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. Clean operating items per manufacturer’s instructions to restore proper function and finish.

Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. The intent of the hardware specification is to specify the hardware for interior and exterior doors, and to establish a type, continuity, and standard of quality.

However, it is the door hardware supplier’s responsibility to thoroughly review existing conditions, schedules, specifications, drawings, and other Contract Documents to verify the suitability of the hardware specified.

B. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware, and missing items are to be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Hardware items are referenced in the following hardware schedule. Refer to the above specifications for special features, options, cylinders/keying, and other requirements.

D. Hardware Sets:
120509 OPT0391364 Version 1
Lege
nd:
Link to catalog cut sheet
Electrified Opening
Hardware Group No. 01 - HDWR BY MFR
For use on Door #(s):
18 Provide each RU door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 HARDWARE BY DOOR

MANUFACTURER
Hardware Group No. 02 - AL PR EXT
For use on Door #(s):
1 2
Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY  628 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-9849-EO-LBL  626 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-9849-NL-OP-110MD-LBL  626 VON
1 EA FSIC CORE 23-030  626 SCH
2 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 10"  630 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH  689 LCN
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER B/O
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER
SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Hardware Group No. 03 - STOREROOM O/S PR
For use on Door #(s):
3 14
Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE
1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P  630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB  628 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH  689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE
Hardware Group No. 03A - STOREROOM O/S EXT PR
For use on Door #(s):
9 10 17
Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP  630 IVE
1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P  630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG13  630 IVE
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB  628 IVE
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP CUSH  689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SET GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER
SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Hardware Group No. 03B - STOREROOM I/S PR
For use on Door #(s):
13 Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

RH DOOR
 652 GLY
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ  689 LCN
1 EA FLUSH CEILNG MTG
PLATE
4040XP-18G (AS REQ.)  689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV

LH DOOR
 630 IVE
2 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE
Hardware Group No. 03C - STOREROOM O/S PR EXIST
For use on Door #(s):

E2
Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

OMIT IF NOT FR
 BK ZER
2 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE
FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE ORDERING HARDWARE AS REQ.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 13

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Hardware Group No. 04 - AL AUTO OPERATOR SOLA BACKUP OFFICE For use on Door #(s):
4 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA CONT. HINGE 112XY  628 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE

LOCK W/ INSIDE

INDICATOR
ND50RD RHO IS-LOC  626 SCH
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6400 FSE 12/24 VAC/VDC   630 VON 1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9530/9540 SERIES   ANCL
R
LCN
4 EA ACTUATOR, TOUCH 8310-852   630 LCN
1 EA POWER SUPPLY SOLA LCN
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE
1 SEALS BY DOOR MANUFACTURER B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-4RL 900-BBK
120/240 VAC
  VON
Hardware Group No. 05 - HM DUTCH DOOR EXT
For use on Door #(s):
5 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5  630 IVE
1 EA DUTCH DOOR BOLT 054  626 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE

LOCK W/ INSIDE

INDICATOR
ND50RD RHO IS-LOC  626 SCH
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS13/17  626 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SET GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER

SHELF BY DUTCH DOOR MFR
SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 14

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Hardware Group No. 06 - RESTROOM EXT
For use on Door #(s):
6 8
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5  630 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG13  630 IVE
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SET GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER
Hardware Group No. 07 - HM I/S EXT STOREROOM
For use on Door #(s):
7 Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5  630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA LOCK GUARD LG13  630 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ  689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SET GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER
Hardware Group No. 08 - HM STOREROOM FR O/S WS
For use on Door #(s):
11 12
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ  689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE
1 EA GASKETING 488SBK PSA  BK ZER
SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 15

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Hardware Group No. 09 - RESTROOM I/S
For use on Door #(s):
15 16
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5  652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ  689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA MOP PLATE 8400 4" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV  630 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE
Hardware Group No. 10 - JANITOR EXISTING
For use on Door #(s):

E1
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

OMIT IF NON FR
 BK ZER
3 EA SILENCER SR64  GRY IVE
FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE ORDERING HARDWARE AS REQ.

Hardware Group No. 11 - EXTERIOR HM EXISTING
For use on Door #(s):

E3
Provide each SGL door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP  630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ  689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS444  626 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SET GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER
FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE ORDERING HARDWARE AS REQ.

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE
MILLS PARK 08 7100 - 16

BLDG RENOVATIONS
Hardware Group No. 12 - EXIST HM EXT PR
For use on Door #(s):

E4
Provide each PR door(s) with the following:

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP  630 IVE
1 EA AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P  630 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80RD RHO  626 SCH
1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL X MB  628 IVE
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ

LHR LEAF
 689 LCN
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH

RHR LEAF
 689 LCN
2 EA KICK PLAT 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS  630 IVE
1 EA FLOOR STOP FS444  626 IVE
1 EA RAIN DRIP 142AA - OMIT AT COVERED  AA ZER
1 SET GASKETING 50AA-S  AA ZER
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A  A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 545A OR AS DETAILED  A ZER
FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS BEFORE ORDERING HARDWARE AS REQ.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Insulated tempered glass units, low E.

2. Tempered glass units, low E.

B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Section 01 010 - Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.

2. Section 08 4113 – Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

2. ASTM C1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

3. ASTM C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.

4. ASTM D2000 - Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications.

5. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems.

C. Consumer Product Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing. CPSC 16 CFR, Part 1201.

D. Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA):

1. FGMA - Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Product Data:

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
a. Glass: Structural, physical, and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, or installation requirements. b. Glazing compound: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements.

2. Samples:
a. Glazing: Submit one sample 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm) in size of each type of glazing, illustrating tinting, and finish of glazing materials. Label each sample indicating kind, quality, and manufacturer.

3. Assurance/Control Submittals:
a. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
b. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements.

B. Section 01 7704 – Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals.

1. Submit written special warranty with forms completed in Owner name and registered with manufacturer as specified in this section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Identification: Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched, or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed.

B. Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual.

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect Products.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F.

2. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.7 WARRANTY
A. Section 01 7704 - Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals.

B. Special Warranty:

1. Include coverage for cracking, breakage, and replacement of same. a. Warranty Period: 1 year.

2. Include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same.
a. Warranty Period: 10 years
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. Pilkington Libbey-Owens-Ford, Toledo, OH (800)221-0444.

2. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh, PA (412) 434-2858 (800) 377-5267.

3. Viracon, Owatonna, MN (800) 533-2080.

4. OR Equal
B. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions.

Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 GLASS MATERIALS
A. Glass Type 1 - Insulated Glass Units, Low E: Double pane units with inner pane of clear annealed glass and outer pane of tinted annealed glass and film of anti- graffiti film. Coating on inner side of outer panel.

1. Where required by code, provide Glass Type 2 (tempered).

2. Provide anti-graffiti film on exterior side of glass on exterior windows only.

3. Glass Thickness, Inner: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Glass Thickness, Outer: 1/4 inch (6 mm.

5. Tint Color: Gray

6. Visible Reflectance: Maximum 15 percent

7. Visible Transmittance: Minimum 65 percent

8. Unit Thickness: 1 1/2-inch (25 mm) IGU thickness units. 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, clear inner pane with film on the glass. 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, tinted outer pane. 1-inch (12 mm) air space between panes.

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Glass Type 2 - Insulated Tempered Glass Units, Low E: Double pane units with inner pane of clear tempered glass and outer pane of tinted tempered glass and film of anti-graffiti film. Coating on inner side of outer panel.

1. Where required by code, provide Glass Type 2 (tempered).

2. Provide anti-graffiti film on exterior side of glass on exterior windows only.

3. Glass Thickness, Inner: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Glass Thickness, Outer: 1/4 inch (6 mm.

5. Tint Color: Gray

6. Visible Reflectance: Maximum 15 percent

7. Visible Transmittance: Minimum 65 percent

8. Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm) thick units. 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, clear inner pane. 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, tinted outer pane with anti-graffiti film. 1/2-inch (12 mm) air space between panes.

2.3 GLAZING COMPOUNDS
A. Polysulphide Sealant: Two component, chemical curing, non-sagging type; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25.

B. Silicone Sealant: Single component, chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; cured Shore A hardness of 15-25.

1. Color: Clear.

C. Acrylic terpolymer compounded especially for glazing, non-hardening, non- staining, and non-bleeding.

2.4 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Setting Blocks: Resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness; compatible with glazing sealant.

B. Spacers: Resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness; self-adhesive on one side; compatible with glazing sealant.

C. Filler Rods: Closed cell or jacketed foam rods of polyethylene, butyl, neoprene, polyurethane, or vinyl; compatible with glazing sealant.

D. Joint Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer.

E. Gaskets: ASTM D2000, SBC 415 to 3BC 620; extruded or molded neoprene or EPDM, black.

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Mastic: Non-solvent type adhesive as recommended by mirrored glass manufacturer.

G. Glazing Tape: Poly-isobutylene based sealant tape, conforming to AAMA 804.1, with adhesive on one side protected by temporary paper cover, Extru-Seal manufactured by Pecora Corp., No. 303 by Protective Treatments, Inc., or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

1. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.

2. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

B. Report in writing to Project Manager prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.

B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

3.3 GLAZING
A. Locate setting blocks at quarter points of sill; set in sealant if heel or toe bead is required.

B. Install spacers inside and out except where pre-shimmed tape or glazing gaskets are to be used.

C. Set each piece in a series to other pieces in pattern draw, bow, or other visually perceptible characteristics.

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
D. Provide glazing sealants and gaskets as required for glazing application.

Coordinate with other Sections for material compatibility.

E. Gaskets:

1. Provide adequate anchorage, particularly for driven-in wedge gaskets.

2. Miter and weld end of channel gaskets at corners to provide continuous gaskets.

3. Seal face gaskets at corners with sealant to close opening and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners.

F. Do not leave voids in glazing channels except as specifically indicated or recommended by glass manufacturer. Force sealant into channel to eliminate voids. Tool exposed surfaces to slight wash away from joint. Trim and clean promptly.

G. Do not allow sealant to close weeps of aluminum framing.

H. Provide filler rod where sealants are used in the following locations:

1. Head and jamb channels.

2. Colored glass over 75 united inches in size.

3. Clear glass over 125 united inches in size.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION
A. Interface with Other Work: Coordinate glazing with installation of entrances specified in Section 08 11130 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames and 08 4113 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts.

3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements: Field testing and inspection.

B. Inspect preparation and installation of glass.

3.6 CLEANING
A. Section 01 7300 – Execution: Cleaning.

B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

C. Remove labels after Work is complete.

D. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING
MILLS PARK 08 8000 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements: Completion and Inspection.

B. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.

Do not mark reflective or Spandrel glass units.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 08 6000

SKYLIGHTS
MILLS PARK 08 6000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Furnish all labor, material, and services requi red to complete fabrication and shipment of skylights as specified herein.

B. Work is limited to skylight system only and inc ludes the following.

1. Thermal aluminum vinyl frame system.

2. Glazing and glazing gaskets.

3. Factory installation or installation by factory approved contractor with site supervision as required.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 6000 - Flashing and Sheet Metal.

B. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

C. Section 08 8000 - Mirrored Glass Glazing.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. Aluminum Association (AA) M12C22A41 - Anodized Plus Finish.

B. Aluminum Association (AA) M12C22A32/A34 - Color anodized: Class II, Color Anodic Finish.

C. American Architectural Manufacturer's Associati on (AAMA) 501.2 - Quality Assurance and Diagnostic Water Leakage Field Check of Installed Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems.

D. Architectural Aluminum manufacturers Associatio n (AAMA) 607.1 - Voluntary Guide Specifications and Inspection Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum.

E. Architectural Aluminum Manufactures Association (AAMA) 612 - Voluntary Specifications and Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Combined Coatings of Anodic Oxide and Transparent Coatings on Architectural Aluminum, for Finishes such as Anodized Plus.

F. American Society for Testing and Materials (AST M) B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

G. American Society for Testing and Materials (AST M) C1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass.

H. American Society for Testing and Materials (AST M) E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors SECTION 08 6000

SKYLIGHTS
MILLS PARK 08 6000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

I. American Society for Testing and Materials (AST M) E773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

J. American Society for Testing and Materials (AST M) E774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units.

K. AWS Structural Welding Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on ea ch product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommend ations.

3. Indicate materials, finishes and installation p rocedures recommended by manufacturer.

4. Indicate compliance with specified design crite ria.

5. Indicate compliance with performance requiremen ts.

6. Include product specific glazing details.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate material types, gauges and finishes, f abrication details and installation details.

2. Show glazing types, methods of attachment and t hermal movement provisions.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product spe cified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches square, representing actual product, color, and patterns.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:

1. Skylight manufacturer shall have a minimum of f ive years’ experience in skylight manufacturing, qualified by having performed similar work and having experienced workmen to perform work of type required by contract documents and licensed where appropriate.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. Installer shall be trained and approved by manu facturer.

2. Installer shall have five years’ experience wit h skylight type, size, and SECTION 08 6000

SKYLIGHTS
MILLS PARK 08 6000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
complexity.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packa ging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, a nd materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.8 WARRANTY
A. Skylights are guaranteed for a period of 5 year s from date of purchase against defects in materials or workmanship.

B. Custom skylight systems are guaranteed for a pe riod of 2 years from date of installation against leakage and defects in materials or workmanship.

C. The guarantee is limited to repair or replaceme nt, at manufacturer's discretion, and does not cover freight, installation, or consequential damages.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Royalite Skylights and Ladder Manufacturing, In c.

B. Sunsational Skylights, Inc. Phone number 818-69 6-4774.

C. Wasco Skylights; Phone number 800-888-3589
D. Lane-Aire Manufacturing Corporation; Phone numb er 951-808-3658.

E. Or equal.

F. Requests for substitutions will be considered i n accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000.

2.2 SKYLIGHT PERFORMANCE
A. Load:

1. Deflection of framing members shall not exceed L/180 or 1 inch whichever is less.

SECTION 08 6000

SKYLIGHTS
MILLS PARK 08 6000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Polycarbonate unit skylights shall meet the req uirements of uniform load test ASTM E330 that requires glazing to withstand a positive and negative test pressure of 60 psf.

B. Air Infiltration:

1. Polycarbonate unit skylights shall meet the req uirements of ASTM E283 that allows a maximum air infiltration of 0.06 cfm of the total glazed surface area.

C. Water Infiltration:

1. Polycarbonate unit skylights shall meet the req uirements of ASTM E547/E331 that allows for no water infiltration at a test pressure of 12 psf.

2.3 CURB MOUNT SKYLIGHTS
A. Product: Aluminum Curb Frame Model

1. The skylight shall consist of corrosion resista nt extruded aluminum curb frame, 6063-T5 alloy, with Heliarc welded corners. The skylight curb frame shall have an extruded rigid vinyl thermal break to prevent thermal transfer to interior of building which incorporates a high capacity 8 degree sloped condensation gutter with drainage to exterior, and co-extruded rubber draft seal. Retaining cap frame shall be extruded, mill finish or baked enamel finish, 6063-T5 aluminum alloy with Heliarc welded corners.

2. Glazing shall consist of sealed double domes.

3. Provide skylights with pyramidal glazing.

2.4 MODEL SIZE
A. Model Size:

1. Size to fit existing skylight curb. Contractor to verify size prior to ordering.

2.5 MATERIAL
A. Framing systems shall be extruded aluminum, 606 3-T5 alloy, with extruded rigid vinyl thermal break.

B. Exposed aluminum surfaces shall be standard mil l finish or brown or clear anodized. Custom finishes and colors as scheduled or indicated.

C. Sealants, as designated on drawings, shall be n eutral cure architectural grade silicone.

D. Fasteners shall be stainless steel or cadmium p lated steel. Exposed fasteners to match specified color of adjacent aluminum.

E. Gaskets to be continuous co-extruded vinyl, neo prene, EPDM, or Santoprene rubber held with constant pressure.

SECTION 08 6000

SKYLIGHTS
MILLS PARK 08 6000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Glazing shall be:

1. Plastic glazed units to be double glazed polyca rbonate-cold formed only of thickness and colors as required by design criteria. a. White.

G. Glass Performance:

1. Glass glazed systems shall be double glazed of thickness and colors as required by design criteria.

2. Reflective tempered glass as scheduled.

3. Tempered over laminated glass to meet Building Codes in different areas.

4. Glass is treated as non-combustible for skyligh t applications.

2.6 FABRICATION
A. Skylights shall be factory assembled and shippe d as such. Work which cannot be permanently assembled will be shipped in pre-assembled sections to minimize field assembly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation .

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Installer shall inspect area to receive skyligh ts to determine that the conditions are in accordance with shop drawings and specifications. Any variance shall be recorded in writing and corrections made before beginning installation.

B. Installation shall be in strict accordance with these specifications and the manufacturers’ shop drawings and installation instructions.

C. All materials provided by installer shall be in accordance with those shown on the shop drawings.

3.4 PROTECTION
A. Installer shall remove all labels and protectiv e packaging from components SECTION 08 6000

SKYLIGHTS
MILLS PARK 08 6000 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS
and shall leave the installation free of all heavy construction dirt and sealant smears.

B. Final cleaning and physical protection of all i nstalled materials shall be performed by the general contractor.

C. Protect installed products until completion of project.

D. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products be fore Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 0565

MOISTURE TESTING FOR FLOORING INSTALLATION
MILLS PARK 09 0565 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Moisture, alkali, and bond testing of existing and new concrete slabs on grade and elevated slabs scheduled to receive adhered flooring.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Division 09 Finishes: Flooring Sections.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM D7234 – Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Adhesion Strength of Coatings on Concrete Using Portable Pull-Off Adhesion Testers.

2. ASTM F710 – Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring.

3. ASTM F1869 – Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride.

4. ASTM F2170 – Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes.

1.3 TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform the following tests:

1. At new and existing concrete slabs on grade and below grade:
a. Moisture Vapor Emission Rate testing per ASTM F1869. b. Relative Humidity testing per ASTM F2170.
c. pH testing per ASTM F710.
d. Bond testing per D7234 or manufacturer recommendations.

1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Floor Covering and Adhesive Manufacturers' Product Literature: For each specific combination of substrate, floor covering, and adhesive to be used; indicating:

1. Moisture, humidity, and pH limits.

2. Manufacturer's bond/compatibility test procedure.

SECTION 09 0565

MOISTURE TESTING FOR FLOORING INSTALLATION
MILLS PARK 09 0565 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
B. Test Report: Submit chart form with small scale floor plans showing the location of each test performed.

1. Submit report for relative humidity test in accordance to ASTM F2170. Include pH, moisture vapor emission, and adhesion test results.

2. Indicate areas where the test results exceed the floor covering manufacturer's limits and indicate proposed remediation procedures.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests indicated in this Section shall be performed by CONTRACTOR or a qualified independent testing agency retained and paid for by CONTRACTOR. OWNER may perform testing at its own expense to compare to CONTRACTOR’s test results.

B. Testing kits:

1. Moisture-Vapor Emission: Prepackaged anhydrous calcium chloride test kits conforming to requirements of ASTM F-1869.

2. Alkalinity: Calibrated digital pH meter in accordance with ASTM F-710.

3. Relative Humidity: Relative humidity concrete moisture testing equipment conforming to ASTM F-2170.

C. Chemically based products such as sealers, primers, fillers, and adhesives, shall be approved by the OWNER’s Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS).

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A. Project areas to be tested shall be at the same temperature and humidity expected during normal use. These temperature and humidity levels shall be maintained for 48 hours prior to, and during the testing. If this is not possible, temperature and relative humidity ranges shall be within ranges indicated in the applicable ASTM test method.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION
A. Testing shall take place after allowing concrete to dry for a minimum of 90 days.

B. Prior to test placement, CONTRACTOR shall clean concrete slabs and have them free of foreign substances, such as residual adhesives, curing or hardening compounds, adhesive removers, sealers, paints, and other foreign materials that might prevent adhesive bond. These materials shall be SECTION 09 0565

MOISTURE TESTING FOR FLOORING INSTALLATION
MILLS PARK 09 0565 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
removed not less than 24 hours prior to the placement of the test kits.

Testing when floor coverings have never been installed may waive the 24- hour wait period.

C. The test site temperature and humidity shall be in conformance to Article “Environmental Conditions.”
D. Minimum number of tests: For Moisture Vapor Emission Rate, Relative Humidity, and pH testing, provide three for the first 1,000 square feet of floor area, and at least one for each additional 1,000 square feet or fraction thereof.

3.2 MOISTURE VAPOR EMISSION TESTING (MVEP)
A. MVEP testing shall be performed in accordance to ASTM F1869.

B. Unless more stringent requirements are recommended by flooring manufacturer, the maximum allowable moisture release at time of flooring installation shall be three pounds per 24 hours per 1,000 square feet.

C. Weigh test dish on site prior to start of test. Scale must report weight to 0.1 grams. Record weight and start time. Expose Calcium Chloride and set dish on concrete surface. Install test containment dome and allow test to proceed for 60 – 72 hours.

D. Retrieve the test dish by carefully cutting through containment dome. Close and reseal test dish. Weigh test dish on site recording weight and stop time.

Calculate and report results as "pounds of emission per 1,000 sq. ft. per 24 hours".

E. In the event the MVEP value exceeds the value specified in this Article and the flooring manufacturer recommended limits, CONTRACTOR shall propose remediation to OWNER. In new concrete slab construction, remediation shall be at no cost to OWNER.

3.3 RELATIVE HUMMIDITY TESTING
A. Relative humidity testing shall be performed in conformance to ASTM F2170.

B. Choose test areas where high moisture levels are suspected. Holes in new concrete slabs may be cast or drilled. Depth of holes shall be 40% of slab thickness for slabs drying only from the top, and 20% when drying from top and bottom, as indicated on ASTM F2170. Determine the concrete thickness of each type of slab to be tested and calculate depth of holes.

1. Hole shall be drilled dry; do not use water for cooling or lubrication.

Drill holes in the concrete and insert test liners. Hole shall not be more than 0.04 inches, or one millimeter, larger than the test liner.

2. Before placing concrete, secure liner tube to formwork or steel reinforcing to avoid displacement during concrete placement, consolidation, and finishing. Secure a solid rod into the liner and SECTION 09 0565

MOISTURE TESTING FOR FLOORING INSTALLATION
MILLS PARK 09 0565 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
protruding slightly above the top of the liner to exclude fresh concrete from entering the liner.

C. Clean the area around the hole with a vacuum cleaner and vacuum the dust out of the hole. Immediately, set the sleeve by tapping the sleeve into the hole with a hammer or mallet.

D. Remove the sleeve plug and place probe into the sleeve assuring that it reaches the bottom of the test hole. Connect the probe lead wire to the meter and turn meter on. Allow time for the probe to sit in the test sleeve to achieve moisture equilibrium before taking relative humidity readings. Probe shall be at the same temperature as the concrete before the reading. Check for drift and follow meter manufacturer recommendations.

E. Record the relative humidity to the nearest percent and temperature to the nearest degree. Record location of hole within the structure and depth of probe. Use the relative humidity probe to measure the ambient air temperature and relative humidity above the slab in the vicinity of the test location. Remove the liner and fill the hole with a cementitious patching compound.

F. In the event the relative humidity exceeds 75% and the flooring manufacturer recommended limits, CONTRACTOR shall propose remediation to OWNER.

In new concrete slab construction, remediation shall be at no cost to OWNER.

3.4 PH LEVEL TESTING
A. Perform testing in accordance to ASTM F710, and at the same time as the vapor emission and relative humidity tests.

B. Place several drops of water onto the concrete surface to form a puddle approximately 1” in diameter. Allow the water to set for 60 +/- 5 seconds. Dip the pH paper into the water and remove immediately, compare color to chart provided by paper supplier to determine pH reading. Record and report results.

C. When using pH Pencil and pH Meters, follow the instrument manufacturer’s instructions.

D. The surface of the concrete should have a pH of 9 or less. In the event the pH exceeds this value and the flooring manufacturer recommended pH limits, CONTRACTOR shall propose remediation to OWNER. In new concrete slab construction, remediation shall be at no cost to OWNER.

3.5 BOND TEST
A. Perform bond testing in accordance to ASTM D4541 or per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Select appropriate locations for the bond tests such as near walls or in light traffic areas. Spaced test samples approximately 50 feet apart throughout the designated installation area. Number of tests will be determined by the recommended spacing of 50 feet.

SECTION 09 0565

MOISTURE TESTING FOR FLOORING INSTALLATION
MILLS PARK 09 0565 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Use the flooring material and recommended adhesives. Install 3' x 3' panels using the exact techniques that will be used for the flooring installation. It is recommended that tests be spaced approximately 50 feet apart throughout the designated installation area. Tape edges of panels to prevent edge drying of adhesive. Protect test panel from traffic.

D. After 72 hours of placing the flooring, remove tape and observe whether it is bonded tightly to the floor, by trying to lift the edges with a scraper or other means, or pull flooring from the subfloor by hand. Determine if bonding is suitable for flooring installation.

E. At locations where membrane, primer, leveler, or patch are applied, perform applicable bond testing recommended by flooring manufacturer to assure adequate bondage of flooring to substrate.

F. Success or failure shall be determined by visual interpretation and the amount of physical effort required to remove the floor covering. If the flooring material can be removed, it will indicate failure of the bond test. If the flooring requires a great deal of effort to pull it up, the bond test can be considered successful, providing no sign of moisture is found. If bond failure occurs in new concrete slab construction, remediation shall be at no cost to OWNER.

3.6 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of them off the Project site.

3.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until installation of finish flooring.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Drawings and General and Special Provisions of the Contract, including Division 01 General Requirements Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section Includes:

1. Lath and Portland cement plaster and stucco as indicated.

2. Scratch coat plaster as a substrate for ceramic wall tile.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 07 2100 – Building Insulation.

3. Section 07 2719 – Plastic Sheet Air Barriers.

1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide pre-formulated finish coat products that require only the addition of clean water for mixing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations and details indicating locations and types of components, splices, connections, and accessory items. Indicate locations and types of framing substrates.

B. Material Samples: Submit minimum 48-inch x 48-inch samples of each stucco and Portland cement plaster texture for review. Samples shall be representative of texture, color, and proposed workmanship. Maintain reviewed Samples on Project site for reference.

C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data for each material and component proposed for installation.

D. Certificates: Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed Specification requirements.

E. Mock-ups: Provide a mock-up at least 10 feet x 10 feet x 1 foot. Include at least one control joint and, corner condition and one window opening flashing. Locate where required by the Architect.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Coordinate with related Work to provide backing support for items mounted on finished surfaces and to provide allowances for pipes and other items in wall cavities.

B. Comply with the following ASTM Standard Specifications as a minimum requirement:

1. ASTM C150 – Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

2. ASTM C847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.

3. ASTM C897 – Standard Specification for Aggregate for Job Mixed Portland Cement-Based Plasters.

4. ASTM C926 – Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster.

5. ASTM C932 - Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering.

6. ASTM C1063 - Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement-Based Plaster.

C. Exterior and Interior Lath: Where lath is fastened to wood supports, comply with CBC requirements.

D. Plaster: Conforming to requirements of the Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) Manual published by the Portland Cement Association.

E. Metal Lath: NAAMM Standard ML/SFA 920 Guide Specifications for Metal Lath and Furring.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Protect metal lathing and plastering materials before, during and after installation. In the event of damage, immediately provide required repairs and replacements.

B. Deliver and store Portland cement materials on the Project site in a manner to provide protection from exposure and damage by moisture. Pile materials to permit easy access for proper inspection and identification of each shipment. Stockpile adequate supplies of sand on the Project site to permit sampling and testing before installation. Store to avoid inclusion of foreign material.

C. Deliver plaster materials to the Project site in manufacturer's sealed and labeled packages.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LATH AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Each bundle of lath shall be sealed with a metal tag bearing the lath designation, weight, and manufacturer's name.

B. Water Repellant Backing:

1. Weather-exposed for Horizontal Surfaces: W.R. Grace & Co., "Bituthene 4000" sheet, 0.060-inch-thick, consisting of polyethylene sheet and rubberized asphalt, self-adhering, or equal.

2. Flashing and back-up for joints and reveals W.R. Grace Co. VYCOR

0.040-inch-thick rubberized asphalt, self-sealing and self-adhering, or equal.

C. Adhesives and sealers for water repellant backing: Types as recommended by manufacturer for installation with specified membrane sheet.

D. Expanded Metal Lath: ASTM C847, small diamond mesh expanded metal lath, 3.4 pounds per square yard, expanded from steel sheets with hot-dip galvanized coating G60 in accordance with ASTM A653. Lath shall be V- grooved self-furring type for installation over sheathing and flat type for installation over spaced framing. Install 3/8-inch ribbed lath when framing is over 24 inches on center.

E. Weather Resistive Backing for Metal Lath: Laminated water resistant kraft paper backing conforming to Fed Spec UU-B-790A, Type 1, Grade D60, manufactured by Fortifiber, Davis Wire, Leather back or equal. Furnish for exterior plastering (except on soffits and ceilings), and for mortar-set ceramic wall tile.

F. Cornerite and Striplath: Flat or shaped lath reinforcing units, galvanized expanded metal weighing no less than 2.5 pounds per square yard, with 3- inch legs when formed for angle reinforcement and 2-inch minimum legs for galvanized wire type.

G. Plastering Accessories: Minimum 0.0172-inch galvanized steel or 0.0207 zinc alloy with expanded wings. PVC is not permitted. Furnish casing beads, expansion and control joints, weep, and vent screeds.

1. Exterior Stress Relief Joints: Sizes and profiles, indicated or required.

Control joints shall have expanded wings. Manufactured by Amico, Cemco, Dietrich, Keene or Superior.
a. Expansion Joints: Two-piece sections designed to
accommodate expansion, contraction, and shear forces.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
b. Control Joints: One-piece sections, with integral wings, installed as indicated on drawings, where cracks can be expected.

2. Drip Screed: Similar to Superior No. 10.

3. Casing Beads: Expanded flange type with minimum 7/8-inch grounds to establish plaster thickness.

4. Exterior Corner Reinforcement: Welded-wire type as manufactured by Stockton Products, Tree Island Industries Ltd., or Jaenson Wire.

5. Ventilating Screeds: Alabama Metal Industries, or equal, soffit vent screed, perforated web type, with integral plaster grounds.

6. Foundation Weep Screeds: Alabama Metal Industries, or equal, integral plaster ground and weep screed.

H. Fasteners:

1. Screws: USG corrosion resistant.
a. Type S or S-12 for metal studs.
b. Type A for wood and metal studs 20-25 gauge.

2. Wire for fastening lath to metal framing, fastening lath together and fastening corner beads, metal grounds and base screeds to lath and framing shall be 18 gage, galvanized conforming with ASTM A641.

3. Nails: 11 gage galvanized roofing nails, 7/16-inch head, barbed shanks, 1-1/2-inch-long for horizontal application and providing a minimum of 3/4 inch penetration for vertical surfaces. Furnish fiber wadded furring nails for attaching lath to wood sheathing unless self- furred type of plaster reinforcement is approved.

4. Power driven nails shall be used for attaching lath to concrete and concrete masonry. Nails shall be a code recognized fastener such as Pneutek, Inc. fasteners or approved equal. Each fastener shall provide a minimum withdrawal resistance of 50 pounds minimum.

5. Staples: Minimum 3/4-inch crown, 16-gauge galvanized steel. Staples shall have sufficient length to penetrate studs at least 3/4 inch.

I. Wire: Galvanized soft-annealed steel wire in conformance to ASTM A641.

1. Hanger wire for suspended ceilings, minimum 9 gauge.

2. Wire for fastening metal channels together, 16 gauge.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3. Wire for fastening lath to supports, tying ends and edges of lath sheets, and securing accessories to lath, 18 gauge.

2.2 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, low alkali.

B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C206, Type S.

C. Sand: Washed natural sand conforming to ASTM C897, except gradation of sand shall be as follows:

Percentage retained, each sieve, by weight:

Sieve Size Maximum Minimum
No. 4 0 0
No. 8 10 0
No. 16 40 10
No. 30 65 30
No. 50 90 70
No. 100 100 95
D. Water: Clean, potable and from domestic source.

E. Exterior Finish Coat Plaster: Shall consist of one of the following systems:

1. Three Coat Systems: Mineral Stucco as fabricated by California Stucco, La Habra, Highland Stucco, Merlex, Omega Stucco, Inc, or equal. Furnish formulations requiring only addition of water for installation. Sand shall pass No. 20 sieve. Mix and sand shall provide specified finish. Furnish integral colored stucco in color as selected by Architect.

2. Two or Three Coat Systems: Controlled pre-mix with manufacturer’s additives, as fabricated by The Quikrete Companies, SPEC MIX, Omega, EXPO Stucco or approved equal. Furnish formulations requiring only addition of water for installation. Sand shall pass No. 20 sieve. Mix and sand shall provide specified finish. Furnish integral colored stucco finish coat in color as selected by an Architect.

F. Plaster Bonding Agent: "Weld-Crete", manufactured by Larsen Products Co., Upco/Div., Emhart Corp. Bonding Adhesive No. 705, or Merlex Stucco "Acrylex".

G. Base Coat Reinforcement: Alkali resistant fiberglass shorts, 1/2-inch chopped strands, Type AR, manufactured by OCF, PPG Industries, or equal.

H. Plaster Patching Materials:

1. Bonding Agent: Acrylic resin type, Acryl 60, LHP Bonder, or equal.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 6

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Patching Plaster: Manufactured by Merlex Stucco, Inc., Orange, CA, or equal. Furnish fast setting, compatible with existing plaster materials, "Exterior Pronto Patch,” Portland cement base coat material, requiring only addition of water. Material shall provide an initial set within 20 minutes, and final set within one hour.

I. Underlayment: Single ply self-adhesive waterproofing membrane as manufactured by W.R. Grace Company, Jiffy-Seal by Protecto Wrap, or equal. Furnish for installation behind stress relief joints and backing on horizontal and vertical surfaces exposed to weather; under metal copings and flashings; and window jambs and sills.

J. Miscellaneous Material: Provide additional components and materials required for a complete installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that overhead or concealed Work is finished, completed, tested, and inspected as required before starting Work of this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION-WEATHER BARRIER MEMBRANE
A. Install one layer of underlayment over areas to receive lath with weather barrier membrane. Install horizontally with each course weather lapped 2 inches over layer below and 6 inches on ends. Install two layers of kraft paper over wood sheathing; second layer shall lap the first layer.

B. Install lath over underlayment in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

Repair and seal tears and holes in weather barrier prior to applying plaster.

C. Install single ply self-adhesive waterproofing membrane per manufacturer ‘s recommendations in areas indicated on the Drawings.

D. Flashing Around Openings: Install self-adhering, self-sealing membrane to make openings’ weather tight in accordance with details shown on drawings.

3.3 LATH INSTALLATION
A. General: Where exterior and interior lath is fastened to horizontal wood supports, the current edition of the CBC shall be complied with.

B. Exterior Lathing, General: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1063 and ML/SFA 920, whichever is more restrictive.

1. Application of Metal Lath: Metal lath or wire fabric lath shall be installed in accordance with the provisions of CBC current editions.

Lath shall be furred out from vertical supports or backing not less than 1/4 inch.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 7

BLDG RENOVATIONS

2. Self-furring lath meets furring requirements. Furring of expanded metal lath is not required on supports providing a bearing surface width of 1-5/8 inch or less.

3. Where external corner reinforcement is not installed, lath shall be furred out and carried around corners, extending and fastened to at least one support.

4. A weep screed shall be provided at or below foundation plate line on exterior stud walls. Screed shall be installed a minimum of 4 inches above grade and shall be of a type permitting water to drain to exterior of building. Weather-resistant barrier and exterior lath shall cover and terminate on attachment flange of screed.

5. Ends of lath on open framing (unsheathed) shall occur over supports.

Where necessary, install additional studs to provide support for lath ends and support for separate flanges of stress relief joints.

3.4 PLASTER APPLICATION - GENERAL
A. Proportion, mix, apply and cure plaster in conformance with ASTM C926.

B. Install each plaster coat to an entire wall or ceiling panel without interruption to avoid cold joints and abrupt changes in uniform appearance of succeeding coats. Wet plaster shall abut existing plaster at naturally occurring interruptions in plane of plaster (such as corner angles, openings, and control joints) wherever possible. Cut joining, where necessary, square, and straight and at least 6 inches away from a joining in preceding coat.

C. Provide sufficient moisture or curing methods to permit continuous and complete hydration of cementitious materials, considering climatic and Project site conditions. If water cured, each basecoat shall be continuously damp for at least 48 hours, including weekends and holidays. Other curing methods, spray applied curing compounds such as Expo-Cure, or OEHS approved equal are permitted.

D. Provide sufficient time between coats to permit each coat to cure or develop enough rigidity to resist cracking or other damage when the next coat is installed.

3.5 EXTERIOR PLASTERING
A. Concrete surfaces, except where noted as "Exposed Concrete" or "Painted Concrete,” shall be finished with stucco sand finish coats, or as noted on plans.

B. Preparation of Surfaces:

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 8

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Verify that lath has been installed securely and that grounds, screeds, casing beads and other accessories are straight, in correct position, and securely fastened in place.

C. Number of Coats and Thickness: Exterior plaster shall be Portland cement as follows with minimum thickness from face of supports or surfaces to finish face of plaster as follows:

1. Lathed Surfaces:
a. 3 coats, scratch, brown and finish, 7/8-inch-thick, one inch thick where required by CBC.
b. 2 coats, controlled pre-mix single base coat and finish, 7/8- inch-thick, one inch thick where required by CBC.

2. Stucco Sash Finish Coats: 2 coats, 1/8 inch thick or as recommended by the manufacturer.

D. Proportions:

1. Proportion ingredients for Portland cement. Calibrated boxes are required to determine the accuracy of proportioning. Proportions shall adhere to the current edition of CBC.

2. Dash Bond Coat: Mixed in the proportion of 1 cubic foot of standard Portland cement to 1-1/2 cubic feet of sand. Omit dash coat when bonding agent is used.

3. Stucco Finish: Stucco shall be factory prepared, exterior type, colored stucco containing a Portland cement base, required aggregates and mineral pigments. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect.

Selected colors are not limited to standard stock colors and certain Work, such as ceilings, soffits, and walls, may be finished in non- standard colors as selected.

4. Acrylic Based Stucco Finish: Shall be factory prepared exterior type; acrylic based colored stucco finish. Colors and textures shall be as selected by the Architect.

E. Mixing: Provide plaster mix: cementitious materials and aggregate in proportions specified, furnishing only sufficient water to obtain proper consistency before installation. Do not mix any more material at any time than can be installed within 1/2 hour after mixing. Do not allow material to remain in mixer or mixing boxes overnight. The maximum allowable slump shall be 2-1/2 inch, based on a 2 inch by 4 inches by 6-inch slump cone.

F. Application:

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 9

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1. Dash Bond Coat: Dash on concrete or masonry surfaces, leave undisturbed, and maintain damp for at least 24 hours following installation. Omit Dash bond coat when liquid bonding agent is used.

2. Scratch Coat: Install sufficient material to completely cover laths and scratch across supports.

3. Brown Coat: Rod to a straight, true, even within 1/8-inch tolerance in 5 feet of surface and float to receive finish coat.

4. Single Base Coat: As an alternative to scratch and brown coats, apply in conformance to ASTM C926.

5. Stucco Finish Coat: Install in 2 coats to a total thickness of 1/8 inch, each coat covering surface uniformly. The first coat shall completely cover the base coat with uniform color. Second color shall provide a uniform texture.
a. First coat shall be installed by providing several passes with nozzle to completely cover surface.
b. The second coat shall be installed by doubling back the same day, when the first coat is sufficiently dry.
c. Over concrete surfaces, the second coat shall be installed 24 hours after installation of the first coat. In warm weather, the first coat shall be cured by light water spray after the material has been set.
d. Protection: Protect those surfaces, which are not to receive finish coats. Such surfaces shall be shielded and shall have any sand left from work operation removed.

G. Curing Exterior Plaster: Adhere to current edition of CBC for curing requirements.

H. Option for Machine Application, Scratch and Brown Coats, or Single Base Coat: Instead of hand installed plaster, the furnishing of plastering machines for interior or exterior scratch and brown coats or single base coat is permitted. Machine installation shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Qualifications: Provide proper equipment and apparatus.

2. Apparatus: Pump shall be equipped with an air pressure gage and required safety devices. Hoses and connections shall be tight, and pressure shall be maintained constantly.

3. Tests: Tests for determining proper consistency of plaster mix shall be taken at nozzle using slump cone method. Tests shall be observed by the IOR at least twice each day and as often as deemed necessary.

Perform required tests and maintain an accurate log of such tests to SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 10

BLDG RENOVATIONS
ascertain compliance with material slump requirements. Material slump shall not exceed 2-1/2 inches at nozzle. Furnish an adequate number of standard 2-inch x 4-inch x 6-inch slump cones for testing.

Cones shall be on the Project site before Work is started and at all times during performance of the Work of this section.

4. Proportion and Application: Proportioning, mixing, number of coats and thickness shall be same as specified for hand application. Cement aggregate and water shall be mixed to plaster machine. Plaster mix shall be projected into and conveyed through a hose to the nozzle at end of hose and deposited by pressure in its final position ready for manual straightening and finishing.

5. Follow-Up: Perform scoring operation of plaster, based on settings and drying conditions at time of installation. Curing shall be as previously specified.

6. Protection: Before installing any plaster, thoroughly protect other adjacent Work.

3.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. Finish interior and exterior plaster to a uniform texture, free of imperfections and flat within 1/8 inch in 5 feet. Form a suitable foundation for paint and other finishing materials. Avoid joining marks in finish coats.

3.8 TESTING
A. Written certification of sand compliance is required. Samples of sand shall be obtained at the Project site. Tests may be performed as deemed necessary by the IOR.

B. When plastering machine is used, provide a supply of 2-inch x 4-inch x 6- inch-high cones for slump testing of Portland cement plaster. Samples of plaster taken at nozzle shall have a maximum slump of 2-1/2 inches. Plaster material not complying with this requirement shall be deemed defective Work.

3.9 REPAIR REQUIREMENTS FOR DAMAGED PLASTER
A. Plaster Detached from Framing:

1. Remove loose and broken plaster.

2. Repair or replace damaged water-resistant backing and lath in compliance with specified standards.

3. Remove stucco finish from surrounding area in the same plane by sandblasting.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 11

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Install a scratch coat and a brown coat mixed with liquid bonding agent instead of water to the areas devoid of plaster.

5. Install a coat of liquid bonding agent to entire wall plane.

6. Install a 1/8-inch-thick stucco finish coat to the entire wall plane and match existing texture and color.

B. Cracked Plaster 1/8 inch to 1/2 inch:

1. Remove loose material from cracks with a wire brush.

2. Fill crack with slurry of stucco and liquid bonding agent.

3. Install a coat of liquid bonding agent to entire wall plane.

4. Install 1/8-inch-thick stucco finish to entire wall plane and match existing texture and color.

C. Cracks Larger Than 1/2 inch - Painted:

1. Remove loose material from cracks with a wire brush.

2. Fill crack with slurry of one-part Portland cement to 3 parts masonry/stucco sand and liquid bonding agent to match existing texture of adjacent surface.

3. Paint entire wall plane, color to match existing.

4. Where patching plaster over existing lath is feasible, fasten loose lath and install new lath with nails at 6-inch centers. Where metal is furnished, lap new lath over existing 6 inches and tie it at 6-inch centers. Install paper backings as required, shingled into existing.

5. Patching of Holes, Cracks, and Gouges: Holes, cracks, gouges, missing sections, and other defects in existing improvements shall be patched. For holes over 1 inch in size, cut small sections of lath and place in opening attached to existing material. Install 3 coats of plaster.

For holes one inch and smaller, install bonding agent to existing surfaces and neatly fill hole with plaster, installing necessary coats to match adjacent surfaces, eliminate cracks and match existing surface texture. Cracks, gouges, and other defects shall be filled with plaster or spackle as required and superbly finished to match adjacent existing improvements.

3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste material and legally dispose of it off the Project site.

SECTION 09 2400

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER AND METAL LATH
MILLS PARK 09 2400 - 12

BLDG RENOVATIONS

3.11 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 2800

CEMENT BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2800 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Cement board and accessories.

B Related Sections

1. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants.

3. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board.

4. Section 09 3000 – Tile.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. A108.11, American National Standard for Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.

2. A118.1, American National Standard Specifications for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.

3. A118.4, American National Standard Specifications for Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

4. A118.9, Test Methods, and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units.

5. A136.1, American National Standard Specifications for Organic Adhesives for Installation of Ceramic Tile.

B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. C 473, Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.

2. C 1325, Specification for Fiber-Mat Reinforced Non-Asbestos Cement Interior Substrate Sheets.

3. C 1002, Specification for Steel Drill screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases.

4. D 2394, Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-Based Finish Flooring.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Product Data: Manufacturers' specifications and installation instructions for each product specified.

SECTION 09 2800

CEMENT BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2800 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packaging and Shipping: Have materials shipped in manufacturer's origi
nal packages showing manufacturer's name and product brand name.

B. Storage and Protection: Store materials inside and protected from damage by the elements. Protect ends, edges, and faces of cement boards from damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

National Gypsum Company.

1. Cement Board:
a. Tile Backer: PermaBase ® BRAND Cement Board OR Equal. b.

Underlayment: PermaBase BRAND Underlayment OR Equal.

2.2 MATERIALS

Cement Board:

1. Backer Board: Cementitious, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; and complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1325 (PermaBase BRAND Cement Board).
a. Thickness: 5/8 in.
b. Width: 4 ft.
c. Length: 8 ft.
d. Edges: Tapered.
e. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2250 lbs. per sq. in. when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2394.
f. Water Absorption: Not greater than 8 percent when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C 473.

2. Underlayment: Cementitious, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; and complying with ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C.
a. Thickness: 1/4 in.
b. Width: 3 ft. or 4 ft.
c. Length: 4 ft. or 5 ft.
d. Edges: Tapered.
e. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2250 lbs. per sq. in. when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2394.
f. Water Absorption: Not greater than 8 percent when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C 473.

SECTION 09 2800

CEMENT BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2800 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Fasteners:
a. Nail
s: 1-1/2-in. long, hot dipped galvanized, and in accordance with FS FF-N-105B, Type 2, Style 20.
b. Screws: Hi-Lo thread screws (No. 8) wafer head, corrosion- resistant, 1-1/4 in. or 1-5/8 in. long, and complying with ASTM C 1002.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:

In accordance with the following reference standards and manufacturer’s recommendations: ANSI A108.11.

Payment for items of work covered under Division 9 of the plans and these specifications shall be based on the lump sum bid pricing identified in the Bid Schedule.

No additional compensation will be allowed.

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2900 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Walls and Ceilings.

2. Cementitious backer board.

3. Accessories.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Related Sections:

1. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry.

2. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants.

3. Section 09 9100 – Painting.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C1396 – 11 Standard Specifications for Gypsum Board.

B. ASTM C473 – 12 Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products.

C. ASTM C1629 – Standard Classification for Abuse-Resistant Nondecorated Interior Gypsum Panel Products and Fiber-Reinforced Cement Panels.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Level 3 (highest) for hard- and soft-body impact when tested in accordance with ASTM C1629.

B. Average water absorption for panels is not greater than (5) percent by weight after a two-hour immersion when tested in accordance with ASTM C473.

1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.

2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

3. Installation methods.

SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2900 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Quality Standards: GA-216 – Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following:

1. United States Gypsum Company.

2. National Gypsum Properties, LLC.

3. American Gypsum.

3. Or approved equal.

B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD
A. Gypsum Board Type X (fire -resistant) or Type C or Type ULIX as required by fire rated
design and acoustic requirements: 5/8 inch thick, 4-foot wide and up to 16- foot-long conforming to ASTM C1396 with long edges tapered.

B. Hi-impact XP Gypsum Board: 5/8” thick moisture and mold resistant with tapered edges; paper faced gypsum board with superior impact resistance & face paper folded around long edges to reinforce and protect core, ends cut square and finished smooth, typical at all locations. See plans for more info. Typical provide moisture resistant at wet locations.

C. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C630; 5/8 inch thick, ends cut square and finished smooth. 48-inch width, maximum permissible length; ends and edges straight and solid, edges tapered. Board consisting of a noncombustible water-resistant gypsum core, surfaced on face and back with SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2900 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
water-repellent paper bonded to the core & face paper folded around long edges to reinforce and protect core, to be used at wet locations, see plans.

2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Corner Beads and Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216.

B. Joint Materials: Reinforcing tape and joint compound.

C. Fasteners: Type S12 screws.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01 7300 – Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates, and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work.

D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the City.

3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated on the Drawings.

B. Fasten gypsum board to furring or framing with screws.

C. Tape, fill, and sand joints.

3.3 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE
A. Levels: Install tape bedding compound, tape, and finishing cement on joints in wallboard as required for specified levels of finish.

B. Levels 2 through 5:

1. Install joint cement and finishing cement over screw heads. Treat all inside corners with joint cement, tape, and finishing cement. Treat outside corners with corner beads and finishing cement.

2. Provide metal casing beads at all edges of gypsum wallboard, which abut ceiling, wall, or column finish, and elsewhere as required, such as openings, offsets, etc. Install all exposed joints, trims, and attachments non-apparent SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2900 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
following installation of paint or other finishes. If joints and fasteners are visibl
y apparent, correct defects as required.

3. Seal raw edges of plumbing openings and boards that have been cut to fit with sealing compound brushed on.

4. When entire installation is completed, correct and repair broken, dented, scratched or damaged wallboard before installation of finish materials by other trades.

C. Level 4: Walls and ceilings are scheduled to receive paint finish.

1. Level 1, plus three (3) separate coats of compound at joints, angles, fasteners, and accessories. Compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.

D. Level 5: Install one coat of skim coat over entire surface, followed by one coat of drywall primer over entire surface prior to painting

3.4 REQUIRED LEVELS OF FINISH
A. Finishes shall conform to GA 214
B. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, levels of finish required shall be as follows:

1. Level 1: Plenum areas above ceilings, insides of shafts, and other concealed areas. Taping to be as required for fire rated assemblies.

2. Level 2: Water-resistant wallboard backing for high moisture areas to be covered with a water resistant surface other than tile, vinyl or paint, i.e stainless steel cladding etc.

3. Level 3: Backing for vinyl wall covering and adhered acoustic tile. Also, provide where textured finish is indicated.

4. Level 4: Exposed painted wallboard in storage rooms, utility rooms, janitor rooms, and similar spaces not requiring Level 5 finish.

5. Level 5: Exposed, painted wallboard in offices, meeting rooms, kitchen, and corridors.

3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until Substantial Completion.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

Payment for items of work covered under Division 9 of the plans and these specifications shall be based on the lump sum bid pricing identified in the Bid Schedule. No additional compensation will be allowed.

SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD
MILLS PARK 09 2900 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 3000
TILE
MILLS PARK 09 3000 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Tile and Accessories: Floor Unglazed and Wall Glazed.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealant.

1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A108.5, 1999 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile Installed with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

2. ANSI A108.10, 1999 - Specifications for Installation of Grout in Tilework.

3. ANSI A118.1, 1999 - Standard Specification for Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar.

4. ANSI A118.4, 1999 - Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

5. ANSI A118.9, 1999 - Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units

6. ANSI A137.1, 1988 - Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

B. ASTM International (ASTM):

1. ASTM C 50 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement.

2. ASTM C 207 - Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes.

3. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath.

C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, 2007.

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Division 1 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals.

1. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
a. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
b. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. c. Installation methods.

2. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details.

3. Manufacturer's Certificate:
a. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. b. For each shipment, type and composition of tile provide a Master Grade Certificate signed by the manufacturer and the installer certifying that products meet or exceed the specified requirements of ANSI A137.1.

SECTION 09 3000
TILE
MILLS PARK 09 3000 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS

4. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Company experienced in performing the Work of this Section.

B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type and color of tile from a single source. Obtain each type and color of mortar, adhesive and grout from the same source.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Protect adhesives and liquid additives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Store tile and setting materials on elevated platforms, under cover and in a dry location and protect from contamination, dampness, freezing or overheating.

1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during tiling and for a minimum of 7 days after completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide for Owner's use a minimum of 2 percent of the primary sizes and colors of tile specified, boxed, and clearly labeled.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering items which may be incorporated I the Work include the following:

1. Dal-Tile Corporation.

2. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.

3. Roca Tile Group.

4. Or approved equal as provided in Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements.

2.2 TILE
A. General: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions and other characteristics indicated. Provide tile in the locations and of the types SECTION 09 3000
TILE
MILLS PARK 09 3000 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS
of colors and pattern indicated on the Drawings and identified in the Schedule and the end of this Section. Tile shall also be provided in accordance with the following:

1. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges selected under Submittal of samples, blend tile in the factory and package so tile taken from one package shows the same range of colors as those taken from other packages.

2. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted tile assemblies as standard with the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified.

3. Factory Applied Temporary Protective Coatings: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with a continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

B. Floor Unglazed Porcelain Tile or approved non-skid materials shall be used for restroom floor.:

1. Colors: As scheduled.

2. Trim Units: Matching cove base, cove base corner, bullnose, cove/inside finger cove, radius cap, sink rail incorner/outcorner, outside cove corner shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.

3. Tile grout color as specified in drawings.

4. Material samples shall be provided for approval by appropriate City Staff.

C. Wall Glazed Porcelain Tile shall be used for the wall surface.:

1. Colors: As scheduled.

2. Trim Units: Matching cove base, cove base corner, bullnose, cove/inside finger cove, radius cap, sink rail incorner/outcorner, outside cove corner shapes in sizes coordinated with field tile.

3. Tile grout color as specified in drawings.

4. Material samples shall be provided for approval by appropriate City Staff.

D. See Color / Material Schedule on Drawings for size and color.

2.3 SETTING MATERlALS
A. Mortar Bed Materials:

1. Portland cement: ÅSTM C150, type 1, gray or white.

2. Hydrated Lime: ÅSTM C207, Type S.

3. Sand: ÅSTM C144, fine.

4. Latex additive: As approved.

5. Water: Clean and potable.

B. Grout:

1. Standard Grout: Cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in ANSI A118.6; color as selected.

2. Polymer modified cement grout, sanded or unsanded, as specified in SECTION 09 3000
TILE
MILLS PARK 09 3000 - 4

BLDG RENOVATIONS
ANSI A118.7; color as selected.

C. Membrane at Walls:

1. 4 mil (0.1 mm) thick polyethylene film, ASTM D4397,ANSI A 118.10.

2. Reinforced asphalt paper.

D. Reinforcing Mesh: 2-inch by 2-inch (50 by 50 mm) size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized.

E. Cementitious Backing Units

1. ANSI A 118.9 or ASTM C 1325 (Type B).

2. 2” alkali – resistant glass fiber mesh type.

PART 2 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Division 1 - Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work.

1. Verify that wall surfaces are free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials, smooth and flat within tolerances specified in ANSI A137.1 and are ready to receive tile.

3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect surrounding work from damage.

B. Remove any curing compounds or other contaminates.

C. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean.

D. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances.

E. Install cementitious backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape joints and corners, cover with skim coat of dry-set mortar to a feather edge.

F. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCA Handbook recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Arrange pattern so that a full tile or joint is centered on each wall and that no tile less than 1/2 width is used. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings.

SECTION 09 3000
TILE
MILLS PARK 09 3000 - 5

BLDG RENOVATIONS
C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor joints.

D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed.

3.4 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE
A. Wall Tile: Install over cementitious backer units on studs, in accordance with TCA Handbook Method W244C-07, using membrane at toilet rooms.

B. Floor Tile: on cement mortar bed, install in accordance with TCA Handbook method F121-07 OR if existing slab is not depressed for a mortar bed install tile floor using the dry-set mortar, Later-Portland Cement Mortar, Epoxy of Furan Grout TSA method F115-07.

3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 72 hours after installation.

B. Cover floors with kraft paper and protect from dirt and residue from other trades.

C. Where floor will be exposed for prolonged periods cover with plywood or other similar type walkways

END OF SECTION
SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 1

BLDG RENOVATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:

1. Quarry tile floor and wall base applied using cementitious thin set mortar on concrete slabs.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 01 - General Requirements.

2. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete.

3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

4. Section 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors Frames.

5. Section 09 0561 - Moisture Testing for Flooring Installation.

6. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board.

7. Section 09 3016 – Ceramic Tiling.

1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data, standard specifications, Safety Data Sheets, and other technical information for each product specified.

B. Material Samples:

1. Manufacturer’s standard palette, indicating full range of tile colors, textures, and grout colors.

2. Quarry floor tile, base, and corner pieces, and metal trim transitions.

C. Mock-Ups: For each type, color, and texture, minimum one foot square or three full tile courses, on Plexiglas to demonstrate proper bond mortar and coverage; grout color, hardness, and depth.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's preparation and installation instructions.

E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 2

BLDG RENOVATIONS
F. Maintenance Data: Indicating recommended methods and materials for cleaning and stain removal.

1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

1. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

2. ANSI A108.5 – Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

3. ANSI 118.3 - Specifications for Chemical Resistant, Water Cleanable Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy and Water Cleanable Tile-Setting Epoxy Adhesive.

4. ANSI A118.4 - Specifications for Modified Dry-Set Cement Mortar.

5. ANSI A118.10 – Specifications for Load Bearing, Bonded, Waterproof Membranes for Thin-Set Ceramic Tile and Dimension Stone Installation.

6. ANSI A137.1 – American National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile.

7. ANSI A326.3 - Test Method for Dynamic Coefficient of Friction of Hard Surface Flooring Materials.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM C373 - Standard Test Methods for Determination of Water Absorption and Associated Properties by Vacuum Method for Pressed Ceramic Tile and Glass Tiles and Boil Method for Extruded Ceramic Tiles and Non-tile Fired Ceramic Whiteware Products.

2. ASTM C499 - Standard Test Method for Facial Dimensions and Thickness of Flat, Rectangular Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile.

3. ASTM C650 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances.

4. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.

5. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials- Sponge or Expanded Rubber.

SECTION 09 3016

QUARRY TILING
MILLS PARK 09 3016 - 3

BLDG RENOVATIONS

6. ASTM E96 – Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

C. Tile Council of North America (TCNA):

1. Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile installation.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

1. Tile Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this Section with five years minimum experience.

Carson City CouncilJune 17, 2025

Carson City Council
June 17, 2025